OM60Q78U

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Lexus LX 570 Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 628 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Lexus 2018 LX570 Owner's Manual (OM60Q78U)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index Search by illustration

1For safety

and security Make sure to read through them

2Instrument cluster How to read the gauges and meters, the variety of

warning lights and indicators, etc.

3Operation of

each component

Opening and closing the doors and windows,

adjustment before driving, etc.

4Driving Operations and advice which are necessary for driving

5Interior features Usage of the interior features, etc.

6Maintenance

and care Caring for your vehicle and maintenance procedures

7When trouble

arises What to do in case of malfunction or emergency

8Vehicle

specifications Vehicle specifications, customizable features, etc.

9For owners Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt

and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index Search by symptom

Search alphabetically

TABLE OF CONTENTS2

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For your information...................................8

Reading this manual...................................12

How to search..............................................13

Pictorial index...............................................14

1-1. For safe use

Before driving ................................ 26

For safe driving..............................28

Seat belts..........................................30

SRS airbags.....................................38

Front passenger occupant

classification system .................50

Safety information for

children..........................................56

Child restraint systems............... 57

Installing child restraints............. 62

Exhaust gas precautions.............74

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system....... 75

Alarm..................................................77

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and

indicators.......................................82

Gauges and meters.....................88

Multi-information display ............91

Head-up display..........................100

Fuel consumption

information ................................. 105

3-1. Key information

Keys....................................................110

3-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

Side doors........................................115

Back door .......................................122

Smart access system with

push-button start.......................132

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats ..................................... 140

Rear seats .......................................142

Driving position memory...........151

Head restraints............................ 155

3-4. Adjusting the steering

wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel............................. 158

Inside rear view mirror............. 160

Outside rear view mirrors .......162

3-5. Opening, closing the

windows and moon roof

Power windows............................165

Moon roof...................................... 168

1For safety and security

2Instrument cluster

3Operation of each

component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle ......................174

Cargo and luggage ................... 182

Vehicle load limits ...................... 186

Trailer towing ................................187

Dinghy towing.............................204

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch...........205

Automatic transmission........... 210

Turn signal lever...........................217

Parking brake............................... 218

4-3. Operating the lights

and wipers

Headlight switch ..........................221

Automatic High Beam............. 224

Fog light switch...........................229

Windshield wipers and

washer...........................................231

Rear window wiper and

washer.........................................235

Headlight cleaner switch........238

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap.....239

4-5. Using the driving support

systems

Lexus Safety System+.............. 242

PCS (Pre-Collision

System) ....................................... 249

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert)..............................................261

Dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed

range............................................ 269

Cruise control.............................. 281

Driving mode select

switch...........................................284

Intuitive parking assist..............287

4-Wheel AHC (Active

Height Control

Suspension)...............................295

Four-wheel drive system........303

Crawl Control (with Turn

Assist function) ........................307

Multi-terrain Select.....................312

Multi-terrain Monitor.................316

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....363

• BSM function......................... 367

• RCTA function........................371

Driving assist systems...............377

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips.....................382

Off-road precautions...............386

4Driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS4

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch/12.3-inch

display..........................................392

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge .....398

5-3. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Front automatic air

conditioning system...............399

Rear air conditioning

system........................................... 410

Heated steering wheel/seat

heaters/seat ventilators.........413

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list...........................417

• Interior lights........................... 418

• Personal lights.........................419

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features............420

• Glove box.................................421

• Console box ............................421

• Overhead console.............. 422

• Cup holders........................... 423

• Bottle holders........................ 424

• Card holder ........................... 424

• Auxiliary boxes.....................425

Luggage compartment

features........................................427

5-6. Using the other interior

features

Other interior features............430

• Cool box..................................430

• Sun visors..................................431

• Vanity mirrors.........................431

• Clock........................................ 432

• Power outlets ........................433

• Wireless charger.................435

• Armrest.................................... 442

• Rear door sunshades......... 443

• Coat hooks.............................443

• Assist grips ............................. 444

Garage door opener...............445

LEXUS Enform Safety

Connect...................................... 452

5Interior features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior................458

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior....................461

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements............................464

General maintenance..............466

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M)

programs....................................469

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions................................470

Hood................................................472

Engine compartment............... 473

Tires.................................................486

Tire inflation pressure ..............495

Wheels...........................................499

Air conditioning filter................ 501

Electronic key battery..............503

Checking and replacing

fuses..............................................505

Light bulbs ....................................508

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers................... 510

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ......511

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed .................................512

If you think something is

wrong............................................ 518

Fuel pump shut off system........519

If a warning light turns

on or a warning buzzer

sounds .........................................520

If a warning message is

displayed ....................................528

If you have a flat tire..................532

If the engine will not start........544

If the electronic key does

not operate properly.............546

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.................................549

If your vehicle overheats.........552

If the vehicle becomes

stuck.............................................555

6Maintenance and care 7When trouble arises

TABLE OF CONTENTS6

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.)..................558

Fuel information .........................566

Tire information..........................569

8-2. Customization

Customizable features............580

8-3. Initialization

Items to initialize.........................593

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners ....................................596

Seat belt instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)..............................................597

SRS airbag instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)..............................................599

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)...............................608

Alphabetical index ..................................612

8Vehicle specifications

9For owners

Index

For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia system, refer to the

“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for information regarding

the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Audio/video system

• Rear seat entertainment system

• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For your information

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including

options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your

vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However,

because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to

make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ from your

vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from

under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage

check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are cur-

rently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-

ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any

damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with

non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may

even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems

resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic

systems such as:

●Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system

●Lexus Safety System+

●Cruise control system

●Anti-lock brake system

●SRS airbag system

●Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instruc-

tions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

Main Owner’s Manual

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Your Lexus is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain

data, such as:

• Engine speed

• Accelerator status

•Brake status

• Vehicle speed

•Shift position

The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is

equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record

images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

●Data transmission

Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Lexus without noti-

fication to you.

●Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunctions, con-

duct research and development, and improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle

is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or vehicle

owner

●Usage of data collected through Lexus Enform (U.S. mainland only)

If your Lexus has Lexus Enform and if you have subscribed to those services, please

refer to the Lexus Enform Telematics Subscription Service Agreement for information

on data collected and its usage.

●To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by Lexus,

please visit www.lexus.com/privacyvts/.

Vehicle data recordings

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment

or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety

systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;

no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such

as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying

data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehi-

cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as

law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have

access to the vehicle or the EDR.

●Disclosure of the EDR data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when:

• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle) is

obtained

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a government

agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

However, if necessary, Lexus may:

• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance

• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing informa-

tion about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

Event data recorder

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive

chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as

they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS

airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or

by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may

include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

Scrapping of your Lexus

Perchlorate Material

WARNING

■General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and

certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which

could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or

pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the

driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a

collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

■General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use

the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a

danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon

roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold tem-

peratures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Reading this manual

WARNING:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause death or serious injury

to people.

NOTICE:

Explains something that, if not obeyed, could cause damage to or a mal-

function in the vehicle or its equipment.

Indicates operating or working procedures. Follow the steps in

numerical order.

Indicates the action (pushing,

turning, etc.) used to operate

switches and other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an

operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Indicates the component or posi-

tion being explained.

Means “Do not”, “Do not do this”,

or “Do not let this happen”.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

How to search

■Searching by name

• Alphabetical index.................P. 612

■Searching by installation position

• Pictorial index.............................P. 14

■Searching by symptom or sound

• What to do if...

(Troubleshooting)................P. 608

■Searching by title

• Table of contents.........................P. 2

14 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Pictorial index

■Exterior

Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 115

Locking/unlocking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 115

Opening/closing the door glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

Locking/unlocking by using the mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 546

Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 522, 528

Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122

Opening from outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 123

Warning lights/warning messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 522, 528

Outside rear view mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Adjusting the mirror angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Folding the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 151

Defogging the mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 382

To prevent freezing (windshield wiper de-icer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405

Precautions against car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 459

Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239

Refueling method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 239

Fuel type/fuel tank capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 560

Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 486

Tire size/inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 565

Winter tires/tire chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 382

Checking/rotation/tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 486

Coping with flat tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 532

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472

Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 472

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 560

Coping with overheat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 552

Camera*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 316

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Parking lights/daytime running lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Fog lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 229

Turn signal lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217

Stop/tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Hill-start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 377

License plate lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Back-up lights

Shifting the shift lever to R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

Side marker lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Light bulbs of the exterior lights for driving

*: If equipped

16 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Instrument panel

Engine switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Starting the engine/changing the modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 205

Emergency stop of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 511

When the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 544

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528

Shift lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 210

Changing the shift position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 210

Precautions against towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 512

When the shift lever does not move. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 215

Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 88

Reading the meters/adjusting the instrument panel light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 88

Warning lights/indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 82

When the warning lights come on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 520

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 91

Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 91

When the warning messages are displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528

Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 218

Applying/releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 218

Precautions against winter season . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 383

Warning buzzer/message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 220, 528

Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 217

Headlight switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Headlights/parking lights/tail lights/daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 221

Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 229

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231

Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 235

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 231, 235

Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 485

Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 528

Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 510

Fuel filler door opener. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 240

Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 472

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 158

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 158

Driving position memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 151

Front air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 399

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 399

Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 405

Audio system*

Hands-free system*

*: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

18 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Switches

Outside rear view mirror switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 162

Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

Door lock switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117

Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 165

Driving position memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 151

Automatic High Beam switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 224

Headlight cleaner switch* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 238

HUD (Head-up display) switches*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 100

Easy access mode switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 297

Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 89

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Tire pressure warning reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 487

PCS (Pre-Collision System) switch*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 253

Power back door switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122

Power back door main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 122

VIEW switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 316

Intuitive parking assist switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 287

*: If equipped

20 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Audio remote control switches*1

Talk switch*1

Telephone switches*1

Meter control switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 93

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 269

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) switch*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 261

Cruise control switch

Cruise control*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 281

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range*2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 269

Paddle shift switches*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 212

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Crawl Control switches/Multi-terrain Select mode

selector switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 307, 312

VSC OFF switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 378

Center differential lock/unlock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 304

Second start mode switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 211

Four-wheel drive control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 303

Height select/height control OFF switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 295

Driving mode select switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 284

Front seat heater/ventilator switches*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 413

Heated steering wheel switch*2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 414

Remote Touch*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 392

*1: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

*2: If equipped

22 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Interior

SRS airbags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 38

Floor mats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 26

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 140

Rear seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 142

Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 155

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 30

Console box*1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420

Cool box*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 430

Inside lock buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 117

Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420

Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 420

Rear air conditioning system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 410

Rear seat entertainment system*1, 2

Assist grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 444

Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 160

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431

Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 431

Personal/interior lights*3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 417

Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P. 168

“SOS” button*1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 452

Garage door opener buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P. 445

*1: If equipped

*2: Refer to “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

*3: The illustration shows the front, but they are also equipped in the rear.

24 Pictorial index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security 1

1-1. For safe use

Before driving.................................26

For safe driving ..............................28

Seat belts..........................................30

SRS airbags.....................................38

Front passenger occupant

classification system..................50

Safety information for

children ..........................................56

Child restraint systems............... 57

Installing child restraints.............62

Exhaust gas precautions............ 74

1-2. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system.......75

Alarm..................................................77

26 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Before driving

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and

model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into

the floor mat eyelets.

Turn the upper knob of each retain-

ing hook (clip) to secure the floor

mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

Floor mat

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the ped-

als while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to

stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■When installing the driver’s floor mat

●Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles,

even if they are Lexus Genuine floor mats.

●Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

●Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) provided.

●Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

●Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

■Before driving

●Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in

the correct place with all the provided retain-

ing hooks (clips). Be especially careful to per-

form this check after cleaning the floor.

●With the engine stopped and the shift lever in

P, fully depress each pedal to the floor to

make sure it does not interfere with the floor

mat.

28 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safe driving

Adjust the angle of the seatback so

that you are sitting straight up and so

that you do not have to lean forward

to steer. (→P. 140)

Adjust the seat so that you can

depress the pedals fully and so that

your arms bend slightly at the elbow

when gripping the steering wheel.

(→P. 140)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to

the top of your ears. (→P. 155)

Wear the seat belt correctly. (→P. 30)

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehi-

cle. (→P. 30)

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 57)

For safe driving, adjust the seat and mirror to an appropriate position before

driving.

Correct driving posture

Correct use of the seat belts

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Make sure that you can see backward clearly by adjusting the inside and outside

rear view mirrors properly. (→P. 160, 162)

Adjusting the mirrors

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

●Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effec-

tiveness of the seat belt and head restraint.

●Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop

the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident and the adjustment mech-

anism may also be damaged.

●Always observe the legal speed limit when driving on public roads.

●When driving over long distances, take regular breaks before you start to feel tired.

Also, if you feel tired or sleepy while driving, do not force yourself to continue driving

and take a break immediately.

30 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Seat belts

●Extend the shoulder belt so that it

comes fully over the shoulder, but

does not come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low as possi-

ble over the hips.

●Adjust the position of the seatback.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat.

●Do not twist the seat belt.

To fasten the seat belt, push the plate

into the buckle until a click sound is

heard.

To release the seat belt, press the

release button.

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the

vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

Fastening and releasing the seat belt (except for the third center seat)

Release button

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Pull out the tab.

Push tab B into buckle B until a click-

ing sound is heard.

Push tab A into buckle A until a

clicking sound is heard.

To release, push the release button on

buckle A.

Fastening and releasing the third center seat belt (if equipped)

Tab B

Tab A

Tab B

Buckle B

Tab A

Buckle A

Release button

32 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Push the release button on buckle A.

Push either the mechanical key or

tab A into buckle B.

When releasing and storing the seat

belt, hold the belt while winding it back

gently.

Put tabs A and B together and stow

them in the holder.

To reattach the seat belt, reverse the

above procedure, pulling out the tabs

and inserting tab B into buckle B.

Releasing and stowing the third center seat belt (if equipped)

Buckle A

Tab A

Buckle B

Tab A

Tab B

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

down while pressing the release but-

ton.

Push the seat belt shoulder anchor

up.

Move the height adjuster up and down

as needed until you hear a click.

The pretensioners help the seat belts to

quickly restrain the occupants by

retracting the seat belts when the vehi-

cle is subjected to certain types of

severe frontal collision or a vehicle roll-

over.

The pretensioners do not activate in the

event of a minor frontal impact, a side

impact or a rear impact.

Adjusting the seat belt shoulder anchor height (front and second out-

board seats)

Seat belt pretensioners (front and second outboard seats)

34 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you

lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can

move around fully.

■Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even

slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to

hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more. (→P. 62)

■When the third center seat belt cannot be extended (if equipped)

■Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size.

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 57)

●When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt, follow

the instructions on P. 30 regarding seat belt usage.

■Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first

collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent collisions.

■Seat belt extender

Put your fingers between the seat belt and the

holder.

Pull the seat belt forcefully in the direction of the

arrow and then release it to unlock.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely

because they are not long enough, a personal-

ized seat belt extender is available from your

Lexus dealer free of charge.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Wearing a seat belt

●Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

●Always wear a seat belt properly.

●Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more

than one person at once, including children.

●Lexus recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt

and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

●To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than necessary. The

seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in

the seats.

●Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

●Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

■Pregnant women

■People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (→P. 30)

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt

in the proper way. (→P. 30)

Women who are pregnant should position the

lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the

same manner as other occupants, extending

the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder

and avoiding belt contact with the rounding of

the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the

pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer

death or serious injury as a result of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or a collision.

36 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■When the children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around

a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the

belt.

■Seat belt pretensioners

●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will

disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the pas-

senger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt pretensioner for the front passen-

ger’s seat may not activate in the event of a collision.

●If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the

seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Lexus dealer.

■Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your shoulder.

The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of protection in an accident and cause death or serious

injuries in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 33)

■When using the third center seat belt (if equipped)

■Seat belt damage and wear

●Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be jammed in

the door.

●Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts. Do

not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belt cannot protect an

occupant from death or serious injury.

●Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

●Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a

serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

●Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling

may lead to incorrect operation.

Do not use the third center seat belt with either

buckle released. Fastening only one of the

buckles may result in death or serious injury in

case of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■Using a seat belt extender

●Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system because the

belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or

serious injury in the event of an accident.

●The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another

person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

NOTICE

■Using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not

on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

38 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

SRS airbags

◆SRS front airbags

SRS driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from

impact with interior components

SRS knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of

severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work

together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

◆SRS side and curtain shield airbags

SRS front side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants

SRS rear side airbags

Can help protect the torso of occupants in the second outboard seats

SRS curtain shield airbags

●Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outboard seats

●Can help prevent the occupants from being thrown from the vehicle in

the event of vehicle rollover

40 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

SRS airbag system components

Knee airbags

Curtain shield airbags

Front passenger airbag

Side impact sensors (front door)

Front side airbags

SRS warning light

Side impact sensors (rear)

Rear side airbags (second outboard

seat)

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Safing sensor (rear)

Airbag sensor assembly

Front impact sensors

Seat belt pretensioners and force

limiters (front seats)

Driver’s seat position sensor

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator lights

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

Front passenger occupant classifi-

cation system (ECU and sensors)

Seat belt pretensioners (second

outboard seats)

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on the

US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sensor assembly

(ECU) controls airbag deployment based on information obtained from the sen-

sors etc. shown in the system components diagram above. This information

includes crash severity and occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to

help restrain the motion of the occupants.

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

●The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or seri-

ous injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises:

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation,

placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear

margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to

your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your

driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals com-

fortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) dis-

tance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of

the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road,

raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle

has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward

your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintain-

ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel

controls.

42 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The

front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

●Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously

injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recom-

mends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front

passenger seat. (→P. 57)

●If the seat belt extender has been connected

to the front seat belt buckles but the seat belt

extender has not also been fastened to the

latch plate of the seat belt, the SRS front air-

bags will judge that the driver and front pas-

senger are wearing the seat belt even though

the seat belt has not been connected. In this

case, the SRS front airbags may not activate

correctly in a collision, resulting in death or

serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure

to wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

●Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean

against the dashboard.

●Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the

knees of a front passenger.

●Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold

items on their knees.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail

or the front, side and rear pillars.

●Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passen-

ger seats toward the door or put their head or

hands outside the vehicle.

●Do not attach anything to or lean anything

against areas such as the dashboard, steering

wheel pad and lower portion of the instru-

ment panel.

These items can become projectiles when the

SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags

deploy.

44 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■SRS airbag precautions

●Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items

could become projectiles and may cause death or serious injury, should the SRS cur-

tain shield airbags deploy.

●If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to

remove it.

●Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate

as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the

side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to

inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag compo-

nents.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

●Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have

deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

●If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbags have deployed, open a door or

window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any resi-

due as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

●If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and

front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your

Lexus dealer.

●Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat. Doing so will

disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor from detecting the pas-

senger’s weight properly. As a result, the SRS front airbags for the front passenger

may not deploy in the event of a collision.

●Do not attach anything to areas such as a

door, windshield glass, side door glass, front

or rear pillars, roof side rail and assist grip.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

●Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS airbags, due to the

extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

●A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

●Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the

front seats, parts of the front, side and rear pillars and roof side rails, may be hot for sev-

eral minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

●The windshield may crack.

●For Lexus Enform Safety Connect subscribers, if the SRS airbags deploy or in the event

of a severe rear-end collision, the system is designed to send an emergency call to the

response center, notifying them of the vehicle’s location (without needing to push the

“SOS” button) and an agent will attempt to speak with the occupants to ascertain the

level of emergency and assistance required. If the occupants are unable to communi-

cate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency and helps to dispatch the

necessary emergency services. (→P. 452)

WARNING

■Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without

consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate)

accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

●Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

●Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument

panel, dashboard, seats, seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails

●Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant

compartment

●Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches or

roof luggage carrier

●Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

●Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD players

●Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

46 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

●The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds the set thresh-

old level (the level of force corresponding to an approximately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30

km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move

or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in which the

front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck

●Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt pretensioners will

activate.

●The SRS front airbags for the front passenger will not activate if there is no passenger

sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the SRS front airbags for the front passen-

ger may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.

■SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that

exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to the impact force

produced by an approximately 3300 lb. [1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle

cabin from a direction perpendicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate

speed of 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h]).

●The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

●The SRS side and curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of a severe frontal colli-

sion.

■Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags and SRS side and curtain shield airbags may also deploy if a seri-

ous impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the

illustration.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown in the illustra-

tion.

●Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard sur-

face

●Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

●Landing hard or falling

●The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal

●The vehicle skids and hits a curb stone

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags (SRS front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear

collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of

the SRS front airbags may occur.

●Collision from the side

●Collision from the rear

●Vehicle rollover

48 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbags

(SRS side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a

collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear collision, if

it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed frontal collision.

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a rear

collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low-speed side or low-speed

frontal collision.

●Collision from the side to the vehicle body

other than the passenger compartment

●Collision from the side at an angle

●Collision from the rear

●Vehicle rollover

●Collision from the rear

●Pitching end over end

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Contact your

Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

●Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

●The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an accident that

was not severe enough to cause the SRS front

airbags to inflate.

●A portion of a door or its surrounding area is

damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was

involved in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

●The pad section of the steering wheel, dash-

board near the front passenger airbag or

lower portion of the instrument panel is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

●The surface of the seats with the side airbag is

scratched, cracked or otherwise damaged.

●The portion of the front, side and rear pillars or

roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing

the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched,

cracked or otherwise damaged.

50 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Front passenger occupant classification system

SRS warning light

For the U.S.A.

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

For Canada

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” indicator light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and acti-

vates or deactivates the devices for the front passenger.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Adult*1

■Child*4 or child restraint system with infant*5

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification

system

Indicator/

warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights “AIR BAG ON”

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off*2 or flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag

Activated

Side airbag

on the front passenger seat

Curtain shield airbag

in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Indicator/

warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”*6

SRS warning light Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off*2 or

flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag

on the front passenger seat Activated

Curtain shield airbag

in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated

52 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Unoccupied

■There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/

warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights Not illuminated

SRS warning light

Off

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag

on the front passenger seat Activated

Curtain shield airbag

in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Indicator/

warning light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights “AIR BAG OFF”

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Deactivated

Side airbag

on the front passenger seat Activated

Curtain shield airbag

in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag Deactivated

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Activated

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in

the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending

on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger is wearing a seat belt.

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt

*4: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front pas-

senger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her

physique or posture.

*5: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A for-

ward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger

seat when it is unavoidable. (→P. 57)

*6: In case the indicator light is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to install the

child restraint system properly. (→P. 62)

54 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Wear the seat belt properly.

●Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt plate has not been left inserted into the

buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

●Make sure the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illuminated when using the seat

belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illu-

minated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, and reconnect

the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not

activate, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.

●Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback

pocket).

●Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the

front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

●Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the

seatback with their legs.

●Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

●Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches the rear seat. This

may cause the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that

the SRS airbags for the front passenger will not activate in the event of a severe acci-

dent. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it

does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possi-

ble when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the

effectiveness of the seat belt system.

●If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illumi-

nated. If the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up

straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to

move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully

rearward.

●When it is unavoidable to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front

passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the

proper order. (→P. 62)

●Do not modify or remove the front seats.

●Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the

SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the front passenger

occupant classification system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

●Child restraint systems installed on the second seat should not contact the front seat-

backs.

●Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion and seat cover, that covers the seat

cushion surface.

●Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

56 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Safety information for children

●It is recommended that children sit in the rear seats to avoid accidental con-

tact with the shift lever, wiper switch etc.

●Use the rear door child-protector lock or the window lock switch to avoid

children opening the door while driving or operating the power window acci-

dentally. (→P. 118, 165)

●Do not let small children operate equipment which may catch or pinch body

parts, such as the power window, hood, back door, seats etc.

Observe the following precautions when children are in the vehicle.

Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child becomes

large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

WARNING

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use

the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a

danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows, the moon roof

or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold tempera-

tures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Child restraint systems

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer

than installing one on the front passenger seat.

●Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to

the age and size of the child.

●For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint

system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (→P. 62)

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/

shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child

restraint systems.

Points to remember

58 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the

age and size of the child:

Types of child restraints

Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convert-

ible seat

Forward facing ⎯ Convertible

seat

Booster seat

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat

When you have to use a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, adjust the fol-

lowing:

■Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

●Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large

enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.

●If the child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the

vehicle’s seat belt. (→P. 30)

●The seatback to the most upright position

●The seat cushion to the fully rearward and

highest position

●The seat belt height to the lowest position

60 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■Child restraint precautions

●For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be

properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age

and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint

system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

●Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the

size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is

safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

●Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger air-

bag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint sys-

tem is installed on the front passenger seat.

●A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front passenger seat

only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap

should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap

anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and

always move the seat as far back as possible even if the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator

light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

●Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front

or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender

connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint sys-

tem, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the

event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

●Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the

SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the

child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

●Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child

restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured

properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden

stop, sudden swerve or accident.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around

a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the

belt.

■When the child restraint system is not in use

●Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is not in use. Do

not store the child restraint system unsecured in the passenger compartment.

●If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or

store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

62 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Installing child restraints

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for the

second outboard seats. (Buttons dis-

playing the location of the anchors are

attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child

restraint locking mechanism (ALR/

ELR belts except driver’s seat belt)

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for all

second seats.

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly secure

the child restraints to the outboard second seats using the LATCH anchors or

a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compati-

ble with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children) system.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Fold the seatback forward and then

adjust it as upright as possible.

Take off the covers between the seat

cushion and seatback, then confirm

the position of the LATCH anchors

below the symbol in the seatback.

Installation with LATCH system

64 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Type A

Latch the hooks of the lower straps

onto the LATCH anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether

strap, the top tether strap should be

latched onto the top tether strap

anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower con-

nector system.

Type B

Latch the buckles onto the LATCH

anchors.

If the child restraint has a top tether

strap, the top tether strap should be

latched onto the top tether strap

anchor.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system

indicates the presence of a lower con-

nector system.

Canada only

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Rear-facing ⎯ Infant seat/Convertible seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position. (→P. 142)

Place the child restraint system

on the second seat or the third

outboard seat (if equipped) fac-

ing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function

belt)

66 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Fully extend the shoulder belt and

then allow it to retract slightly in

order to activate the ALR lock

mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to

retract only.

While pushing the child restraint

system down into the second

seat, allow the shoulder belt to

retract until the child restraint sys-

tem is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted

to a point where there is no slack in

the belt, pull the belt to check that it

cannot be extended.

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Forward-facing ⎯ Convertible seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position. (→P. 142)

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

68 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Fully extend the shoulder strap

and then allow it to retract slightly

into the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to

retract only.

While pushing the child restraint

system into the second seat, allow

the shoulder belt to retract until

the child restraint system is

securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted

to a point where there is no slack in

the belt, pull the belt to check that it

cannot be extended.

If the child restraint system has a top tether strap, the top tether strap

should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (→P. 70)

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Booster seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position. (→P. 142)

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint

system. Fit the seat belt to the

child restraint system according

to the manufacturer’s instructions

and insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the belt is

not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is cor-

rectly positioned over the child’s

shoulder, and that the lap belt is as

low as possible. (→P. 30)

70 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Push the buckle release button and fully

retract the seat belt.

Second outboard seats

Secure the child restraint system

using a seat belt or LATCH anchors,

and move the head restraint in place

at the upmost position.

Open the anchor bracket cover,

latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top tether

strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Adjust the head restraint to the

downmost position.

Second center seat

Secure the child restraint system

using a seat belt and remove the

head restraint.

Open the anchor bracket cover,

latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top tether

strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is

securely latched.

Install the head restraint.

■Laws and regulations pertaining to Anchors

The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be

used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

72 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■When installing a booster seat

To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder

belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to

the child. (→P. 34)

■When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the

child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers

may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving

or an accident.

●When installing a child restraint system on the second center seat, adjust both seat

cushions to the same position and align both seatbacks at the same angle. The seat-

backs must be adjusted to the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system can-

not be securely restrained and this may cause death or serious injuries in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

●When using the LATCH anchors for a child restraint system, move the seat as far

back as possible, with the seatback close to the child restraint system.

●If the driver’s seat interferes with the child

restraint system and prevents it from being

attached correctly, attach the child restraint

system to the right-hand rear seat.

●Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does

not interfere with the child restraint system.

●Vehicles with third seats: Child restraint sys-

tem installed on the third seat should not con-

tact the second seatbacks.

●Only put a forward-facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front seat when unavoidable.

When installing a forward-facing child

restraint system on the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible even if

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-

nated. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

WARNING

■When installing a child restraint system

●When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned

across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child’s

neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s shoulder. Failing to do so may result in

death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-

dent.

●Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

●Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure

that it has been securely installed.

●After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.

●Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

●When securing some types of child restraint systems in second or third row seats, it

may not be possible to properly use the seat belts in positions next to the child

restraint without interfering with it or affecting seat belt effectiveness. Be sure your

seat belt fits snugly across your shoulder and low on your hips. If it does not, or if it

interferes with the child restraint, move to a different position. Failure to do so may

result in death or serious injury.

■Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will

not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

■To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the

anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint system. Make sure

the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to

the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

74 1-1. For safe use

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Exhaust gas precautions

Harmful substance to the human body is included in exhaust gases if inhaled.

WARNING

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause exhaust gases enter the vehicle and may lead to an accident

caused by light-headedness, or may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

■Important points while driving

●Keep the back door closed.

●If you smell exhaust gases in the vehicle even when the back door is closed, open the

windows and have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

■When parking

●If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area or a closed area, such as a garage, stop the

engine.

●Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and ensure

that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

●Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing.

If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases

may collect and enter the vehicle.

■Exhaust pipe

The exhaust system needs to be checked periodically. If there is a hole or crack caused

by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle

inspected and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Engine immobilizer system

The indicator light flashes after the

engine switch has been turned off to

indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flashing after

the engine switch has been turned to

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode to indicate that the system has

been canceled.

■System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

■Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

●If the key is in contact with a metallic object

●If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a

built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine

from starting if a key has not been previously registered in the vehicle’s on-

board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee

absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

76 1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico

For vehicles sold in Canada

WARNING

■Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of

the system cannot be guaranteed.

1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

Alarm

The alarm uses light and sound to give an alert when an intrusion is detected.

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm is set:

●A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry

function or wireless remote control. (The doors will lock again automatically.)

●The hood is opened.

●The battery is reconnected.

Close the doors and hood, and lock all

the doors using the entry function or

wireless remote control. The system will

be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being

on to flashing when the system is set.

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarms:

●Unlock the doors using the entry function or wireless remote control.

●Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start

the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

The alarm

Setting the alarm system

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

78 1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

■Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the follow-

ing.

●Nobody is in the vehicle.

●The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

●No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

■Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

●The doors are unlocked using the mechanical

key.

●A person inside the vehicle opens a door or

hood, or unlocks the vehicle using an inside

lock button.

●The battery is recharged or replaced when the

vehicle is locked. (→P. 549)

1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For safety and security

■Alarm-operated door lock

In the following cases, depending on the situation, the door may automatically lock to

prevent improper entry into the vehicle:

●When a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door and the alarm is activated.

●While the alarm is activated, a person remaining in the vehicle unlocks the door.

●When recharging or replacing the battery.

NOTICE

■To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of

the system cannot be guaranteed.

80 1-2. Theft deterrent system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Instrument cluster 2

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and

indicators.......................................82

Gauges and meters.....................88

Multi-information display ............91

Head-up display..........................100

Fuel consumption

information .................................105

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights and indicators

The units used on the speedometer and some indicators may differ depending

on the target region.

The warning lights and indicators on the instrument cluster and center panel

inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration display all warning

lights and indicators illuminated.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicle’s systems.

Warning lights

(U.S.A.)

Brake system warning light

(→P. 520)

*1Automatic headlight

leveling system warning

light (→P. 521)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light

(→P. 520)

*2Low speed four-wheel

drive indicator light

(→P. 522)

*1Charging system warning

light (→P. 520)

*2Center differential lock

indicator light (→P. 522)

(U.S.A.)

Malfunction indicator lamp

(→P. 520) Open door warning light

(→P. 522)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp

(→P. 520) Low fuel level warning light

(→P. 522)

*1SRS warning light

(→P. 520) Driver’s seat belt reminder

light (→P. 522)

(U.S.A.)

ABS warning light

(→P. 520)

*3Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light (→P. 522)

(Canada)

ABS warning light

(→P. 520)

*1Master warning light

(→P. 522)

*1, 4

(if equipped)

PCS warning light

(→P. 521)

*1Tire pressure warning light

(→P. 522)

*1Slip indicator light

(→P. 521)

(U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator

(→P. 522)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to

indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is

on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not

turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.

*3: This light illuminates on the center panel.

*4: The light flashes or illuminates to indicate a malfunction.

*5: This light is displayed on the multi-information display.

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator

(→P. 522)

*1Power steering system

warning light (→P. 522)

*1Brake system warning light

(→P. 523)

*5Brake Override System

warning light (→P. 175)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various sys-

tems.

Indicators

Turn signal indicator

(→P. 217)

(if equipped)

LDA indicator (→P. 261)

(U.S.A.)

Headlight indicator

(→P. 221)

*1, 2

Slip indicator (→P. 378)

(Canada)

Tail light indicator

(→P. 221)

*1VSC OFF indicator

(→P. 378)

Headlight high beam

indicator (→P. 222) Multi-terrain Select

indicator (→P. 312)

Automatic High Beam

indicator (→P. 224)

*1Crawl Control indicator

(→P. 307)

Fog light indicator

(→P. 229)

Automatic transmission

second start indicator

(→P. 210)

*1Eco Driving Indicator

Light (→P. 87)

Low speed four-wheel

drive indicator light

(→P. 303)

Cruise control indicator

(→P. 281, 269) Center differential lock

indicator (→P. 304)

Cruise control “SET”

indicator (→P. 281, 269)

*1Easy access mode

indicator (→P. 295)

(if equipped)

Dynamic radar cruise

control indicator

(→P. 269)

Intuitive parking assist

indicator (→P. 287)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

*1: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to

indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is

on, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not

turn on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*2: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

*3: The light turns on when the system is turned off.

*4: In order to confirm operation, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators illumi-

nate in the following situations:

• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode while the system is set

to on.

• When the system is set to on while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

If the system is functioning correctly, the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators

will turn off after a few seconds.

If the BSM outside rear view mirror indicators do not illuminate or do not turn off,

there may be a malfunction with the system.

If this occurs, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

*5: This light illuminates on the outside rear view mirrors.

*6: This light illuminates on the center panel.

*7: When the outside temperature is approximately 37°F (3°C) or lower, the indicator

will flash for approximately 10 seconds, then stay on.

*1, 3

(if equipped)

PCS warning light

(→P. 249) Turn Assist indicator

(→P. 307)

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

indicator (→P. 363) (U.S.A.)

Parking brake indicator

(→P. 218)

*4, 5 BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

outside rear view mirror

indicators (→P. 363) (Canada)

Parking brake indicator

(→P. 218)

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert) indicator (→P. 371) TRAC OFF indicator

(→P. 378)

(U.S.A.)

“AIR BAG ON/

OFF” indicator

(→P. 50)

*7Low outside temperature

indicator (→P. 88)

(Canada)

“AIR BAG ON/

OFF” indicator

(→P. 50)

*8Smart access system with

push-button start indicator

(→P. 205, 547)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

*8: This light is displayed on the multi-information display.

■Eco Driving Indicator Light

●The vehicle is set to second start mode. (→P. 210)

●The vehicle is set to sport mode or customized mode. (→P. 284)

●The vehicle speed is approximately 81 mph (130 km/h) or higher.

●The Crawl Control is operating. (→P. 307)

●The paddle shift switch (if equipped) is operating.

During Eco-Friendly acceleration operation

(Eco driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light will

turn on. When the acceleration exceeds Zone

of Eco driving (→P. 98), or when the vehicle is

stopped, the light turns off.

Eco Driving Indicator Light will not operate in

the following conditions:

●The shift lever is in any position other than D.

WARNING

■If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as the Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS warning light

not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not

available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious

injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

The units used on the speedometer may differ depending on the target region.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Displays the engine oil pressure

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Voltmeter

Displays the charge state

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (→P. 91)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Odometer and trip meter display

Odometer:

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven

Trip meter:

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip

meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Shift position and shift range display

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range (→P. 210)

4-Wheel AHC display

Display the status of 4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension). (→P. 295)

Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F

(50°C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature

is 37°F (3°C) or lower.

Odometer/trip meter display change button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays

Instrument panel light control dial

The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted

Switches between odometer and trip

meter displays. When the trip meter is

displayed, pressing and holding the

button will reset the trip meter.

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Darker

Brighter

Changing the display

Instrument panel light control

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

■The meters and display illuminate when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■The brightness of the instrument panel lights

When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced slightly unless

the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest setting.

If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are dark, the meter’s brightness will

be reduced slightly. However, when the surroundings are bright, such as during the day-

time, the meter’s brightness will not be reduced even if the tail lights are turned on.

■Customization

The meter display can be customized on the multi-information display. (→P. 580)

WARNING

■The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information

display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond

slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear number

appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to downshift again, causing

rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or

injury.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the engine and its components

●Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates

the maximum engine speed.

●The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is in the red

zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the

engine after it has cooled completely. (→P. 552)

■Voltmeter

When the voltmeter indicates 19 V or higher or 9 V or lower while the engine is run-

ning, there may be a battery or charging system malfunction. Have the vehicle

inspected at your Lexus dealer.

■Engine oil pressure gauge

When the value of the engine oil pressure gauge drops while the engine is running,

stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and check the amount of engine oil.

(→ P. 475)

When the oil pressure drops even though the engine oil amount has not decreased, or

if the oil pressure does not increase when engine oil is added, contact your Lexus

dealer, as there may be a problem with the lubrication system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

The following information will be dis-

played when a menu icon is selected.

(→P. 93)

Some of the information may be dis-

played automatically depending on the

situation.

Drive information

Select to display various drive data. (→P. 94)

Vehicle information display (if equipped)

Select to display the vehicle information. (→P. 95)

Navigation system-linked display

Select to display the following navigation system-linked information.

•Route guidance

• Compass display (north-up display/heading-up display)

Audio system-linked display

Select to enable selection of an audio source or track on the display using the

meter control switches.

Display contents

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Driving assist system information (if equipped)

Select to display the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 269)

When the vehicle is in constant speed control mode (→P. 277), the menu

icon will change to .

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 261)

Warning message display

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is

detected. (→P. 528)

Settings display

Select to change the meter display settings and the operation settings of some

vehicle functions. (→P. 96)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

The multi-information display is operated using the meter control switches.

:Switch menu

: Change displayed con-

tent, scroll up/down the

screen and move the

cursor up/down

Press: Enter/Set

Press and hold: Reset

Return to the previous screen

Press: Displays the screen registered to

When no screen has been registered, the drive information screen will be dis-

played.

Press and hold: Registers the currently displayed screen to

When the confirmation screen is displayed, select yes to register the screen. If the

selected screen cannot be registered, a registration failure message will be shown.

Operating the meter control switches

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

■Drive information

4 of the following items can be registered and displayed as the drive informa-

tion 1 and the drive information 2 (2 items on each screen).

Refer to P. 96 for the registration method of the drive information 1 and the

drive information 2.

●Current fuel consumption (bar type/value type)

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

●Average fuel consumption (after reset*2/after start/after refuel)*1

Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset, the

engine was started, and the vehicle was refueled, respectively.

●Average vehicle speed (after reset*2/after start)

Displays the average vehicle speed since the function was reset and the

engine was started, respectively.

●Elapsed time (after reset*2/after start)

Displays the elapsed time since the function was reset and the engine was

started, respectively.

●Distance (driving range/after start)

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the

quantity of fuel remaining.

• This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that

displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the display may

not be updated.

When refueling, turn the engine switch off. If the vehicle is refueled with-

out turning the engine switch off, the display may not be updated.

*1: Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

*2: The function can be reset by pressing for longer than 1 second when the item to

reset is displayed. If there is more than one item that can be reset, the item selection

screen will appear.

Drive information

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

■Eco Indicator (Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display)

→P. 98

■Speed

Displays the vehicle speed.

■Outside temperature

Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40°F (-40°C) to 122°F

(50°C).

■Sway warning (if equipped)

Detects the sway of the vehicle within a lane, which is often associated with a

decrease in the driver’s attention level, and displays the decrease in attention

using a bar display.

The shorter the bar length, the more the driver may need to rest.

This display is a part of the LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. The display is

enabled when the operating conditions of the vehicle sway warning are met.

(→P. 261)

■Blank screen (display off)

Drive information is not displayed.

■Front tire angle (if equipped)

Displays the direction of the front tires.

The tire direction is displayed in 3 stages for both left and right, in accordance with

the angle of the tire.

If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the display may be disabled

temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.

■Tire inflation pressure

Displays inflation pressure of each tire.

The inflation pressure of the spare tire will be displayed.

■Oil maintenance (if equipped)

Displays the remaining distance before the next maintenance is required.

Vehicle information

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

The settings of some features can be changed by using the meter control

switches.

■Setting procedure

For functions that can be enabled or disabled, the function switches between

on and off each time is pressed.

■Setting items

●LDA (Lane Departure Alert)*

Select to set up LDA. (→P. 580)

• Alert method

• Alert sensitivity

• Sway warning

• Sway sensitivity

●BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

Select to set up BSM. (→P. 580)

•BSM on/off

• RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on/off

●Head-up display*

Select to set up Head-up display. (→P. 580)

• Display brightness/location

• Display content

●Scheduled maintenance

Select to reset the message indicating maintenance is required.

●Oil maintenance*

Select to reset the engine oil maintenance information

Settings display

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

●Meter settings

Select to set the following items.

• Language

Select to change the language on the display.

•Units

Select to change the unit for measure.

• Eco Driving Indicator Light

Select to activate/deactivate the Eco Driving Indicator Light. (→P. 87)

• switch settings

You can register 1 screen as the top screen. To register, press and hold

while the desired screen is displayed.

• Drive information 1 and 2

Select to select up to 2 items that will be displayed on a drive informa-

tion screen, up to 2 drive information screens can be set.

•Pop-up display

Select to set the pop-up displays, which may appear in some situations,

on/off. (→P. 98)

• Accent color

Select to change the accent colors on the screen, such as the cursor

color.

• Initialization

Registered or changed meter settings will be deleted or returned to

their default setting.

*:If equipped

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

■Eco Driving Indicator

■When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The drive information will be reset (only items that can be reset manually).

■Pop-Up display

The pop-up display is displayed on the multi-information display according to the operat-

ing conditions of the following functions:

●Route guidance display of the navigation system-linked system

●Incoming call display of the hands-free phone system (if equipped)

The pop-up display function can be disabled. (→P. 96)

■Tire inflation pressure

●It may take a few minutes to display the tire inflation pressure after the engine switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode. It may also take a few minutes to display the tire infla-

tion pressure after inflation pressure has been adjusted.

●“---” may be displayed if the tire information cannot be determined due to unfavorable

radio wave conditions.

●Tire inflation pressure changes with temperature. The displayed values may also be dif-

ferent from the values measured using a tire pressure gauge.

■When setting up the display

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P.

■Suspension of the settings display

In the following situations, the settings display using the meter control switches will be

suspended.

●When a warning message appears on the multi-information display

●When the vehicle begins to move

■Liquid crystal display

Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic

of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

Eco Driving Indicator Light (→P. 87)

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Suggests the Zone of Eco driving with current

Eco driving ratio based on acceleration.

Eco driving ratio based on acceleration

If the acceleration exceeds Zone of Eco driv-

ing, the right side of Eco Driving Indicator

Zone Display will illuminate.

Zone of Eco driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

WARNING

■Caution for use while driving

For safety, avoid operating the meter control switch while driving as much as possible,

and do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving. Stop the

vehicle and operate the meter control switch. Failure to do so may cause a steering

wheel operation error, resulting in an unexpected accident.

■Cautions while setting up the display

As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle

is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage,

exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the

vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■While setting up the display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the dis-

play features.

100

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Head-up display∗

The head-up display is linked to the meters and navigation system and projects a

variety of information in front of the driver, such as the current vehicle speed and

route guidance to a set destination.

Navigation system-linked display area (→P. 102)

Displays the following items, which are linked to the navigation system:

• Route guidance to destination

•Compass

Message display area (→P. 102)

Displays the following items:

• Warning/Message (if equipped)

• Audio system operation status

• Outside temperature

Warning and information icons (→P. 102)

Vehicle speed display area

Displays the following items:

• Vehicle speed

• Speed limit

∗: If equipped

Summary of functions

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

101

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Driving assist system status display area (if equipped)

Select to display the operational status of the following systems:

• Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range (→P. 269)

• LDA (Lane Departure Alert) (→P. 261)

• Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display. For

details, refer to the explanations of each system.

HUD (Head-up display) switch (→P. 101)

◆Enabling/Disabling the head-up display

Press the HUD (head-up display)

switch.

◆Changing settings of the head-up display

Select on the multi-information display (→P. 91), and then select “HUD”

to change the following settings:

■Display brightness/location

Select to adjust the brightness and location of the head-up display.

■Display content

Select to enable/disable the following items:

• Route guidance to destination

• Driving assist system status

•Compass

• Audio system operation status

Using the head-up display

102

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Displays the following multi-information display linked icons:

: Master warning icon

Displayed when a warning message is displayed on the multi-information

display. (→P. 528)

: Information icon

Displayed when a suggestion/advice pop-up display is displayed on the

multi-information display. (→P. 91)

Displays the following items in the appropriate situation:

■Warning/Message (if equipped)

Displays the following system warning/messages:

• Pre-collision warning (pre-collision system)

• Notification message (Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range)

■Audio system operation status

Displayed when the audio system is operated.

■Outside temperature

Displayed in the following situations:

• When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode

• When the low outside temperature indicator is flashing

Displayed content is the same as that displayed on the multi-information display.

(→P. 88)

Displays the following items which are linked to the navigation system:

■Route guidance to destination

Displayed when the navigation system is performing route guidance. When

approaching an intersection, an arrow will be displayed to indicate the sug-

gested direction of travel.

■Compass

Displays the direction of travel.

Warning and information icons

Message display area

Navigation system-linked display area

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

103

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

■Head-up display

The head-up display may seem dark or hard to see when viewed through sunglasses,

especially polarized sunglasses.

Adjust the brightness of the head-up display or remove your sunglasses.

■When the battery is disconnected

The customize settings of the head-up display will be reset.

■Display brightness

●The brightness of the head-up display can be adjusted on of the multi-information

display. Also, it is automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness.

●When the vehicle is stopped, the display may dim temporarily. This is not a malfunction.

■Enabling/disabling of the head-up display

If the head-up display is disabled, it will remain disabled when the engine switch is turned

off then back to IGNITION ON mode.

■Head-up display automatic position adjustment

If the display position is recorded into memory, the head-up display will be automatically

adjusted to the desired position. (→P. 151)

WARNING

■Before using the head-up display

●Check that the position and brightness of the head-up display image does not inter-

fere with safe driving. Incorrect adjustment of the image’s position or brightness may

obstruct the driver’s view and lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not continuously look at the head-up display while driving as you may fail to see

pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

■Caution for changing settings of the head-up display

As the engine needs to be running while changing the settings of the head-up display,

ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area

such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect

and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

104

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to components

■When changing the settings of the head-up display

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while the changing the

settings of the head-up display.

●Do not place any drinks near the head-up dis-

play projector. If the projector gets wet, elec-

trical malfunctions may result.

●Do not place anything on or put stickers onto

the head-up display projector.

Doing so could interrupt head-up display

indications.

●Do not touch the inside of the head-up display

projector or thrust sharp edges or the like into

the projector.

Doing so could cause mechanical malfunc-

tions.

105

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

Fuel consumption information

Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch knob (→P. 392)

“MENU” button

“ENTER” button

Fuel consumption information can be displayed on the Remote Touch screen.

The fuel consumption information can be displayed and operated on the side

display.

106

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info” on the “Menu”

screen, and then select “Fuel Consumption”.

■Trip information

If the “Past Record” screen is displayed, select “Trip Information”.

Resetting the consumption data

Fuel consumption in the past 15

minutes

Current fuel consumption

Average vehicle speed since the

engine was started.

Elapsed time since the engine

was started.

Cruising range (→P. 107)

Average fuel consumption for the past 15 minutes is divided by color into past

averages and averages attained since the engine switch was last turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode. Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Fuel consumption

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

107

2. Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster

■Past record

If the “Trip Information” screen is displayed, select “Past Record”.

Resetting the past record data

Best recorded fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Previous fuel consumption record

Updating the average fuel con-

sumption data

The average fuel consumption his-

tory is divided by color into past

averages and the average fuel con-

sumption since the last reset. Use the

displayed average fuel consumption

as a reference.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

■Updating the past record data

Update the average fuel consumption by selecting “Update” to measure the current fuel

consumption again.

■Resetting the data

The fuel consumption data can be deleted by selecting “Clear”.

■Cruising range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel

remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption.

As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

108

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

2. Instrument cluster

Vehicle information can be displayed on the side display (→P. 397), then select

or to select the desired screen.

Fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel consumption

for the past 10 minutes in 1 minute inter-

vals, as well as the cruising range.

Past record

Displays the average fuel consumption

and highest fuel consumption.

Trip information

Displays the cruising range, average

fuel consumption and the amount of

time elapsed since the engine was

started.

The image is an example only, and may vary slightly from actual conditions.

Using the side display

109

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Operation of

each component

3-1. Key information

Keys....................................................110

3-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

Side doors........................................115

Back door........................................122

Smart access system with

push-button start...................... 132

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats...................................... 140

Rear seats........................................142

Driving position memory...........151

Head restraints ............................ 155

3-4. Adjusting the steering

wheel and mirrors

Steering wheel.............................158

Inside rear view mirror .............160

Outside rear view mirrors........162

3-5. Opening, closing the

windows and moon roof

Power windows ........................... 165

Moon roof......................................168

110

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system

with push-button start (→P. 132)

• Operating the wireless remote con-

trol function

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Card key (electronic key)

Operating the smart access system with

push-button start (→P. 132)

Locks the doors (→P. 115)

Unlocks the doors (→P. 115)

Opens the windows and moon roof*

(→P. 115)

Opens/closes the power back door

(→P. 122)

Sounds the alarm (→P. 111)

*: This setting must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

The keys

Wireless remote control

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

111

3-1. Key information

Operation of each component

To take out the mechanical key, push

the release button and take the key out.

The mechanical key can only be

inserted in one direction, as the key only

has grooves on one side. If the key can-

not be inserted in a lock cylinder, turn it

over and re-attempt to insert it.

After using the mechanical key, store it

in the electronic key. Carry the mechan-

ical key together with the electronic key.

If the electronic key battery is depleted

or the entry function does not operate

properly, you will need the mechanical

key. (→P. 546)

■Panic mode

■Card key

●The mechanical key that is stored inside the card key should be used only in an emer-

gency, such as when the key does not operate properly.

●If it is difficult to take out the mechanical key, push down the lock release button using a

pen tip etc. If it is difficult to pull it out, use a coin etc.

Using the mechanical key

When is pressed for longer than about

one second, an alarm will sound intermittently

and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any per-

son from trying to break into or damage your

vehicle.

To stop the alarm, press any button on the elec-

tronic key.

●To store the mechanical key in the card key,

insert it inside while pressing the lock release

button.

112

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-1. Key information

●The card key is not waterproof.

■When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (→P. 421)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the elec-

tronic key only.

■If you lose your mechanical keys

New genuine mechanical keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using another

mechanical key and the key number stamped on your key number plate. Keep the plate

in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.

■When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any but-

tons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying an electronic

key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally.

Pressing a button may cause the electronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere

with the operation of the aircraft.

■Electronic key battery depletion

●The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The card key battery life is about a year and a

half.)

●If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the engine stops.

●As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted

even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the elec-

tronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 503)

• The smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does

not operate.

• The detection area becomes smaller.

• The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

●To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the

following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

•Table lamps

• Induction cookers

●If the battery cover is not installed and the bat-

tery falls out or if the battery was removed

because the key got wet, reinstall the battery

with the positive terminal facing the Lexus

emblem.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

113

3-1. Key information

Operation of each component

■Replacing the key battery

→P. 503

■Confirmation of the registered key number

The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Lexus

dealer.

NOTICE

■To prevent key damage

●Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them.

●Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for long periods of time.

●Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc.

●Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys close to

such materials.

●Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the electronic key.

●Do not disassemble the keys.

●Do not place the keys near objects that produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio

systems and induction cookers.

●Do not place the keys near medical electrical equipment such as low-frequency ther-

apy equipment or microwave therapy equipment, and do not receive medical atten-

tion with the keys on your person.

114

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-1. Key information

NOTICE

■Handling the card keys

●Do not apply excess force when inserting the mechanical key to the card key.

Doing so may damage the card key.

●If the battery or card key terminals get wet, the battery may corrode and the card key

may stop working.

If the key is dropped into water, or if drinking water etc. is spilled on the key, immedi-

ately remove the battery cover and wipe the battery and terminals.

(To remove the battery cover, lightly grasp it and pull.) If the battery is corroded, have

your Lexus dealer replace the battery.

●Do not crush the battery cover or use a screwdriver to remove the battery cover.

Forcibly removing the battery cover may bend or damage the key.

●If the battery cover is frequently removed, the cover may become loose.

●When installing the battery, make sure to check the direction of the battery.

Installing the battery in the wrong direction may cause the battery to deplete rapidly.

●The surface of the card key may be damaged, or its coating may peel off in the follow-

ing situations:

• The card key is carried together with hard objects, such as coins or keys.

• The card key is scraped with a sharp object, such as a tip of mechanical pencil.

• The surface of the card key is wiped with thinners or benzene.

■Carrying the electronic key on your person

Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appliances that are

turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the

electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

■In case of a smart access system with push-button start malfunction or other key-

related problems

Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle, including the

card key, to your Lexus dealer.

■When an electronic key is lost

If the electronic key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit

your Lexus dealer immediately with all remaining electronic keys and the card key that

were provided with your vehicle.

115

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

Side doors

◆Smart access system with push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Grip the driver’s door handle to

unlock the door. Grip the passen-

ger’s door handle to unlock all the

doors.*

Make sure to touch the sensor on the

back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the doors are locked.

*: The door unlock settings can be

changed. (→P. 120)

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the upper part or lower part of

the handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

◆Wireless remote control

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Unlocks all the doors

Pressing the button unlocks the

driver’s door. Pressing the button

again unlocks the other doors.

Press and hold to open the windows

and moon roof.*

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless

remote control or door lock switch.

Locking and unlocking the doors from the outside

116

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■Operation signals

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have

been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the windows and moon roof

are operating.

■Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the

security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

■When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor on the upper part of the door han-

dle

■Door lock buzzer

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds

continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

■Setting the alarm

Locking the doors will set the alarm system. (→P. 77)

■If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control does

not operate properly

●Use the mechanical key to lock and unlock the doors. (→P. 546)

●Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted. (→P. 503)

If the door will not lock even when the topside

sensor area is touched, try touching both the

topside and underside sensor areas at the same

time.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

117

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

◆Door lock switches

Locks all the doors

Unlocks all the doors

◆Inside lock buttons

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by

pulling the inside handles even if the

lock buttons are in the lock position.

The other doors can be unlocked by

pulling the inside handles.

Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside

118

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door.

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected cor-

rectly and the door may be locked.

The door cannot be opened from inside

the vehicle when the lock is set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent chil-

dren from opening the rear doors. Push

down on each rear door switch to lock

both rear doors.

Locking the driver’s door from the outside without a key

Rear door child-protector lock

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

119

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

The following functions can be set or canceled:

For instructions on customizing, refer to P. 580.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

Function Operation

Shift position linked door lock-

ing function Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all the doors.

Shift position linked door

unlocking function Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all the doors.

Speed linked door locking

function All the doors are locked when the vehicle speed is

approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

Driver’s door linked door

unlocking function

All the doors are unlocked when the driver’s door is

opened within 45 seconds after turning the engine

switch off.

120

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■Changing the door unlock function setting

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks using the wireless remote con-

trol.

Turn the engine switch off.

When the indicator light on the key surface is not on, press and hold for

approximately 5 seconds while pressing and holding .

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (When

changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at least 5 seconds, and

repeat step .)

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the wireless

remote control and open and close a door once after the settings have been changed. (If

a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked

again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In a case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (→P. 77)

Multi-information

display Unlocking function Beep

Holding the driver’s door handle

unlocks only the driver’s door. Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Pings once

Holding a passenger’s door han-

dle unlocks all the doors.

Holding a door handle unlocks

all the doors. Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

121

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

■Impact detection door lock release system

In the event that the vehicle is subject to a strong impact, all the doors are unlocked.

Depending on the force of the impact or the type of accident, however, the system may

not operate.

■Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (→P. 546)

■Conditions affecting the operation of the smart access system with push-button start

or wireless remote control

→P. 134

■Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

WARNING

■To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant being thrown out of the

vehicle, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Ensure that all doors are properly closed and locked.

●Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even if the

inside lock buttons are in locked position.

●Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear seats.

122

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Back door

◆Smart access system with push-button start

Carry the electronic key to enable this function.

Locks all the doors

Check that the door is securely

locked.

Unlocks all the doors

The doors cannot be unlocked for 3

seconds after the doors are locked.

◆Wireless remote control

→P. 115

◆Door lock switches

→P. 117

Press and hold the switch.

The power back door can be operated

even when the back door is locked.*

*: This setting can be customized so

that the power back door can be

operated only when the back door is

unlocked. (→P. 580)

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following proce-

dures.

Locking and unlocking the back door

Opening/closing the back door with the wireless remote control

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

123

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

Press and hold the power back door

switch to open/close the back door.

Pressing the switch again while the

power back door is operating will cause

the operation to reverse.

Open the upper back door

When the power back door is

unlocked: Press the back door

opener switch.

When the power back door is

locked: While carrying an elec-

tronic key, press and hold the back

door opener switch.

The upper back door will automatically* open.

*: Using the customization function, the upper back door can be set to not automatically

open, even when the back door opener switch is pressed. (→P. 580)

When the automatic open function is disabled, the upper back door can be opened

by lifting it up with the back door opener switch pressed and held.

Open the lower back door

Pull the handle.

The lower back door will open.

Opening/closing the back door from the inside

Opening the back door from the outside

124

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Pressing the switch closes the upper

back door automatically. (A buzzer

sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the upper

back door is closing opens it again.

Turn the main switch off to disable the

power back door system.

Off

The back door cannot be operated even

with the wireless remote control or

power back door switch.

Orange mark on the switch should be

visible when the switch is on.

●Make sure that the lower back door

is closed before closing the upper

back door.

●Lower the back door using the back

door handle, and make sure to push

the back door down from the out-

side to close it.

Power back door switch

Canceling the power back door system

When closing the back door

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

125

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

The rear step bumper is for rear end

protection and easier step-up loading.

■Power back door operating conditions

When the engine switch is off or in accessory mode, the power back door can be

opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all of the following con-

ditions are met.

●The lower back door is closed (only when closing)*1

When the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the power back door can be

opened and closed if the power back door main switch is on and all of the following con-

ditions are met.*2

●The lower back door is closed (only when closing)*1

●The vehicle speed is below 1 mph (3 km/h) and the shift lever is in P

*1: If the lower back door is opened while the upper back door is in a closing operation,

it automatically opens again.

*2: The back door cannot be operated using the wireless remote control.

■If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be operated from the inside.

Rear step bumper

Remove the cover on the back door trim.

Use a cloth to prevent scratches.

Push the lever for the back door motor,

open the back door.

126

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■Jam protection function

If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the back door will

automatically operate in the opposite direction.

■When re-connecting the battery

To enable the power back door to operate properly, perform the following:

●Unlock the back door using the door lock switch

●Close the back door manually

■Back door closer

In the event that the upper and lower back doors are left slightly open, the back door

closer will automatically close them to the fully closed position.

■Fall-down protection function

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive force to it will

stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door from rapidly falling down.

■Back door reserve lock function

This function is a function which reserves locking of all doors, beforehand, when the back

door is open. When the following procedure is performed, all the doors except the back

door are locked and then back door will also be locked at the same time it is closed.

Close all doors, except the back door.

Perform any of the following during the automatic closing operation of the back door.

• Press the lock button on the wireless remote control. (→P. 110)

• Touch the lock sensor on the side door handle with carrying the electronic key on

your person. (→P. 115)

Also, if the back door does not fully close due to the operation of the jam protection

function, etc., while the back door is automatically closing after a reserve lock opera-

tion is performed, the reserve lock function is canceled and all the doors will unlock.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

127

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

WARNING

■While driving

●Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or luggage may

be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.

In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a serious health

hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

●Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If the back

door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, causing an accident.

●Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden braking,

sudden swerving or a collision, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

■When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

●Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could have heat

exhaustion or other injuries.

●Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the child’s hands,

head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

128

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING

■Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death or serious

injury.

●Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door before opening it.

Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut again after it is opened.

●When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure the sur-

rounding area is safe.

●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

●Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it may move

abruptly in strong wind.

●Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do not hang on

the back door damper stay.

Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to break, caus-

ing an accident.

●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it may sud-

denly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be

caught and injured. When installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genu-

ine Lexus part is recommended.

●The back door may suddenly shut if it is not

opened fully. It is more difficult to open or

close the back door on an incline than on a

level surface, so beware of the back door

unexpectedly opening or closing by itself.

Make sure that the back door is fully open and

secure before using the luggage compart-

ment.

●When closing the back door, take extra care

to prevent your fingers etc. from being

caught. Also pay attention to your personal

belongings such as bags and ties.

●When closing the back door, make sure to

press it lightly on its outer surface. If the back

door handle is used to fully close the back

door, it may result in hands or arms being

caught.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

129

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

WARNING

■Back door closer

●Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the power back

door system is canceled.

●In the event that the upper or lower back door

is left slightly open, the back door closer will

automatically close it to the fully closed posi-

tion. It takes several seconds before the back

door closer begins to operate. Be careful not

to catch fingers or anything else in the back

door, as this may cause bone fractures or

other serious injuries.

130

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

WARNING

■Power back door

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obstacles or any-

thing that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

●If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the back

door is about to open or close.

●If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the back door is

operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped. The back door then has

to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may

open or close unexpectedly.

●When the back door opener switch is pressed a second time during an automatic

open operation that was performed by pressing the back door opener switch, the

operation stops and the back door has to be operated manually. At this time, take

extra care, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

●If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a buzzer may sound

and the back door may stop opening or closing. The back door then has to be operated

manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

●On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure the back

door is fully open and secure.

●In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality and auto-

matic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has to be operated man-

ually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

• When the back door contacts an obstacle

• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode or the engine is started during automatic operation

●If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the power back door

may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the back door may suddenly shut again

after being opened, causing someone’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When

installing an accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Lexus part is recommended.

■Jam protection function

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the

back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

●The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the object that

is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

131

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

NOTICE

■Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting in malfunc-

tion.

■To prevent back door closer malfunction

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is operating.

■To prevent damage to the power back door

●Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that would prevent

movement of the back door. Operating the power back door when excessive load is

present on the back door may cause a malfunction.

●Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door is operat-

ing.

●Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges of the

power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is disconnected, the

power back door will not operate in automatic operation.

■When operating the back door reserve lock function

Make sure to carry the electronic key on your person.

If the electronic key is returned inside the vehicle during the closing operation, it may

be locked even if the electronic key is inside the vehicle depending on the location of

electronic key.

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that all the doors are closed and locked.

●Do not attach any foreign objects, such as

stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives to the

damper stay rod.

●Do not touch the damper stay rod with gloves

or other fabric items.

●Do not attach any accessories other than

genuine Lexus parts to the back door.

●Do not place your hand on the damper stay or

apply lateral forces to it.

Damper stay

132

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart access system with push-button start

●Locks and unlocks the side doors (→P. 115)

●Locks and unlocks the back door (→P. 122)

●Starts the engine (→P. 205)

■Antenna location

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic

key on your person, for example in your pocket. The driver should always

carry the electronic key.

Antennas outside the cabin

Antennas inside the cabin

Antenna outside the luggage compartment

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

133

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

■Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When starting the engine or changing engine switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

■Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the

multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and accidents resulting

from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning mes-

sage on the multi-information display.

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only

alarms are sounded.

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the elec-

tronic key is within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of

either of the outside front door handle.

(Only the doors detecting the key can be

operated.)

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm

sounds once for 5

seconds

An attempt was made to lock the

vehicle while a door is open Close all of the doors and

lock the doors again

Interior alarm pings

continuously

The engine switch was turned to

ACCESSORY mode while the

driver’s door was open (or the

driver’s door was opened while

the engine switch was in ACCES-

SORY mode)

Turn the engine switch off

and close the driver’s door

The engine switch was turned off

while the driver’s door was open Close the driver’s door

134

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

■Battery-saving function

The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the electronic key bat-

tery and the battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long

time.

●In the following situations, the smart access system with push-button start may take

some time to unlock the doors.

• The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of the outside

of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer.

• The smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 5 days or lon-

ger.

●If the smart access system with push-button start has not been used for 14 days or lon-

ger, the doors cannot be unlocked at any doors except the driver’s door. In this case,

take hold of the driver’s door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechan-

ical key, to unlock the doors.

■Electronic Key Battery-Saving Function

When battery-saving mode is set, battery depletion is minimized by stopping the elec-

tronic key from receiving radio waves.

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following

situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be

affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start, wireless remote

control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly.

(Ways of coping: →P. 546)

●When the electronic key battery is depleted

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or

other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic

objects

• Portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless communication

device

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

Press twice while pressing and holding

. Confirm that the electronic key indica-

tor flashes 4 times.

While the battery-saving mode is set, the smart

access system with push-button start cannot be

used. To cancel the function, press any of the

electronic key buttons.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

135

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

●When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio

waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)

• Digital audio players

• Portable game systems

●If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear win-

dow

●When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

■Note for the entry function

●Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection areas), the system

may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle, near the

ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover (if equipped) or floor,

or in the door pockets or glove box when the engine is started or engine switch

modes are changed.

●Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets

when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be

detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the doors will become lockable from the

outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

●As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or

unlocked by anyone. However, only the doors detecting the electronic key can be used

to unlock the vehicle.

●Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine

if the electronic key is near the window.

●The doors may unlock or lock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle,

such as in the rain or in a car wash, when the electronic key is within the effective range.

(The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors

are not opened and closed.)

●Touching the door lock or unlock sensor while wearing gloves may prevent lock or

unlock operation.

●If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near

the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry func-

tion. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

●When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition signals will be

shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recognition signals will be given.

●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,

the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, follow the following correction

procedures to wash the vehicle.

• Place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle. (Take

care to ensure that the key is not stolen.)

• Set electronic key to battery-saving mode to disable the smart access system with

push-button start. (→P. 134)

136

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car

wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will

sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

●The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc.

Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again, or use the lock sensor on the

lower part of the door handle.

●If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to

unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped or back door unlock switch is

pressed.

●A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from

being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check

that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

■When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

●To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the

vehicle.

●The smart access system with push-button start can be deactivated in advance.

(→P. 580)

■To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the elec-

tronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the

vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not

be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off

accidentally, or the door lock prevention function may not operate.)

■If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly

●Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (→P. 546)

●Starting the engine: →P. 547

■Customization

Settings (e. g. smart access system with push-button start) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

■If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized

setting

●Locking and unlocking the doors:

Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (→P. 115, 546)

●Starting the engine and changing engine switch modes: →P. 547

●Stopping the engine: →P. 206

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

137

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

■Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico

138

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

For vehicles sold in Canada

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

139

3-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Operation of each component

WARNING

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

●People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should keep away from the

smart access system antennas. (→P. 132)

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry

function can be disabled. Ask your Lexus dealer for details, such as the frequency of

radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if

you should disable the entry function.

●Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers,

cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibril-

lators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its opera-

tion under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical

devices.

Ask your Lexus dealer for details on disabling the entry function.

140

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Front seats

Seat position adjustment switch

Seatback angle adjustment switch

Seat cushion (front) angle adjustment switch

Vertical height adjustment switch

Lumber support adjustment switch

Seat cushion length adjustment switch (driver’s side only)

When the occupant’s lower back

presses against the seatback during a

rear-end collision, the head restraint

moves slightly forward and upward to

help reduce the risk of whiplash on the

seat occupant.

Adjustment procedure

Active head restraints

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

141

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

■Power easy access system

The driver’s seat and steering wheel move in accordance with engine switch mode and

the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 151)

■Active head restraints

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to move. Pushing

up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head restraint inner structure. These

do not indicate problems.

WARNING

■When adjusting the seat position

●Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not

injured by the moving seat.

●Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

■Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat

more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces

directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk

of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and

cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Inner

structure

During rear-end collision

142

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Rear seats

Second seats

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Seat position adjustment switch

Third seats (if equipped)

Seatback angle adjustment lever

Adjustment procedure

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

143

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

For easy access to the third seat (if equipped), perform in “Tumbling the sec-

ond seats” (→P. 144).

■Before tumbling the second seats

Stow the seat belt buckles and

lower the head restraints to the

lowest position.

Pass the outer seat belts through

the seat belt hangers and secure

the seat belt plates.

This prevents the shoulder belt from

being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

Vehicles with rear seat entertain-

ment system: Install the display

cover for the rear seat entertain-

ment system.

Pass the cover belt under the dis-

play and slide the cover up.

Slide the cover down from the top

of the display to cover it.

Tumbling the second seats and third seat entry

144

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■Tumbling the second seats

Fold down the seatback while

pulling the seatback angle adjust-

ment lever, and swing the whole

seat up and forward.

Hook the holding strap to the

assist grip and secure the seat by

pulling its free end.

When returning the second seat to

its original position, stow the holding

strap.

Remove the seat hook covers

from the back of the seat cushion,

and install them on the seat

hooks.

When returning the second seat to

its original position, remove the seat

hook covers from the floor and install

them in the back of the seat cushion.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

145

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

■Before folding the third seats

Stow the seat belts buckles.

Stow the center head restraint in the seatback. (→P. 157)

Pass the outer seat belts through

the seat belt hangers and secure

the seat belt plates.

This prevents the shoulder belt from

being damaged.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

Stow the center seat belt tabs in the cover set in the roof. (→P. 32)

■Folding down the third seatback

For right side

For left side

Folding the third seats (if equipped)

146

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

The seat will automatically fold when

the switch is pressed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

147

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

■Folding up the third seats

Perform following steps in “Before folding the third seats”. (→P. 145)

If the switch is pressed and held,

the seat will automatically fold

and lift sideward. (The buzzer

sounds twice when the seat is

about to lift.)

If the switch is released while the seat

is lifting sideward, operation will stop

and a buzzer will sound continuously.

Before operating, make sure that the

handle on the rear of the seatback is

secure.

Remove the seat hook covers

from the underside of the seat

cushion, and install them on the

seat hooks.

■Returning the third seats

Remove the seat hook covers

from the floor and install them

into the underside of the seat

cushion.

148

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

If the switch is held down the seat

will automatically return to the

folding position. (Buzzer sounds

twice)

If the switch is released while return-

ing to the folding position, operation

will stop and a buzzer will sound con-

tinuously.

Pull the handle and raise the seat-

backs.

Fix the handle securely in its original

position after use.

Raise the head restraints.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

149

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

■Alarms and indicators (vehicles with third seat)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only

alarms are sound.

*: A warning will be shown on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster.

Indicator light and buzzer Situation Correction procedure

Buzzer sounds for 10 sec-

onds Indicator light on*

Shift lever is not in the P

position with the engine

switch in IGNITION ON

mode.

Stop the switch operation

during the automatic third

seat is in motion.

Move the shift lever in the

P position with the engine

switch in IGNITION ON

mode.

Return the third seat from a

halfway position to tum-

bling position or the origi-

nal position with the third

seat return switch or third

seat tumbling switch.

Indicator light flashes*The seat movement is

stopped in a half way when

the back door is opened.

Buzzer sounds for 10 sec-

onds Indicator light

flashes*

Automatic tumbling or

return operation is

stopped because of a sys-

tem problem.

Have the system checked

by your Lexus dealer.

The seat is not moved to

the table mode from the

original position after 10

seconds the tumbling

switch is pressed.

Check something is

caught between the seat

cushion and seatback. If

nothing is caught, have the

system checked by your

Lexus dealer.

Buzzer sounds for 10 sec-

onds Indicator light blinks

slowly*

Automatic closing opera-

tion is stopped because of

a system problem.

Have the system checked

by your Lexus dealer.

Indicator light flashes

Any of the tumbling or

return switch is pushed

when shift lever is not in the

P position with the engine

switch in IGNITION ON

mode. Move the shift lever in the

P position with the engine

switch in IGNITION ON

mode.

Indicator light flashes 3

times

Table mode switch is

pushed when shift lever is

not in the P position with

the engine switch in IGNI-

TION ON mode.

150

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

WARNING

■Seat adjustment

To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not recline the seat

more than necessary.

If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces

directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk

of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpectedly move and

cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

■When the seatback is folded

●Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback while driving.

●Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get burned when

they become hot.

■When returning the seatbacks to their original position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious

injury.

●Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

●Make sure the seats are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt

from operating properly.

●Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.

●Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

■Avoiding damage to seat components

Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker.

NOTICE

■Before tumbling, folding up the seats

The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.

■After returning the third seat (if equipped)

Make sure that the handle on the rear of the seatback has been secured.

151

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

Driving position memory

The seat and steering wheel are automatically adjusted to allow the driver to

enter and exit the vehicle easily.

When all of the following have been

performed, the driver’s seat and steer-

ing wheel are automatically adjusted to

a position that allows driver to enter

and exit the vehicle easily.

• The shift lever has been shifted to P.

• The engine switch has been turned

off.

• The driver’s seat belt has been unfas-

tened.

When any of the following has been performed, the driver’s seat and steering

wheel automatically return to their original positions.

• The engine switch has been turned to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION

ON mode.

• The driver’s seat belt has been fastened.

■Operation of the power easy access system

When exiting the vehicle, the power easy access system may not operate if the seat is

already close to the rearmost position, etc.

■Customization

The seat movement amount settings of the power easy access system can be custom-

ized. (Customizable features: →P. 580)

This feature automatically adjusts the driver’s seats, steering wheel and out-

side rear view mirrors to make entering and exiting the vehicle easier or to

suit your preferences.

Power easy access system

152

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat, steering wheel,

outside rear view mirrors and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]) can be

entered into the computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is

also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are

unlocked.

Three different driving positions can be recorded into memory.

■Recording procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, outside rear view mirrors and HUD

(head-up display) (if equipped) to the desired positions.

While pressing the “SET” button,

or within 3 seconds after the

“SET” button is pressed, press

button “1”, “2” or “3” until the

buzzer sounds.

If the selected button has already

been preset, the previously recorded

position will be overwritten.

■Recall procedure

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Press one of the buttons for the

driving position you want to recall

until the buzzer sounds.

Driving position memory

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

153

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

■To stop the position recall operation part-way through

Perform any of the following:

●Press the “SET” button.

●Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.

●Operate any of the seat adjustment switches (only cancels seat position recall).

●Operate the tilt and telescopic steering control switch (only cancels steering wheel

position recall).

■Operating the driving position memory after turning the engine switch off

Recorded seat positions can be activated up to 180 seconds after the driver’s door is

opened and another 60 seconds after it is closed again.

■If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is erased when

the battery is disconnected.

Each electronic key can be registered to recall your preferred driving position.

■Registering procedure

Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing the

following:

Carry only the key you want to register, and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be recorded

properly.

Check that the shift lever is in P.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Recall the driving position that you want to record.

While pressing the recalled but-

ton, press and hold the door lock

switch (either lock or unlock) until

the buzzer sounds.

If the button could not be registered,

the buzzer sounds continuously for

approximately 3 seconds.

Memory recall function (driver’s side only)

154

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

■Recall procedure

Make sure that the doors are locked before recalling the driving position.

Carry the electronic key that has been registered to the driving position,

and then unlock and open the driver’s door using the smart access system

with push-button start or wireless remote control.

The driving position will move to the recorded position (not including the steering

wheel and HUD [head-up display] [if equipped]). However, the seat will move to a

position slightly behind the recorded position in order to make entering the vehicle

easier.

If the driving position is in a position that has already been recorded, the seat and

outside rear view mirrors will not move.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or IGNITION ON mode,

or fasten a seat belt.

The seat, steering wheel and HUD (head-up display) (if equipped) will move to the

recorded position.

■Cancelation procedure

Carry only the key you want to cancel and then close the driver’s door.

If 2 or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be canceled

properly.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

While pressing the “SET” button, press and hold the door lock switch

(either lock or unlock) until the buzzer sounds twice.

If the button could not be canceled, the buzzer sounds continuously for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

■Recalling the driving position using the memory recall function

●Different driving positions can be registered for each electronic key. Therefore, the

driving position that is recalled may be different depending on the key being carried.

●If a door other than the driver’s door is unlocked with the smart access system with

push-button start, the driving position cannot be recalled. In this case, press the driving

position button which has been set.

■Customization

The unlock door settings of the memory recall function can be customized.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

WARNING

■Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment so that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or

squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

155

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

Head restraints

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while

pushing the lock release button.

Angle adjustment (if equipped)

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while

pushing the lock release button.

Head restraints are provided for all seats.

Front seats

Lock release button

Second seats

Lock release button

156

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-3. Adjusting the seats

To fold the head restraints, pull the head

restraint angle lever

■Adjusting the height of the head restraints

■Removing the head restraints

Front seats

While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head restraint.

Second seats

Third outboard seats (if equipped)

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted

so that the center of the head restraint is closest

to the top of your ears.

Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot. The

slot is located on the right side of the right

head restraint anchor.

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock

release button.

Lock release button

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

157

3-3. Adjusting the seats

Operation of each component

Third center seat (if equipped)

Third outboard seats (if equipped)

The head restraint cannot be removed.

■Installing the head restraints (except for the third outboard seats)

Align the head restraint with the installation holes.

Push down the head restraint to the lock position.

Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

■When not using the third center seat head restraint (if equipped)

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock

release button.

Open the zipper on the back of the third seat

and stow the head restraint inside.

WARNING

■Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may

result in death or serious injury.

●Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

●Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

●After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure they are

locked in position.

●Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Lock

release

button

158 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Steering wheel

Operating the switch moves the steer-

ing wheel in the following directions:

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

To sound the horn, press on or close to

the mark.

Adjustment procedure

Horn

159

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■The steering wheel can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode*.

*: If the driver’s seat belt is fastened, the steering wheel can be adjusted regardless of

engine switch mode.

■Automatic adjustment of the steering position

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the

driving position memory system. (→P. 151)

■Power easy access system

The steering wheel and driver’s seat move in accordance with engine switch mode and

the driver’s seat belt condition. (→P. 151)

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an accident, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

160 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Inside rear view mirror

The height of the rear view mirror can be adjusted to suit your driving posture.

Adjust the height of the rear view mir-

ror by moving it up and down.

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the

reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare func-

tion mode

ON/OFF

When the automatic anti-glare function

is in ON mode, the indicator illuminates.

The function will set to ON mode each

time the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the function to

OFF mode. (The indicator also turns

off.)

■To prevent sensor error

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirma-

tion of the rear view.

Adjusting the height of rear view mirror

Anti-glare function

Indicator

To ensure that the sensors operate properly, do

not touch or cover them.

161

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

162 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Outside rear view mirrors

To select a mirror to adjust, press the

switch.

Left

Right

Pressing the same switch again will

put the switch in neutral.

To adjust the mirror, press the switch.

Right

Down

Left

■Using the switch

Press the switch to fold the mirrors.

Press it again to extend them to the

original position.

Adjustment procedure

Automatically folding and extending the mirrors

163

3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

Operation of each component

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Setting automatic mode

Automatic mode allows the folding or extending of the mirrors to be linked to

locking/unlocking of the doors.

Press the “AUTO” switch to set auto-

matic mode.

The indicator will come on.

Pressing the switch once more will

return to manual mode.

When either “L” or “R” of the mirror select switch is selected, the outside rear

view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in

order to give a better view of the ground.

To disable this function, select neither “L” nor “R”.

■Adjusting the mirror angle when the vehicle is reversing

With the shift lever in R, adjust the mirror angle at a desired position. The

adjusted angle will be memorized and the mirror will automatically tilt to the

memorized angle whenever the shift lever is shifted to R from next time.

The memorized downward tilt position of the mirror is linked to the normal position

(angle adjusted with the shift lever in other than R). Therefore, if the normal posi-

tion is changed after adjustment, the tilt position will also change.

When the normal position is changed, readjust the angle in reversing.

■Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■When the mirrors are fogged up

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the

rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (→P. 405)

■Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automatically by the

driving position memory. (→P. 151)

■Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to automatic mode, the outside rear

view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to

reduce reflected light. (→P. 160)

Indicator

Linked mirror function when reversing

164 3-4. Adjusting the steering wheel and mirrors

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Using automatic mode in cold weather

When automatic mode is used in cold weather, the door mirror could freeze up and

automatic stowing and return may not be possible. In this event, remove any ice and snow

from the door mirror, then either operate the mirror using manual mode or move the mir-

ror by hand.

WARNING

■Important points while driving

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, result-

ing in death or serious injury.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

●Do not drive with the mirrors folded.

●Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

■When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught

by the moving mirror.

■When the mirror defoggers are operating

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

■If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the

mirror.

165

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Operation of each component

Power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing

One-touch closing*

Opening

One-touch opening*

*: To stop the window partway, operate the

switch in the opposite direction.

Press the switch to lock the passenger

window switches.

The indicator will come on.

Use this switch to prevent children from

accidentally opening or closing a pas-

senger window.

■The power windows can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Operating the power windows after turning the engine off

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the

engine switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be

operated once either front door is opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object becomes jammed between the window and the window frame while the win-

dow is closing, window movement is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

■Catch protection function

If an object becomes caught between the door and window while the window is opening,

window movement is stopped.

Opening and closing procedures

Window lock switch

Indicator

166

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

■When the window cannot be opened or closed

When the jam protection function or catch protection function operates unusually and

the door window cannot be opened or closed, perform the following operations with the

power window switch of that door.

●Stop the vehicle. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, within 4 seconds of

the jam protection function or catch protection function activating, continuously oper-

ate the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction or one-touch opening

direction so that the door window can be opened and closed.

●If the door window cannot be opened and closed even when performing the above

operations, perform the following procedure for function initialization.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction and com-

pletely close the door window.

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pulling the switch in the

one-touch closing direction, and hold it there for approximately 6 seconds or more.

Press and hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening direction. After

the door window is completely opened, continue holding the switch for an additional

1 second or more.

Release the power window switch for a moment, resume pushing the switch in the

one-touch opening direction, and hold it there for approximately 4 seconds or

more.

Pull and hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing direction again.

After the door window is completely closed, continue holding the switch for a fur-

ther 1 second or more.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the beginning.

If the window reverses and cannot be fully closed or opened, have the vehicle inspected

by your Lexus dealer.

■When the battery is disconnected

The window lock switch is disabled. If necessary, press the window lock switch after

reconnecting the battery.

■Door lock linked window operation

●The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.* (→P. 546)

●The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control.* (→P. 115)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

■Power windows open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and a message is shown on the multi-information display in the instru-

ment cluster when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the

power windows open.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

167

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Operation of each component

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■Closing the windows

●The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the operation

for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do

not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passen-

gers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it

is recommended to use the window lock switch. (→P. 165)

●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a posi-

tion where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

●When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the power

windows, operate the power window after checking to make sure that there is no pos-

sibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window. Also, do

not let a child operate window by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is

possible for children and other passengers to get caught in the power window.

●When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle

along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that

may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets jammed just before the

window is fully closed. Be careful not to get any part of your body jammed in the win-

dow.

■Catch protection function

●Never use any part of your body or clothing to intentionally activate the catch protec-

tion function.

●The catch protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the

window is fully opened. Be careful not to get any part of your body or clothing caught

in the window.

168

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof

Opens the moon roof*

The moon roof stops slightly before the

fully open position to reduce wind noise.

Press the switch again to fully open the

moon roof.

Closes the moon roof*

*: Lightly press either way of the moon

roof switch to stop the moon roof part-

way.

Tilts the moon roof up*

Tilts the moon roof down*

*: Lightly press either way of the moon

roof switch to stop the moon roof part-

way.

Use the overhead switches to open and close the moon roof and tilt it up and

down.

Opening and closing

Tilting up and down

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

169

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Operation of each component

■The moon roof can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Operating the moon roof after turning the engine off

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the engine switch is

turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. It cannot, however, be operated once either

front door is opened.

■Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while the moon roof is clos-

ing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

■Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open

automatically when the moon roof is opened.

■Door lock linked moon roof operation

●The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key*. (→P. 546)

●The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control*. (→P. 115)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

■If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.

■When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

●If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*1

The moon roof will close, re-open and pause for approximately 10 seconds.*2 Then

it will close again, tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down,

open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the

switch.

170

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

●If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “UP” switch*1 until the moon roof moves into the tilt up position

and stops.

Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP” switch again.*1

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up position.*2

Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1 second.

Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and then release the

switch.

*1: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to be per-

formed again from the beginning.

*2: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause, automatic

operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch,

and the moon roof will tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt

down, open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed

and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above procedure cor-

rectly, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display in the instru-

ment panel when the engine switch is turned off and the driver’s door is opened with the

moon roof open.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

171

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

Operation of each component

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

■Opening the moon roof

●Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is

moving.

●Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

■Closing the moon roof

●The driver is responsible for moon roof opening and closing operations.

In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child oper-

ate the moon roof. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts

caught in the moon roof.

●Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a posi-

tion where it could be caught when the moon roof is being operated.

●When using the wireless remote control or mechanical key and operating the moon

roof, operate the moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no possibility of

any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the moon roof. Also, do not let

a child operate moon roof by the wireless remote control or mechanical key. It is pos-

sible for children and other passengers to get caught in the moon roof.

●When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch off, carry the key and exit the vehicle

along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that

may possibly lead to an accident.

■Jam protection function

●Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection function.

●The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the

moon roof fully closes.

172

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

3-5. Opening, closing the windows and moon roof

173

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Driving

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle...................... 174

Cargo and luggage....................182

Vehicle load limits.......................186

Trailer towing................................187

Dinghy towing .............................204

4-2. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch .......... 205

Automatic transmission............210

Turn signal lever........................... 217

Parking brake ...............................218

4-3. Operating the lights

and wipers

Headlight switch.......................... 221

Automatic High Beam.............224

Fog light switch ...........................229

Windshield wipers and

washer...........................................231

Rear window wiper and

washer..........................................235

Headlight cleaner switch....... 238

4-4. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap......239

4-5. Using the driving support

systems

Lexus Safety System+..............242

PCS (Pre-Collision

System)........................................249

LDA (Lane Departure

Alert)..............................................261

Dynamic radar cruise

control with full-speed

range............................................269

Cruise control..............................281

Driving mode select

switch...........................................284

Intuitive parking assist..............287

4-Wheel AHC (Active

Height Control

Suspension)...............................295

Four-wheel drive system ........303

Crawl Control (with Turn

Assist function).........................307

Multi-terrain Select.................... 312

Multi-terrain Monitor................ 316

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor).....363

• BSM function.........................367

• RCTA function........................371

Driving assist systems .............. 377

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips.....................382

Off-road precautions...............386

174

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Driving the vehicle

→P. 205

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 210)

Release the parking brake. (→P. 219)

If the parking brake is in automatic mode, the parking brake is released automatically

when shifting the shift lever to any position other than P. (→P. 218)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal

to accelerate the vehicle.

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or

N. (→P. 210)

With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake (→P. 219), and shift the shift lever to P (→P. 210).

Press the engine switch to stop the engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person.

If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving:

Starting the engine

Driving

Stopping

Parking the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

175

4-1. Before driving

Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (→P. 210)

Pull the parking brake switch and parking brake is set manually. (→P. 219)

Release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to acceler-

ate the vehicle.

Press the parking brake switch and parking brake is released manually.

(→P. 219)

■When starting off on a uphill

The hill-start assist control is available. (→P. 377)

■Driving in the rain

●Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the windows may

become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

●Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be especially slip-

pery.

●Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain, because there may

be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and

brakes from operating properly.

■Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due

to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving condi-

tions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

●The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

●When the accelerator pedal is released

●When the brake pedal is depressed

■Restraining engine output (Brake Override System)

●When the accelerator and brake pedals are depressed at the same time, the engine

output may be restrained.

●A warning message is displayed on the multi-information display while the system is

operating. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information display, read the

message and follow the instructions.

■Breaking in your new Lexus

To extend the life of the vehicle, observing the following precautions is recommended:

●For the first 200 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

●For the first 500 miles (800 km):

Do not tow a trailer.

●For the first 600 miles (1000 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

Starting off on a steep uphill

176

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

■Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.

This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced.

Have your Lexus dealer, perform the bedding-down operation.

■Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel. (→P. 560)

■When turning off the engine

Emission system operating sounds may continue for a short time after the engine is

turned off. This is not a malfunction, and helps to ensure optimal performance of the

emission system.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

177

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running. This

prevents the vehicle from creeping.

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator ped-

als to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will

result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a difficulty in oper-

ating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only

slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and accelerator pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using

your left foot may delay response in an emergency, resulting in an accident.

●Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may

cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

●During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving

will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems

will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over

and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way: →P. 511

●Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep

hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effective-

ness. (→P. 210)

●Do not adjust the positions of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear

view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their body are not

outside the vehicle.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit permits it, do not

drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-speed capability tires.

Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible

injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle

are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

●When crossing rivers, turn off height control after putting the vehicle height in high

mode, and drive at 18 mph (30 km/h) or less. Otherwise the vehicle height may

change due to the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident. (→P. 295)

178

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

●Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and reduce your

ability to control the vehicle.

●Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine speed

could cause the vehicle to skid.

●After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make sure that the

brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from func-

tioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly,

steering control may be affected.

■When shifting the shift lever

●Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll

forward while the shift lever is in R.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering perfor-

mance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

●Do not shift the shift lever to P while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

●Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from

the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

●Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the

shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of

the vehicle that may cause an accident.

■If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those

of the brake discs are exceeded.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

179

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When the vehicle is stopped

●Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly

and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

●In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing

the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as neces-

sary.

●If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the

vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely

apply the parking brake as needed.

●Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehi-

cle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if

combustible material is nearby.

■When the vehicle is parked

●Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle

when it is in the sun.

Doing so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic mate-

rial of glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of the

vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle’s electrical components.

●Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as

the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the

seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

●Do not attach adhesive discs to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers

such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Adhesive discs or con-

tainers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

●Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized

film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a

lens, causing a fire.

●Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P, stop the engine and lock the

vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

If the vehicle is parked with the shift lever in P but the parking brake is not set, the

vehicle may start to move, possibly leading to an accident.

180

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When the vehicle is parked

●If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,

the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both

the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move

regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer

sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P.

You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the

transfer mode. (→P. 303)

●Do not touch the exhaust pipes while the engine is running or immediately after turn-

ing the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

■When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, if you accidentally move the shift lever or

depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine over-

heating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases

may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

■When braking

●When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of

the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not

securely hold the vehicle.

●If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles

closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still

possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the

braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

●Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

●The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the systems fails,

the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more

firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

■If the vehicle becomes stuck

Do not spin the wheels excessively when any of the tires is up in the air, or the vehicle is

stuck in sand, mud, etc. This may damage the driveline components or propel the vehi-

cle forward or backward, causing an accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

181

4-1. Before driving

Driving

NOTICE

■When driving the vehicle

●Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during driving, as

this may restrain the engine output.

●Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the

same time to hold the vehicle on a hill.

■When parking the vehicle

Always set the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is

accidentally depressed.

■Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

●Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for an

extended period of time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

●When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging

the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

■If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel

firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

●It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

●The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations.

●The vehicle will lean abnormally.

Information on what to do in case of a flat tire. (→P. 532)

■When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the

following serious damage to the vehicle:

●Engine stalling

●Short in electrical components

●Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have

your Lexus dealer check the following:

●Brake function

●Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, transmission,

transfer, differentials, etc.

●Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints (where

possible), and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

182

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Cargo and luggage

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) − (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ⎯

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be rid-

ing in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150

lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load

capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 − 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (→P. 186)

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo

capacity and load:

Capacity and distribution

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

183

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity

weight) (→P. 558)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle,

which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) − A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A = Weight of people

*2: B = Total load capacity

*3: C = Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on,

the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) − D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D = Additional weight of people

*5: E = Available cargo and luggage load

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo

and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight

due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of

occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occu-

pants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on

your vehicle.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

184

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment:

●Receptacles containing gasoline

●Aerosol cans

■Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, may block the

driver’s vision, or may result in items hitting the driver or passengers, possibly causing

an accident.

●Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

●Do not stack cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment higher than the seat-

backs.

●Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations.

• At the feet of the driver

• On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• On the luggage cover (if equipped)

• On the instrument panel

•On the dashboard

• On the auxiliary box or tray that has no lid

●Secure all items in the occupant compartment.

●When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind

the front seats.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed for pas-

sengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Other-

wise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

■Capacity and distribution

●Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

●Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load is less than the total load

capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration

of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

185

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

■Roof luggage carrier precautions (if equipped)

To use the roof rails as a roof luggage carrier, you must fit the roof rails with two or more

genuine Lexus cross rails or their equivalent.

When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:

●Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed evenly between the front and rear

axles.

●If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the vehicle overall length or width.

(→P. 558)

●Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely fastened on the roof luggage carrier.

●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity

higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt

maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure

to operate this vehicle correctly and result in death or serious injury.

●If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at high speeds, stop the vehicle now

and then during the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.

●Do not exceed 154 lb. (70 kg) cargo weight on the roof luggage carrier.

■Cross rail adjustment (if equipped)

Make sure the cross rails are locked securely by pushing forward and rearward them.

Failure to do so may cause an accident or serious injury in the event of emergency

braking or a collision.

NOTICE

■Cross rail adjustment (if equipped)

Do not remove the cross rail stoppers, or the moon roof may be damage when it is

tilted.

■When loading the luggage

Be careful not to scratch the surface of the moon roof.

186

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Vehicle load limits

◆Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): →P. 558

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and lug-

gage.

◆Seating capacity:

Vehicles with third seats: 8 occupants (Front 2, Rear 6)

Vehicles without third seats: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated

average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

◆TWR (Trailer Weight Rating): →P. 191, 558

TWR means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo

weight) that your vehicle is able to tow.

◆Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the

number of occupants.

■Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 495)

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, TWR (Trailer

Weight Rating) and cargo capacity.

WARNING

■Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability,

resulting in an accident.

187

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying vehicle.

Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling, performance, brak-

ing, durability, and fuel consumption. For your safety and the safety of others,

you must not overload your vehicle or trailer. You must also ensure that you

are using appropriate towing equipment, that the towing equipment has been

installed correctly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driv-

ing habits.

Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by trailer sta-

bility, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the hitch and hitch sys-

tems (if equipped).

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance

with your trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions.

Lexus warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a

trailer for commercial purposes.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information about additional require-

ments such as towing kits, etc.

188

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

■GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross com-

bination weight. The gross combina-

tion weight is the sum of the total

vehicle weight (including the occu-

pants, cargo and any optional equip-

ment installed on the vehicle) and

the weight of the trailer being towed

(including the cargo in the trailer).

■GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross vehi-

cle weight. The gross vehicle weight

is the total weight of the vehicle.

When towing a trailer, it is the sum of

the vehicle weight (including the

occupants, cargo and any optional

equipment installed on the vehicle)

and the tongue weight.

Towing related terms

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

189

4-1. Before driving

Driving

■GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross axle

weight. The gross axle weight is the

load placed on each axle (front and

rear).

■TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)

The maximum allowable gross trailer

weight. The gross trailer weight is

the sum of the trailer weight and the

weight of the cargo in the trailer.

TWR is calculated assuming base

vehicle with one driver, one front

passenger, towing package (if avail-

able), hitch and hitch systems (if

required).

Additional optional equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle will reduce the

trailer weight rating so as not to exceed GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.

If the gross trailer weight exceeds 3000 lb. (1360 kg), it is recommended to use a

trailer with 2 or more axles.

Front GAWR

Rear GAWR

(With brakes)

190

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

■Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)

The trailer weight rating for towing a

trailer without a trailer service brake

system.

■Tongue Weight

The load placed on the trailer hitch

ball. (→P. 192)

(Without brakes)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

191

4-1. Before driving

Driving

●The gross trailer weight must never exceed 7000 lb. (3175 kg).

●The gross combination weight must never exceed 13400 lb. (6078 kg).

●The gross vehicle weight must never

exceed the GVWR indicated on the

Certification Label.

●The gross axle weight on each axle

must never exceed the GAWR indi-

cated on the Certification Label.

●If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service brakes are

required.

●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with

sufficient capacity is required.

●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing

hitch with sufficient capacity is required.

Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross vehicle

weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the limits.

■GCWR*

13400 lb. (6078 kg)

■TWR*

7000 lb. (3175 kg)

■Unbraked TWR*

1000 lb. (454 kg)

Weight limits

GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR

*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE International per SAE

J2807.

192

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

●A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types of trailers

or towing as described below.

●To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must be loaded

by referring to the following instructions.

• Tongue Weight

The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue weight is

9 % to 11 %. (Tongue weight/Gross trailer weight × 100 = 9 % to 11 %)

Gross trailer weight

Tongue weight

If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front axle to the

same weight as before the trailer connection.

If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the front fender

height above the front axle before connection. Adjust weight distributing

hitch torque until front fender is returned to the same height as before con-

nection.

The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight can be mea-

sured with platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building

supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.

Trailer Tongue Weight

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

193

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Lexus recommends the

use of Lexus hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details, contact your Lexus

dealer.

●If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight requirement of your

vehicle.

●Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.

●Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.

●Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer. After removing

the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle body to prevent entry of any

substances into the vehicle.

Remove the clip.

Grasp the lower edge of the hitch

cover and raise the cover.

When reattaching the cover, reverse the

steps listed.

Hitch

Removing hitch cover

194

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Use the correct trailer ball for your application.

Trailer ball load rating

Matches or exceeds the gross trailer

weight rating of the trailer.

Ball diameter

Matches the size of the trailer coupler.

Most couplers are stamped with the

required trailer ball size.

Shank length

Protrudes beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut by at least 2 threads.

Shank diameter

Matches the ball mount hole diameter size.

Selecting trailer ball

Trailer class Typical trailer ball size

IV 2 5/16 in.

II and III 2 in.

I1 7/8 in.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

195

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Hitch receiver pin hole position:

45.3 in. (1151 mm)

Use the wire harness stored in the rear

end under the vehicle body.

Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installation

may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take care to comply with your

state’s laws when installing trailer lights.

■Service connector for towing brake controller

Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the trailer brake controller. Please

consult your dealer when installing trailer brake systems to the vehicle.

Positions for towing hitch receiver

Connecting trailer lights

196

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

●Connecting a trailer

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode.

Turn off the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Connect a trailer.

Turn on the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Select the N (normal) mode with the height select switch.

When a vehicle loaded with four occupants tows a trailer of about 4000 lb.

(1800 kg) with more than about 400 lb. (180 kg) tongue load, the normal mode

may not be selected. However, there is no problem to continue normal driving.

Drive with sufficient care because of large load.

●Disconnecting a trailer

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make sure the vehicle

height is in the “LO” mode by pulling the switch to “∨” on the height select

switch.)

Turn off the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the hitch by 4 in.

(100 mm).

Turn on the engine switch or the 4-Wheel AHC.

Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is lowered by the

automatic leveling function.

Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch higher and

repeat steps 2 through 5.

Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” mode where the hitch does not touch

anything in the N (normal) mode.

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the N mode.

Connecting and disconnecting a trailer

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

197

4-1. Before driving

Driving

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid an acci-

dent, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when towing:

●Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not exceed the

posted towing speed limit.

●Lexus recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph (104 km/h)

on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the posted towing speed

limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s man-

ual, whichever is lowest. Instability of the towing vehicle-trailer combination

(trailer sway) increases as speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause

loss of control.

●Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-trailer con-

nections. Recheck after driving a short distance.

●Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in an area

away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel of the vehicle-

trailer combination.

●Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice. Grip the

bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the left to move the

trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to move the trailer to the right.

(This is generally opposite to reversing without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp

or prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when reversing to reduce the

risk of an accident.

●As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h) of speed, allow at least

one vehicle and trailer length.

●Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jackknifing and

loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Trailer towing tips

198

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

●Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

●Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before making a turn.

●Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than the vehicle

wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making a wider than normal

turning radius.

●Slow down before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surfaces,

etc.

Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.

●Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable dis-

tance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of your trailer, and be

sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

●To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system performance

when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in D.

If in the S mode, the transmission shift range position must be in 6 or lower.

(→P. 210)

●Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long downhill

grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden

downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the brakes too fre-

quently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result in reduced braking

efficiency.

●Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may overheat on hot

days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when driving up a long or steep

grade. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates overheating, imme-

diately turn off the air conditioning (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and

stop in a safe spot. (→P. 552)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

199

4-1. Before driving

Driving

●Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the trailer’s wheels

when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in P.

Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoidable, do so only after performing the

following:

Apply the brakes and keep them applied.

Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and trailer’s

wheels.

When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

Shift into P and apply the parking brake.

Turn off the engine.

●When restarting after parking on a slope:

With the transmission in P, start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake pedal

pressed.

Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.

If the parking brake is in manual mode, release the parking brake.

(→P. 219)

Release the brake pedal, and slowly pull or back away from the wheel

blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.

Have someone retrieve the blocks.

200

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

■Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height

■Before towing

Check that the following conditions are met:

●Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 565)

●Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recommendation.

●All trailer lights work as required by law.

●All lights work each time you connect them.

●The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.

●The trailer is level when it is hitched.

Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue weight, overload-

ing, worn suspension, or other possible causes.

●The trailer cargo is securely loaded.

●The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or local regula-

tions. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.

No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a

more safe trailer hookup, the trailer ball setup

must be the proper height for the coupler on the

trailer.

Coupler

Trailer ball

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

201

4-1. Before driving

Driving

■Driving mode select switch

The suspension can be switched for improvement in driveability. (→P. 284)

■Break-in schedule

If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components (such as an

engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Lexus recommends that you do not

tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km).

After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start towing.

However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a speed of less than

50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full throttle acceleration.

■Maintenance

●If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance due to the addi-

tional load. (See “Owner’s Guide”, “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.)

●Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approximately 600 miles

(1000 km) of trailer towing.

■If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can adversely

affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

●If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce

speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer

should stabilize.

●After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred is beyond

the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.

Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the towing vehi-

cle-trailer increases as speed increases.

202

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

WARNING

■Trailer towing precautions

●To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance with the

trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so could cause an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability and braking performance are

affected by trailer stability, brake setting and performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle

will handle differently when towing a trailer.

●Set the vehicle height to the “LO” mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC when you

connect a trailer, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic level-

ing function, and you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an acci-

dent. (→P. 295)

■To avoid accident or injury

●Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.

●If the gross trailer weight is over 2000 lb. (907 kg), a sway control device with suffi-

cient capacity is required.

●If the gross trailer weight is over 5000 lb. (2268 kg), a weight distributing hitch with

sufficient capacity is required.

●Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads as close

to the trailer axle as possible.

●Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the speed limit

for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Slow

down sufficiently before making a turn, in crosswinds, on wet or slippery surface, etc.

to help avoid an accident. If you experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing

a certain speed, slow down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the

speed of which you experience the instability.

●Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.

●Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing and loss of

vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery surfaces.

●Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle

weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.

●Do not use cruise control (if equipped) or dynamic radar cruise control with full-

speed range (if equipped) when trailer towing.

●Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill grades. Do not

make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long downhill grades.

●Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long down hills. Before descending

steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do not make sudden down-

shifts when descending steep or long downhill grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal

down too long or applying the brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to

overheat and result in reduced braking efficiency.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

203

4-1. Before driving

Driving

WARNING

■Hitch

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the hitch manu-

facturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight,

the operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch assem-

bly and never exceed the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch.

Exceeding the maximum weight rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause

an accident resulting in death or serious personal injuries.

■When towing a trailer

Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable federal and

state/provincial regulations.

●If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are required. Lexus

recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all applicable federal and state/pro-

vincial regulations.

●Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehicle’s braking

effectiveness.

●Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both the trailer

and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball, there is danger of

the trailer wandering into another lane.

NOTICE

■When installing a trailer hitch

Use only the position recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install the trailer

hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.

■Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage your

vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

204

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-1. Before driving

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground)

behind a motor home.

NOTICE

■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

205

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

Engine (ignition) switch

Pull the parking brake switch to check that the parking brake is set. (→P. 218)

Parking brake indicator will come on.

Check that the shift lever is set in P.

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

and a message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

If it is not displayed, the engine cannot be started.

Press the engine switch shortly and

firmly.

When operating the engine switch, one

short, firm press is enough.

It is not necessary to press and hold the

switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for

up to 30 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal

until the engine is completely started.

The engine can be started from any

engine switch mode.

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your

person starts the engine or changes engine switch modes.

Starting the engine

206

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Stop the vehicle.

Set the parking brake (→P. 219), and shift the shift lever to P.

Press the engine switch.

Release the brake pedal and check that the display on the instrument cluster is

off.

Modes can be changed by pressing the engine switch with brake pedal released.

(The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the

audio system can be used.

“ACCESSORY” will be displayed on the

multi-information display.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

“IGNITION ON” will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than

P when turning off the engine, the

engine switch will be turned to ACCES-

SORY mode, not to off.

Stopping the engine

Changing engine switch modes

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

207

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the engine

switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Per-

form the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” is displayed on the multi-information display

and then press the engine switch once.

Check that “Turn Off Vehicle” on the multi-information display is off.

■Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNITION ON

mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the engine

switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery

discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

■Operation of the engine switch

●If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the engine switch mode may not change

or the engine may not start.

●If attempting to restart the engine immediately after turning the engine switch off, the

engine may not start in some cases. After turning the engine off, please wait a few sec-

onds before restarting the engine.

■Electronic key battery depletion

→P. 112

■Conditions affecting operation

→P. 134

■Note for the entry function

→P. 135

■If the engine does not start

●The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 75)

Contact your Lexus dealer.

●Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is

displaced out of P.

A message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

■Steering lock

After turning the engine switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel

will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the engine switch again auto-

matically cancels the steering lock.

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P

208

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

■When the steering lock cannot be released

■Steering lock motor overheating prevention

To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be suspended if the

engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from

running the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume func-

tioning.

■When “Smart Access System Malfunction See Owner’s Manual” is displayed on the

multi-information display

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer,

immediately.

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

→P. 503

■If the smart access system with push-button start has been deactivated in a customized

setting

→P. 546

A message will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display.

Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the

engine switch while turning the steering wheel

left and right.

WARNING

■When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the accelerator

pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■Caution while driving

If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until

the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this cir-

cumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Stopping the engine in an emergency

●If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and

hold the engine switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in

succession. (→P. 511)

However, do not touch the engine switch while driving except in an emergency. Turn-

ing the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but

the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer

and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

●If the engine switch is operated while the vehicle is running, a warning message will be

shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

●When restarting the engine after it was turned off while driving, shift the shift lever to

N and press the engine switch.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

209

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

●Do not leave the engine switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long

periods of time without the engine running.

●If “ACCESSORY” or “IGNITION ON” is displayed on the multi-information display,

the engine switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the engine

switch is off.

●Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is

stopped in another shift lever position, the engine switch will not be turned off but

instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY

mode, battery discharge may occur.

■When starting the engine

●Do not race a cold engine.

●If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehicle checked

by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the engine switch

If the engine switch seems to be operating somewhat differently than usual, such as the

switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer immedi-

ately.

210

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission

While the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever

with the brake pedal depressed.

When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is

completely stopped.

*1: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving

conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recommended for normal driv-

ing.

*2: If equipped, by selecting shift ranges using paddle shift switches, you can control

engine braking forces.

*3: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the possible gear

ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents unnecessary upshifting.

Shifting the shift lever

Shift position purpose

Shift position Purpose and condition

PParking the vehicle/starting the engine

RReversing

NNeutral

(Condition in which the power is not transmitted)

DNormal driving*1 or temporary shift range selection driving*2

SS mode driving*3 (→P. 213)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

211

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

Use second start mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces

such as snow.

Press the button to use second start

mode.

Press the button again to cancel second

start mode.

Selecting the second start mode

212

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

To drive using temporary shift range selection, operate the “-” or “+” paddle shift

switch.

When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be downshifted

to a range that enables engine braking force that is suitable to driving conditions.

When the “+” paddle shift switch is operated, the shift range will be one gear

upper than the gear in use during normal D position driving.

Changing the shift range allows restriction of the highest shift range, preventing

unnecessary upshifting and enabling the level of engine braking force to be

selected.

Downshifting

Upshifting

The selected shift range, from D1 to

D8, will be displayed in the meter.

To return to normal D position driv-

ing, the “+” paddle shift switch must

be held down for a period of time.

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a higher shift

range.

Changing shift range in D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches)

Meter display Function

D2-D8 A gear in the range between 1 and the selected gear is auto-

matically chosen depending on vehicle speed and driving

conditions

D1 Setting the gear at 1

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

213

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

When the shift lever is in the S position, the shift lever or paddle shift switches can

be operated as follows:

Upshifting

Downshifting

The selected shift range, from 1 to 8,

will be displayed in the meter.

The initial shift range in S mode is set

automatically to 6, 5 or 4 according to

vehicle speed. However, the initial shift

range may be set to 3 or 2 if AI-SHIFT

has operated while the shift lever was in

the D position. (→P. 214)

■Shift ranges and their functions

●Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 8 according to vehicle speed

and driving conditions. But, the gear is limited according to selected shift

range.

●You can choose from 8 levels of engine braking force.

●A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher

shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

Changing shift ranges in S mode

214

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

■Paddle shift switches (if equipped)

●When the “-” paddle shift switch is operated in the D position, a shift range will be auto-

matically selected. The highest gear of the first shift range will be one gear lower than

the gear in use during normal D position driving.

●Automatic deactivation of shift range selection in the D position

Shift range selection in the D position will be deactivated in the following situations:

• When the vehicle comes to a stop

• If the accelerator pedal is depressed for longer than a certain period of time in one

shift range

■Driving on a downhill

On declines, there may be case where the vehicle shifts down automatically to obtain

engine braking. As a result of the downshifting, the engine speed may increase.

■Second start mode automatic deactivation

Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off after driving in

second start mode.

■S mode

When the shift range is 7 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets the shift range to

■AI-SHIFT

AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver performance and

driving conditions.

AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the

shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

■When driving with cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling engine braking,

engine braking will not activate because cruise control or dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range will not be canceled.

●While driving in D position (vehicles with paddle shift switches) or S mode, downshift-

ing to 7, 6, 5 or 4. (→P. 269, 281)

●When switching the driving mode to sport mode while driving in D position. (→P. 284)

■Shift lock system

The shift lock system is a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever in start-

ing.

The shift lever can be shifted from P only when the engine switch is in IGNITION ON

mode and the brake pedal is being depressed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

215

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

■If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

First, check whether the brake pedal is being depressed.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake pedal, there may be a prob-

lem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immedi-

ately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever

can be shifted.

Releasing the shift lock:

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch off.

Depress the brake pedal.

■If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to S

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the transmission will operate in the same manner as when the shift lever

is in D.)

■Downshift restriction warning buzzer

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may sometimes

be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be possible even when the

shift lever is operated. (A buzzer will sound twice.)

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver

or equivalent tool.

To prevent damage to the cover, cover the tip

of the screwdriver with a rag.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button

is pressed.

216

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

WARNING

■When driving on slippery road surfaces

Do not accelerate or shift gears suddenly.

Sudden changes in engine braking may cause the vehicle to spin or skid, resulting in an

accident.

■To prevent an accident when releasing the shift lock

Before pressing the shift lock override button, make sure to set the parking brake and

depress the brake pedal.

If the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed instead of the brake pedal when the

shift lock override button is pressed and the shift lever is shifted out of P, the vehicle

may suddenly start, possibly leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

217

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

Turn signal lever

The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver:

Right turn

Lane change to the right (move the

lever partway and then release it)

The right hand signals will flash 3 times.

Lane change to the left (move the

lever partway and then release it)

The left hand signals will flash 3 times.

Left turn

■Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If the indicator flashes faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

■If the turn signals stop flashing before a lane change has been performed

Operate the lever again.

■To discontinue flashing of the turn signals during a lane change

Operate the lever in the opposite direction

■Customization

The number of times the turn signals flash during a lane change can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 580)

Operating instructions

218

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

Parking brake

The parking brake is set or released automatically according to shift lever opera-

tion.

Even when in automatic mode, the parking brake can be set and released manu-

ally. (→P. 219)

■Turns automatic mode on

While the vehicle is stopped, pull

and hold the parking brake switch

until a message is shown on the

multi-information display

• When the shift lever is moved out of

P, the parking brake will be released,

and the parking brake indicator light

turn off.

• When the shift lever is moved into P,

the parking brake will be set, and the

parking brake indicator light turn on.

Operate the shift lever with the brake

pedal depressed.

■Turns automatic mode off

While the vehicle is stopped, press

and hold the parking brake switch

until a message is shown on the

multi-information display

A selections can be made as desired from the following modes.

Automatic mode

U.S.A. Canada

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

219

4-2. Driving procedures

Driving

Sets the parking brake

The parking brake indicator light will

come on. (→P. 219)

Pull and hold the parking brake switch if

an emergency occurs and it is necessary

to operate the parking brake while driv-

ing.

Releases the parking brake

Operate the parking brake switch while

depressing the brake pedal. Make sure

that the parking brake indicator light

goes off.

■Parking the vehicle

→P. 174

■Parking brake operation

●When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, the parking brake cannot be

released using the parking brake switch.

●When the engine switch is not in IGNITION ON mode, automatic mode (automatic

brake setting and releasing) is not available.

■If “Parking Brake Overheated Parking Brake Unavailable” is displayed on the multi-

information display

If the parking brake is operated repeatedly over a short period of time, the system may

restrict operation to prevent overheating. If this happens, refrain from operating the

parking brake. Normal operation will return after about 1 minute.

■Parking brake operation sound

When the parking brake operates, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This

does not indicate a malfunction.

■Parking brake indicator light

●Depending on the engine switch mode, the parking brake indicator light will come on

and stay on as described below:

IGNITION ON mode: Comes on until the parking brake is released.

Not in IGNITION ON mode: Stays on for approximately 15 seconds.

●When the engine switch is turned off with the parking brake set, the parking brake indi-

cator light will stay on for about 15 seconds. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■Changing the mode

When changing the automatic mode on/off, the message will be shown on the multi-

information display and the buzzer sounds.

■Parking brake engaged warning buzzer

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven with the parking brake engaged. “Release

Parking Brake” is displayed on the multi-information display.

Manual mode

U.S.A. Canada

220

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-2. Driving procedures

■Warning messages and buzzers

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution. If a warning message is shown on the multi-information

display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■If the brake system warning light comes on

→P. 522

■Usage in winter time

→P. 382

WARNING

■When parking the vehicle

Do not leave a child in the vehicle alone. The parking brake may be released uninten-

tionally and there is the danger of the vehicle moving that may lead to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When parking the vehicle

Before you leave the vehicle, set the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P and make

sure that the vehicle does not move.

■When the system malfunctions

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and check the warning messages.

■When the parking brake cannot be released due to a malfunction

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheat-

ing, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

221

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

Headlight switch

Turning the end of the lever turns on the lights as follows:

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating instructions

(U.S.A.) (Canada)

The side marker, parking,

tail, license plate, instrument

panel lights, and daytime

running lights (→P. 222)

turn on.

The headlights and all

lights listed above (except

daytime running lights)

turn on.

The headlights, daytime

running lights (→P. 222)

and all lights listed above

turn on and off automati-

cally. (When the engine

switch is in IGNITION

ON mode.)

Off

The daytime running lights

turn on. (→P. 222)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

222

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

With the headlights on, push the

lever forward to turn on the high

beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position

to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on

or off.

■Daytime running light system

●The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking lights and illu-

minate brighter than the parking lights.

●To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving, the daytime

running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The

daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.)

• The engine is running

• The parking brake is released

• The headlight switch is in the (Canada only), or “AUTO”* position

*: When the surroundings are bright

The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate, even if the parking brake is

set again.

●For the U.S.A.: Daytime running lights can be turned off by operating the switch.

●Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system offers greater

durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

■Headlight control sensor

Turning on the high beam headlights

The sensor may not function properly if an

object is placed on the sensor, or anything that

blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting

the level of ambient light and may cause the

automatic headlight system to malfunction.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

223

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■Automatic light off system

●When the headlights are on: The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a

door is opened and closed if the engine switch has been switched to ACCESSORY or

off mode.

●When only the tail lights are on: The tail lights turn off automatically if the engine switch

is switched to ACCESSORY or off mode and driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode, or turn the

light switch off once and then back to or position.

■Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passen-

gers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not inter-

fere with other road users.

■Welcome lighting

If the headlight switch is turned to and the surrounding area is dark, unlocking the

doors using the smart access system with push-button start or wireless remote control

will turn the parking lights and tail lights on automatically.

■If the automatic headlight leveling system warning light flashes

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned off or turned to ACCESSORY mode

and the driver’ door is opened while the tail lights remain on.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

224

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to assess the

brightness of streetlights, the lights of vehicles ahead etc., and automatically

turns the high beam on or off as necessary.

WARNING

■Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to observe

your surroundings and turning the high beam on or off manually if necessary.

■To prevent incorrect operation of the Automatic High Beam system

Do not overload the vehicle.

NOTICE

■Notes when using the Automatic High Beam system

Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):

Observe the following to ensure that the Automatic High Beam functions correctly.

●Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the camera sensor will

mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights, the headlights of other vehi-

cles, etc.

●Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the inside rear

view mirror and the camera sensor.

●Do not modify the vehicle.

●Do not replace windshield with non-genuine windshield.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not replace headlights with non-genuine headlights.

Contact your Lexus dealer.

Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System): →P. 245

●Do not touch the camera sensor.

●Do not subject the inside rear view mirror or

the camera sensor to a strong impact.

●Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

●Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view

mirror or the camera sensor.

●Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the

camera sensor or the area of windshield near

the camera sensor.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

225

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

Push the lever away from you with

the headlight switch in the or

position.

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator will

come on when the headlights are turned

on automatically to indicate that the sys-

tem is active.

Activating the Automatic High Beam system

226

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original position.

The Automatic High Beam indicator

will turn off.

Push the lever away from you to acti-

vate the Automatic High Beam sys-

tem again.

■Switching to high beam

Press the Automatic High Beam

switch.

The Automatic High Beam indicator

will turn off and the high beam indi-

cator will turn on.

Press the switch to activate the Auto-

matic High Beam system again.

■High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

●When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically

turned on:

• Vehicle speed is above approximately 21 mph (34 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

• There are no vehicles ahead with headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are few streetlights on the road ahead.

●If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, the high beam will be automatically turned

off:

• Vehicle speed drops below approximately 17 mph (27 km/h).

• The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights or tail lights turned on.

• There are many streetlights on the road ahead.

Turning the high beam on/off manually

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

227

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■Camera sensor detection information

●The high beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another vehicle

• When vehicles ahead are hidden from sight due to repeated curves, road dividers or

roadside trees

• When vehicles ahead appear from the faraway lane on wide road

• When vehicles ahead have no lights

●The high beam may be turned off if a vehicle ahead that is using fog lights without using

the headlights is detected.

●House lights, street lights, traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or signs may cause

the high beam to switch to the low beams, or the low beams to remain on.

●The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn the high beam on or

off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of vehicles ahead

• The movement and direction of vehicles ahead

• When a vehicle ahead only has operational lights on one side

• When a vehicle ahead is a two-wheeled vehicle

• The condition of the road (gradient, curve, condition of the road surface etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of luggage

●The high beam may be turned on or off when the driver does not expect it.

●Bicycles or similar objects may not be detected.

●In the situations shown below, the system may not be able to accurately detect sur-

rounding brightness levels. This may cause the low beams to remain on or the high

beams to cause problems for pedestrians, vehicles ahead or other parties. In these

cases, manually switch between the high and low beams.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.

• The windshield is cracked or damaged.

• The camera sensor is deformed or dirty.

• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.

• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail lights or fog lights.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are changing color,

or are not aimed properly.

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and darkness.

• When frequently and repeatedly driving ascending/descending roads, or roads with

rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).

• When frequently and repeatedly taking curves or driving on a winding road.

• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign or a mirror.

• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on a truck.

• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.

• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.

• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between in an abnor-

mal manner.

• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or distress to other

drivers or pedestrians nearby.

228

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

Vehicles without PCS (Pre-Collision System):

To lower the sensitivity, push and hold on the inside rear view mirror for 15 to 20 sec-

onds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view mirror will flash to indicate

that the sensitivity has been lowered.

When the engine switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be returned to its normal level.

Vehicles with PCS (Pre-Collision System):

Turn the engine switch off while the following conditions are met.

• The headlight switch is in .

• The headlight switch lever is in low beam position.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Within 30 seconds after , repeat pushing the headlight switch lever to the high

beam position then pulling it to the low beam position quickly 10 times, then leave

the lever in high beam position.

Automatic High Beam (headlights) may turn on even the vehicle is stopped.

229

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

Fog light switch

Type A

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

The fog lights assist visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or

fog.

230

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B

Turns the fog lights off

Turns the fog lights on

■Fog lights can be used when

The headlights are on in low beam.

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

231

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

Windshield wipers and washer

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows.

Type A

Temporary operation

Rain-sensing operation (“AUTO”)

Low speed operation

High speed operation

When “AUTO” is selected, the wipers

will operate automatically when the sen-

sor detects falling rain. The system auto-

matically adjusts wiper timing in

accordance with rain volume and vehi-

cle speed.

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

Operating the wiper lever

232

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Washer/wiper dual operation

The wipers operate automatically. (After

operating several times, the wipers

operate one more time after a short

delay to prevent dripping.)

Type B

Temporary operation

Rain-sensing operation (“AUTO”)

Low speed operation

High speed operation

When “AUTO” is selected, the wipers

will operate automatically when the sen-

sor detects falling rain. The system auto-

matically adjusts wiper timing in

accordance with rain volume and vehi-

cle speed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

233

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

The sensor sensitivity can be adjusted when “AUTO” is selected.

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

Washer/wiper dual operation

The wipers operate automatically. (After

operating several times, the wipers

operate one more time after a short

delay to prevent dripping.)

■The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Raindrop sensor

●If the wiper switch is turned to the “AUTO” position while the engine switch is in

IGNITION ON mode, the wipers will operate once to show that “AUTO” mode is acti-

vated.

●When the sensor sensitivity ring is turned toward high while in “AUTO” mode, the wip-

ers will operate once to indicate that the sensor sensitivity is enhanced.

●If the temperature of the rain drop sensor is 185°F (85°C) or higher, or -22°F (-30°C)

or lower, the automatic operation may not occur. In this case, operate the wipers in any

mode other than “AUTO”.

●The raindrop sensor judges the amount of

raindrops.

An optical sensor is adopted. It may not oper-

ate properly when sunlight from the rising or

setting of the sun intermittently strikes the

windshield, or if bugs etc. are present on the

windshield.

234

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

■If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield

washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

■Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the wind-

shield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers etc. anything

else does not become caught in the windshield wipers.

■Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The

fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

■When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and

held continually.

■When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

235

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

Rear window wiper and washer

The wiper operation is selected by moving the lever as follows:

Type A

Intermittent window wiper operation

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

236

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Type B

Intermittent window wiper operation

Normal window wiper operation

Washer/wiper dual operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

237

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Driving

■The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■If no washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the washer fluid

reservoir.

■Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time

after a short delay to prevent dripping.

■Effect of vehicle and shift position on wiper operation

Type A

With or selected, the rear window wiper sweeps once when you shift the

shift lever to R while windshield wipers operating or with 17 seconds from their deactiva-

tion.

Type B

With or selected, the rear window wiper sweeps once when you shift the

shift lever to R while windshield wipers operating or with 17 seconds from their deactiva-

tion.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed.

(Customizable features →P. 580)

NOTICE

■When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wiper, as it may damage the rear window.

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

238

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight cleaner switch∗

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

■The headlight cleaners can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the headlight switch is turned on.

∗: If equipped

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

NOTICE

■When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not press the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may overheat.

239

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-4. Refueling

Driving

Opening the fuel tank cap

●Turn the engine switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are

closed.

●Confirm the type of fuel.

■Fuel types

→P. 566

■Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommo-

dates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

Before refueling the vehicle

WARNING

■When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may

result in death or serious injury.

●After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an unpainted metal

surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity

before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors

to ignite while refueling.

●Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the

sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel

may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

●Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to

come close to an open fuel tank.

●Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

●Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

●Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

■When refueling

Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank:

●Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck.

●Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off.

●Do not top off the fuel tank.

240

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-4. Refueling

Pull the lever.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly and

remove it, then put it into the holder

on the fuel filler door.

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap

until you hear a click. Once the cap is

released, it will turn slightly in the oppo-

site direction.

NOTICE

■Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control systems to

operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle’s painted sur-

face.

Opening the fuel tank cap

Closing the fuel tank cap

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

241

4-4. Refueling

Driving

WARNING

■When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing

so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

242

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lexus Safety System+∗

◆PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗

→P. 249

◆LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗

→P. 261

◆Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range∗

→P. 269

◆Automatic High Beam

→P. 224

∗: If equipped

The Lexus Safety System+ consists of the following drive assist systems and

contributes to a safe and comfortable driving experience:

WARNING

■Lexus Safety System+

The Lexus Safety System+ is designed to operate under the assumption that the driver

will drive safely, and is designed to help reduce the impact to the occupants and the

vehicle in the case of a collision or assist the driver in normal driving conditions.

As there is a limit to the degree of recognition accuracy and control performance that

this system can provide, do not overly rely on this system. The driver is always responsi-

ble for paying attention to the vehicle’s surroundings and driving safely.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

243

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The pre-collision system is equipped with a sophisticated computer that will

record certain data, such as:

• Accelerator status

•Brake status

• Vehicle speed

• Operation status of the pre-collision system functions

• Information (such as the distance and relative speed between your vehicle

and the vehicle ahead or other objects)

• Images from the camera sensor (available only when the pre-collision braking

function or the pre-collision brake assist function was operating)

The pre-collision system does not record conversations, sounds or images of the

inside of the vehicle.

●Data usage

Lexus may use the data recorded in this computer to diagnose malfunctions,

conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Lexus will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if

the vehicle is leased

• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-

ment agency

• For use by Lexus in a lawsuit

• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or

vehicle owner

●Recorded images can be erased using a specialized device.

The image recording function can be disabled. However, if the function is dis-

abled, data from when the pre-collision system operates will not be available.

Vehicle data recording

244

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Two types of sensors, located behind the front grille and windshield, detect infor-

mation necessary to operate the drive assist systems.

Radar sensor

Camera sensor

Sensors

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the radar sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the radar sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident

resulting in death or serious injury.

●Keep the radar sensor and front grille emblem clean at all times.

●Do not attach accessories, stickers (including transparent stickers) or other items to

the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

●Do not subject the radar sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper has been subjected to a strong impact,

have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●Do not disassemble the radar sensor.

●Do not modify or paint the radar sensor, front grille emblem or surrounding area.

●If the radar sensor, front grille, or front bumper needs to be removed and installed, or

replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

Radar sensor

Front grille emblem

If the front of the radar sensor or the front or

back of the front grille emblem is dirty or

covered with water droplets, snow, etc., clean

it.

Clean the radar sensor and front grille

emblem with a soft cloth so you do not mark

or damage them.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

245

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■To avoid malfunction of the camera sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Otherwise, the camera sensor may not operate properly, possibly leading to an acci-

dent resulting in death or serious injury.

●Keep the windshield clean at all times.

• If the windshield is dirty or covered with an oily film, water droplets, snow, etc.,

clear the windshield.

• If a glass coating agent is applied to the windshield, it will still be necessary to use

the windshield wipers to remove water droplets, etc. from the area of the wind-

shield in front of the camera sensor.

• If the inner side of the windshield where the camera sensor is installed is dirty, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

●If the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or covered with

condensation or ice, use the windshield defogger to remove the fog, condensation or

ice. (→P. 399)

●If water droplets cannot be properly removed from the area of the windshield in front

of the camera sensor by the windshield wipers, replace the wiper insert or wiper

blade.

If the wiper inserts or wiper blades need to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not attach window tinting to the windshield.

●Replace the windshield if it is damaged or cracked.

If the windshield needs to be replaced, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not get the camera sensor wet.

●Do not allow bright lights to shine into the camera sensor.

●Do not dirty or damage the camera sensor.

When cleaning the inside of the windshield, do not allow glass cleaner to contact the

lens. Also, do not touch the lens.

If the lens is dirty or damaged, contact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not subject the camera sensor to a strong impact.

●Do not attach objects, such as stickers, trans-

parent stickers, etc., and so forth, to the outer

side of the windshield in front of the camera

sensor (shaded area in the illustration).

A: From the top of the windshield to approxi-

mately 0.4 in. (1 cm) below the bottom of the

camera sensor

B: Approximately 7.9 in. (20 cm) (Approxi-

mately 4.0 in. (10 cm) to the right and left

from the center of the camera sensor)

246

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

●Do not change the installation position or direction of the camera sensor or remove it.

●Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

●Do not modify any components of the vehicle around the camera sensor (inside rear

view mirror, etc.) or ceiling.

●Do not attach any accessories that may obstruct the camera sensor to the hood, front

grille or front bumper. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.

●If a surfboard or other long object is to be mounted on the roof, make sure that it will

not obstruct the camera sensor.

●Do not modify the headlights or other lights.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

247

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Certification

248

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

249

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

PCS (Pre-Collision System)∗

∗: If equipped

The pre-collision system uses a radar sensor and camera sensor to detect

vehicles and pedestrians in front of your vehicle. When the system determines

that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high, a

warning operates to urge the driver to take evasive action and the potential

brake pressure is increased to help the driver avoid the collision. If the system

determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a vehicle or pedes-

trian is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help avoid the

collision or help reduce the impact of the collision.

The pre-collision system can be disabled/enabled and the warning timing can

be changed. (→P. 253)

250

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆Pre-collision warning

When the system determines that

the possibility of a frontal collision is

high, a buzzer will sound and a warn-

ing message will be displayed on the

multi-information display to urge the

driver to take evasive action.

◆Pre-collision brake assist

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake

pedal is depressed.

◆Pre-collision braking

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the system warns the driver. If the system determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision is extremely high, the brakes are automatically applied to help

avoid the collision or reduce the collision speed.

◆Suspension control

When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision is high,

the Adaptive Variable Suspension System (→P. 377) will control the damping

force of the shock absorbers to help maintain an appropriate vehicle posture.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

251

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■Limitations of the pre-collision system

●The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings.

Do not use the pre-collision system instead of normal braking operations under any

circumstances. This system will not prevent collisions or lessen collision damage or

injury in every situation. Do not overly rely on this system. Failure to do so may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

●Although this system is designed to help avoid a collision or help reduce the impact of

the collision, its effectiveness may change according to various conditions, therefore

the system may not always be able to achieve the same level of performance.

Read the following conditions carefully. Do not overly rely on this system and always

drive carefully.

• Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a

collision: →P. 255

• Conditions under which the system may not operate properly: →P. 257

●Do not attempt to test the operation of the pre-collision system yourself, as the system

may not operate properly, possibly leading to an accident.

■Pre-collision braking

●When the pre-collision braking function is operating, a large amount of braking force

will be applied.

●If the vehicle is stopped by the operation of the pre-collision braking function, the pre-

collision braking function operation will be canceled after approximately 2 seconds.

Depress the brake pedal as necessary.

●The pre-collision braking function may not operate if certain operations are per-

formed by the driver. If the accelerator pedal is being depressed strongly or the steer-

ing wheel is being turned, the system may determine that the driver is taking evasive

action and possibly prevent the pre-collision braking function from operating.

●In some situations, while the pre-collision braking function is operating, operation of

the function may be canceled if the accelerator pedal is depressed strongly or the

steering wheel is turned and the system determines that the driver is taking evasive

action.

●If the brake pedal is being depressed, the system may determine that the driver is tak-

ing evasive action and possibly delay the operation timing of the pre-collision braking

function.

252

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■When to disable the pre-collision system

In the following situations, disable the system, as it may not operate properly, possibly

leading to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●When the vehicle is being towed

●When your vehicle is towing another vehicle

●When transporting the vehicle via truck, boat, train or similar means of transportation

●When the vehicle is raised on a lift with the engine running and the tires are allowed to

rotate freely

●When inspecting the vehicle using a drum tester such as a chassis dynamometer or

speedometer tester, or when using an on vehicle wheel balancer

●When a strong impact is applied to the front bumper or front grille, due to an accident

or other reasons

●If the vehicle cannot be driven in a stable manner, such as when the vehicle has been

in an accident or is malfunctioning

●When the vehicle is driven in a sporty manner or off-road

●When the tires are not properly inflated

●When the tires are very worn

●When tires of a size other than specified are installed

●When tire chains are installed

●When a compact spare tire or an emergency tire puncture repair kit is used

●If equipment (snow plow, etc.) that may obstruct the radar sensor or camera sensor is

temporarily installed to the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

253

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Disabling the pre-collision system

Press the PCS switch for 3 seconds or

more.

The PCS warning light will turn on

and a message will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

To enable the system, press the PCS

switch again.

The system is enabled each time the

engine switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode.

■Changing the pre-collision warning timing

Press the PCS switch to display the

current warning timing on the multi-

information display. Each time the

PCS switch is pressed with the

warning timing displayed, the warn-

ing timing will change as follows.

The operation timing setting is

retained when the engine switch is

turned off.

Far

The warning will begin to operate

earlier than with the default timing.

Middle

This is the default setting.

Near

The warning will begin to operate later than with the default timing.

Changing settings of the pre-collision system

254

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Operational conditions

The pre-collision system is enabled and the system determines that the possibility of a

frontal collision with a vehicle or pedestrian is high.

Each function is operational at the following speeds:

●Pre-collision warning:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10

and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

●Pre-collision brake assist:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 110 mph (30 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 20 and 50 mph

[30 and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or more.

●Pre-collision braking:

• Vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 110 mph (10 and 180 km/h). (For

detecting a pedestrian, vehicle speed is between approximately 7 and 50 mph [10

and 80 km/h].)

• The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or pedestrian ahead is

approximately 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.

The system may not operate in the following situations:

●If a battery terminal has been disconnected and reconnected and then the vehicle has

not been driven for a certain amount of time

●If the shift lever is in R

●If VSC is disabled (only the pre-collision warning function will be operational)

●If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator is illuminated (only the pre-collision warning

function will be operational)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

255

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Pedestrian detection function

■Cancelation of the pre-collision braking

If either of the following occur while the pre-collision braking function is operating, it will

be canceled:

●The accelerator pedal is depressed strongly.

●The steering wheel is turned sharply or abruptly.

■Conditions under which the system may operate even if there is no possibility of a colli-

sion

●In some situations such as the following, the system may determine that there is a possi-

bility of a frontal collision and operate.

• When passing a vehicle or pedestrian

• When changing lanes while overtaking a preceding vehicle

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that is changing lanes

The pre-collision system detects pedestrians

based on the size, profile, and motion of a

detected object. However, a pedestrian may not

be detected depending on the surrounding

brightness and the motion, posture, and angle of

the detected object, preventing the system from

operating properly. (→P. 259)

• When overtaking a preceding vehicle that

is making a left/right turn

• When passing a vehicle in an oncoming

lane that is stopped to make a right/left turn

256

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• When rapidly closing on a vehicle ahead

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or lowered, such as when the road surface is

uneven or undulating

• When approaching objects on the roadside, such as guardrails, utility poles, trees, or

walls

• When driving on a narrow path surrounded by a structure, such as in a tunnel or on

an iron bridge

• When there is a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.), steps, or a protrusion

on the road surface or roadside

• When driving on a road where relative

location to vehicle ahead in an adjacent

lane may change, such as on a winding

road

• When there is a vehicle, pedestrian, or

object by the roadside at the entrance of a

curve

• When a crossing pedestrian approaches

very close to the vehicle

• When passing through a place with a low

structure above the road (low ceiling, traffic

sign, etc.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

257

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• When rapidly closing on an electric toll gate barrier, parking area barrier, or other

barrier that opens and closes

• When using an automatic car wash

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When there are patterns or paint on the road or a wall that may be mistaken for a

vehicle or pedestrian

• When driving near an object that reflects radio waves, such as a large truck or

guardrail

• When driving near a TV tower, broadcasting station, electric power plant, or other

location where strong radio waves or electrical noise may be present

■Situations in which the system may not operate properly

●In some situations such as the following, a vehicle may not be detected by the radar

sensor and camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• If an oncoming vehicle is approaching your vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead is a motorcycle or bicycle

• When approaching the side or front of a vehicle

• If a preceding vehicle has a small rear end, such as an unloaded truck

• When passing under an object (billboard,

etc.) at the top of an uphill road

• When driving through or under objects

that may contact the vehicle, such as thick

grass, tree branches, or a banner

• If a preceding vehicle has a low rear end,

such as a low bed trailer

258

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

• If a vehicle ahead is carrying a load which protrudes past its rear bumper

• If a vehicle ahead is irregularly shaped, such as a tractor or side car

• If the sun or other light is shining directly on a vehicle ahead

• If a vehicle cuts in front of your vehicle or emerges from beside a vehicle

• If a vehicle ahead makes an abrupt maneuver (such as sudden swerving, accelera-

tion or deceleration)

• When suddenly cutting behind a preceding vehicle

• When driving in inclement weather such as heavy rain, fog, snow or a sandstorm

• When the vehicle is hit by water, snow, dust, etc. from a vehicle ahead

• When driving through steam or smoke

• When driving in a place where the surrounding brightness changes suddenly, such

as at the entrance or exit of a tunnel

• When a very bright light, such as the sun or the headlights of oncoming traffic, shines

directly into the camera sensor

• When the surrounding area is dim, such as at dawn or dusk, or while at night or in a

tunnel

• After the engine has started the vehicle has not been driven for a certain amount of

time

• While making a left/right turn and for a few seconds after making a left/right turn

• While driving on a curve and for a few seconds after driving on a curve

• If your vehicle is skidding

• If the wheels are misaligned

• If a wiper blade is blocking the camera sensor

• The vehicle is wobbling.

• The vehicle is being driven at extremely high speeds.

• If a vehicle ahead has extremely high

ground clearance

• When a vehicle ahead is not directly in front

of your vehicle

• If the front of the vehicle is raised or low-

ered

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

259

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

• When driving on a hill

• If the radar sensor or camera sensor is misaligned

●In some situations such as the following, sufficient braking force may not be obtained,

preventing the system from performing properly:

• If the braking functions cannot operate to their full extent, such as when the brake

parts are extremely cold, extremely hot, or wet

• If the vehicle is not properly maintained (brakes or tires are excessively worn,

improper tire inflation pressure, etc.)

• When the vehicle is being driven on a gravel road or other slippery surface

●Some pedestrians such as the following may not be detected by the radar sensor and

camera sensor, preventing the system from operating properly:

• Pedestrians shorter than approximately 3.2 ft. (1 m) or taller than approximately

6.5 ft. (2 m)

• Pedestrians wearing oversized clothing (a rain coat, long skirt, etc.), making their sil-

houette obscure

• Pedestrians who are carrying large baggage, holding an umbrella, etc., hiding part

of their body

• Pedestrians who are bending forward or squatting

• Pedestrians who are pushing a stroller, wheelchair, bicycle or other vehicle

• Groups of pedestrians which are close together

• Pedestrians who are wearing white and look extremely bright

• Pedestrians in the dark, such as at night or while in a tunnel

• Pedestrians whose clothing appears to be nearly the same color or brightness as

their surroundings

• Pedestrians near walls, fences, guardrails, or large objects

• Pedestrians who are on a metal object (manhole cover, steel plate, etc.) on the road

• Pedestrians who are walking fast

• Pedestrians who are changing speed abruptly

• Pedestrians running out from behind a vehicle or a large object

• Pedestrians who are extremely close to the side of the vehicle (outside rear view

mirror, etc.)

260

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■If the PCS warning light flashes or illuminates and a warning message is displayed on

the multi-information display

The pre-collision system may be temporarily unavailable or there may be a malfunction

in the system.

●In the following situations, the warning light will turn off, the message will disappear and

the system will become operational when normal operating conditions return:

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is hot,

such as in the sun

• When the radar sensor or camera sensor or the area around either sensor is cold,

such as in an extremely cold environment

• When a front sensor is dirty or covered with snow, etc.

• When the part of the windshield in front of the camera sensor is fogged up or cov-

ered with condensation or ice (Defogging the windshield: →P. 405)

• If the camera sensor is obstructed, such as when the hood is open or a sticker is

attached to the windshield near the camera sensor

●If the PCS warning light continues to flash or remains illuminated or the warning mes-

sage does not disappear even though the vehicle has returned to normal, the system

may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■If VSC is disabled

●If VSC is disabled (→P. 378), the pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision braking

functions are also disabled.

●The PCS warning light will turn on and “VSC Turned Off Pre-collision Brake System

Unavailable” will be displayed on the multi-information display.

261

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

LDA (Lane Departure Alert)∗

When driving on roads with white (yellow) lines, this function alerts the driver

when the vehicle might depart from its lane.

The LDA system recognizes visible

white (yellow) lines with the camera

sensor on the upper portion of the front

windshield.

◆Lane departure alert function

When the system determines that

the vehicle might depart from its

lane, a warning is displayed on the

multi-information display, and either

the warning buzzer sounds or the

steering wheel vibrates to alert the

driver.

When the warning buzzer sounds or

the steering wheel vibrates, check

the surrounding road situation and

carefully operate the steering wheel

to move the vehicle back to the cen-

ter of the lane.

∗: If equipped

Summary of functions

Functions included in LDA system

262

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

◆Vehicle sway warning

When the vehicle is swaying or

appears as if it may depart from its

lane multiple times, the warning

buzzer sounds and a message is dis-

played on the multi-information dis-

play to alert the driver.

WARNING

■Before using LDA system

Do not rely solely upon the LDA system. The LDA system does not automatically drive

the vehicle or reduce the amount of attention that must be paid to the area in front of

the vehicle. The driver must always assume full responsibility for driving safely by pay-

ing careful attention to the surrounding conditions and operating the steering wheel to

correct the path of the vehicle. Also, the driver must take adequate breaks when

fatigued, such as from driving for a long period of time.

Failure to perform appropriate driving operations and pay careful attention may lead to

an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■To avoid operating LDA system by mistake

When not using the LDA system, use the LDA switch to turn the system off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

263

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Press the LDA switch to turn the LDA

system on.

The LDA indicator illuminates.

Press the LDA switch again to turn the

LDA system off.

When the LDA system is turned on or

off, operation of the LDA system contin-

ues in the same condition the next time

the engine is started.

WARNING

■Situations unsuitable for LDA system

Do not use the LDA system in the following situations.

The system may not operate properly and lead to an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

●A spare tire, tire chains, etc. are equipped.

●Objects or patterns that could be mistaken for white (yellow) lines are present on the

side of the road (guardrails, curbs, reflective poles, etc.).

●Vehicle is driven on a snow-covered road.

●White (yellow) lines are difficult to see due to rain, snow, fog, dust, etc.

●Asphalt repair marks, white (yellow) line marks, etc. are present due to road repair.

●Vehicle is driven in a temporary lane or restricted lane due to construction work.

●Vehicle is driven in a construction zone.

■Preventing LDA system malfunctions and operations performed by mistake

●Do not modify the headlights or place stickers, etc. on the surface of the lights.

●Do not modify the suspension etc. If the suspension etc. needs to be replaced, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

●Do not install or place anything on the hood or grille. Also, do not install a grille guard

(bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.).

●If your windshield needs repairs, contact your Lexus dealer.

Turning LDA system on

264

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lane departure alert function display

Displayed when the multi-informa-

tion display is switched to the driving

assist system information screen.

Indications on multi-information display

Inside of displayed white lines is

white

Inside of displayed white lines is

black

Indicates that the system is recognizing

white (yellow) lines. When the vehicle

departs from its lane, the white line dis-

played on the side the vehicle departs

from flashes orange.

Indicates that the system is not able to

recognize white (yellow) lines or is

temporarily canceled.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

265

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Operation conditions of each function

●Lane departure alert function

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• LDA is turned on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• System recognizes white (yellow) lines.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• Turn signal lever is not operated.

• Vehicle is driven on a straight road or around a gentle curve with a radius of more

than approximately 492 ft. (150 m).

• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 267)

●Vehicle sway warning

This function operates when all of the following conditions are met.

• Setting for “Sway Warning” in (Settings display) of the multi-information dis-

play is set to “On”. (→P. 580)

• Vehicle speed is approximately 32 mph (50 km/h) or more.

• Width of traffic lane is approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) or more.

• No system malfunctions are detected. (→P. 267)

■Temporary cancelation of functions

When operation conditions are no longer met, a function may be temporarily canceled.

However, when the operation conditions are met again, operation of the function is auto-

matically restored. (→P. 265)

■Lane departure alert function

The warning buzzer may be difficult to hear due to external noise, audio playback, etc.

Also, it may be difficult to feel steering wheel vibrations due to the road conditions, etc.

■White (yellow) lines are only on one side of road

The LDA system will not operate for the side on which white (yellow) lines could not be

recognized.

266

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Conditions in which functions may not operate properly

In the following situations, the camera sensor may not detect white (yellow) lines and var-

ious functions may not operate normally.

●There are shadows on the road that run parallel with, or cover, the white (yellow) lines.

●The vehicle is driven in an area without white (yellow) lines, such as in front of a tollgate

or checkpoint, or at an intersection, etc.

●The white (yellow) lines are cracked, “Botts’ dots”, “Raised pavement marker” or stones

are present.

●The white (yellow) lines cannot be seen or are difficult to see due to sand, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a road surface that is wet due to rain, puddles, etc.

●The traffic lines are yellow (which may be more difficult to recognize than lines that are

white).

●The white (yellow) lines cross over a curb, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a bright surface, such as concrete.

●The vehicle is driven on a surface that is bright due to reflected light, etc.

●The vehicle is driven in an area where the brightness changes suddenly, such as at the

entrances and exits of tunnels, etc.

●Light from the headlights of an oncoming vehicle, the sun, etc. enters the camera.

●The vehicle is driven where the road diverges, merges, etc.

●The vehicle is driven on a slope.

●The vehicle is driven on a road which tilts left or right, or a winding road.

●The vehicle is driven on an unpaved or rough road.

●The vehicle is driven around a sharp curve.

●The traffic lane is excessively narrow or wide.

●The vehicle is extremely tilted due to carrying heavy luggage or having improper tire

pressure.

●The distance to the preceding vehicle is extremely short.

●The vehicle is moving up and down a large amount due to road conditions during driv-

ing (poor roads or road seams).

●The headlight lenses are dirty and emit a faint amount of light at night, or the beam axis

has deviated.

●The vehicle has just changed lanes or crossed an intersection.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

267

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Warning message

If the following warning message is displayed on the multi-information display and the

LDA indicator turns off, follow the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.

If a different warning message is displayed, follow the instructions displayed on the

screen.

Warning message Details/Actions

“Lane Departure

Alert

Malfunction

Visit Your Dealer”

The system may not be operating properly.

→Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus

dealer.

“Forward Camera

System

Unavailable

Clean Windshield”

Dirt, rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. are

present on the windshield in front of the cam-

era sensor.

→Turn the LDA system off, remove any dirt,

rain, condensation, ice, snow, etc. from the

windshield, and then turn the LDA system

back on.

“Forward Camera

System

Unavailable”

The operation conditions of the camera sen-

sor (temperature, etc.) are not met.

→When the operation conditions of the cam-

era sensor (temperature, etc.) are met, the

LDA system will become available. Turn

the LDA system off, wait for a little while,

and then turn the LDA system back on.

“Lane Departure Alert Unavailable”

The LDA system is temporarily canceled due

to a malfunction in a sensor other than the

camera sensor.

→Turn the LDA system off and follow the

appropriate troubleshooting procedures

for the warning message. Afterward, drive

the vehicle for a short time, and then turn

the LDA system back on.

“Lane Departure

Alert

Unavailable

Below Approx

32 mph”

The LDA system cannot be used as the vehicle

speed is less than approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h).

→Drive the vehicle at approximately 32 mph

(50 km/h) or more.

268

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Customization

The following settings can be changed.

For how to change settings, refer to P. 580.

Function Setting details

Lane departure alert function Adjust alert sensitivity

Adjust alert type

Vehicle sway warning function Turn function on and off

Adjust alert sensitivity

269

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed

range∗

In vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically acceler-

ates, decelerates and stops to match the speed changes of the preceding vehicle

even if the accelerator pedal is not depressed. In constant speed control mode,

the vehicle runs at a fixed speed.

Use the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range on freeways and

highways.

●Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode (→P. 272)

●Constant speed control mode (→P. 277)

Indicators

Display

Set speed

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch

Cruise control switch

∗: If equipped

Summary of functions

270

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■Before using dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Driving safely is the sole responsibility of the driver. Do not rely solely on the system,

and drive safely by always paying careful attention to your surroundings.

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range provides driving assistance to

reduce the driver’s burden. However, there are limitations to the assistance provided.

Set the speed appropriately depending on the speed limit, traffic flow, road conditions,

weather conditions, etc.

Even when the system is functioning normally, the condition of the preceding vehicle as

detected by the system may differ from the condition observed by the driver. There-

fore, the driver must always remain alert, assess the danger of each situation and drive

safely. Relying on this system or assuming the system ensures safety while driving can

lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cautions regarding the driving assist systems

Observe the following precautions, as there are limitations to the assistance provided

by the system.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Assisting the driver to measure following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range is only intended to help the

driver in determining the following distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a

designated vehicle traveling ahead. It is not a mechanism that allows careless or inat-

tentive driving, and it is not a system that can assist the driver in low-visibility condi-

tions. It is still necessary for driver to pay close attention to the vehicle’s surroundings.

●Assisting the driver to judge proper following distance

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range determines whether the fol-

lowing distance between the driver’s own vehicle and a designated vehicle traveling

ahead is within a set range. It is not capable of making any other type of judgement.

Therefore, it is absolutely necessary for the driver to remain vigilant and to determine

whether or not there is a possibility of danger in any given situation.

●Assisting the driver to operate the vehicle

The dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range has limited capability to pre-

vent or avoid a collision with a vehicle traveling ahead. Therefore, if there is ever any

danger, the driver must take immediate and direct control of the vehicle and act

appropriately in order to ensure the safety of all involved.

■To avoid inadvertent dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range activation

Switch the dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range off using the “ON/OFF”

button when not in use.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

271

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range in any of the following

situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate speed control and could cause an accident result-

ing in death or serious injury.

●Roads where there are pedestrians, cyclists, etc.

●In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

●On steep downhills, or where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down

gradients

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

●At entrances to freeways and highways

●When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from

detecting correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.)

●When there is rain, snow, etc. on the front surface of the radar sensor or camera sen-

sor

●In traffic conditions that require frequent repeated acceleration and deceleration

●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

●When an approach warning buzzer is heard often

272

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles up to

approximately 328 ft. (100 m) ahead, determines the current vehicle-to-vehicle

following distance, and operates to maintain a suitable following distance from

the vehicle ahead.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close in when traveling on long downhill

slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising

When there are no vehicles ahead

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising and follow-up cruising

When a preceding vehicle driving slower than the set speed appears

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, the system automatically deceler-

ates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system

applies the brakes (the stop lights will come on at this time). The system will respond to

changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle

distance set by the driver. Approach warning warns you when the system cannot

decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing in on the vehicle ahead.

When the vehicle ahead of you stops, your vehicle will also stop (vehicle is stopped by

system control). After the vehicle ahead starts off, pushing the cruise control lever up

or depressing the accelerator pedal will resume follow-up cruising.

Example of acceleration

When there are no longer any preceding vehicles driving slower than the set

speed

The system accelerates until the set speed is reached. The system then returns to con-

stant speed cruising.

Driving in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

273

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Press the “ON/OFF” button to acti-

vate the cruise control.

Radar cruise control indicator will come

on and a message will be displayed on

the multi-information display.

Press the button again to deactivate the

cruise control.

If the “ON/OFF” button is pressed and

held for 1.5 seconds or more, the system

turns on in constant speed control

mode. (→P. 277)

Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 30 mph [50 km/h])

and push the lever down to set the

speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

lever is released becomes the set speed.

If the lever is operated while the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph (50

km/h) and a preceding vehicle is present, the set speed will be adjusted to approxi-

mately 30 mph (50 km/h).

Setting the vehicle speed (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

274

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is dis-

played.

Increases the speed

(Except when the vehicle has been

stopped by system control in vehicle-to-

vehicle distance control mode)

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move

the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever up or

down to change the speed, and release

when the desired speed is reached.

In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the set speed will be increased

or decreased as follows:

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Hawaii

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is

operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2

increments for as long as the lever is held

For vehicles sold in Canada, Guam and Puerto Rico

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is

operated

Large adjustment: Increases or decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h)*1 or 5 km/h (3.1 mph)*2

increments for as long as the lever is held

In the constant speed control mode (→P. 277), the set speed will be increased or

decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is

operated

Large adjustment: The speed will continue to change while the lever is held.

*1: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

*2: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Adjusting the set speed

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

275

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Pressing the switch changes the vehi-

cle-to-vehicle distance as follows:

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is set

automatically to long mode when the

engine switch is turned to IGNITION

ON mode.

If a vehicle is running ahead of you, the preceding vehicle mark will also be displayed.

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown corre-

spond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

increases/decreases in accordance with vehicle speed. When the vehicle is

stopped by system control, the vehicle stops at a certain vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance depending on the situation.

After the vehicle ahead of you starts off,

push the lever up.

Your vehicle will also resume follow-up

cruising if the accelerator pedal is

depressed after the vehicle ahead of

you starts off.

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance (vehicle-to-vehicle distance

control mode)

Preceding

vehicle mark

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings (vehicle-to-vehicle distance con-

trol mode)

Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long Approximately 160 ft. (50 m)

Medium Approximately 130 ft. (40 m)

Short Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

Resuming follow-up cruising when the vehicle has been stopped by sys-

tem control (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

276

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Pulling the lever toward you cancels

the speed control.

The speed control is also canceled when

the brake pedal is depressed.

(When the vehicle has been stopped by

system control, depressing the brake

pedal does not cancel the setting.)

Pushing the lever up resumes the

cruise control and returns vehicle

speed to the set speed.

However, when a vehicle ahead is not detected, cruise control does not resume when

the vehicle speed is approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or less.

When your vehicle is too close to a

vehicle ahead, and sufficient automatic

deceleration via the cruise control is

not possible, the display will flash and

the buzzer will sound to alert the driver.

An example of this would be if another

driver cuts in front of you while you are

following a vehicle. Depress the brake

pedal to ensure an appropriate vehicle-

to-vehicle distance.

■Warnings may not occur when

In the following instances, warnings may not occur even when the vehicle-to-

vehicle distance is small.

●When the speed of the preceding vehicle matches or exceeds your vehicle

speed

●When the preceding vehicle is traveling at an extremely slow speed

●Immediately after the cruise control speed was set

●When depressing the accelerator pedal

Canceling and resuming the speed control

Approach warning (vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

277

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When constant speed control mode is selected, your vehicle will maintain a set

speed without controlling the vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Select this mode only

when vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode does not function correctly due

to a dirty radar sensor, etc.

With the cruise control off, press and

hold the “ON/OFF” button for 1.5

seconds or more.

Immediately after the “ON/OFF” but-

ton is pressed, the radar cruise control

indicator will come on. Afterwards, it

switches to the cruise control indicator.

Switching to constant speed control

mode is only possible when operating

the lever with the cruise control off.

Accelerate or decelerate, with

accelerator pedal operation, to the

desired vehicle speed (at or above

approximately 25 mph [40 km/h])

and push the lever down to set the

speed.

Cruise control “SET” indicator will come

on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

lever is released becomes the set speed.

Adjusting the speed setting: →P. 274

Canceling and resuming the speed setting: →P. 276

Selecting constant speed control mode

278

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range can be set when

●The shift lever is in D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

●Range 4 or higher of D has been selected by using the paddle shift switch (vehicles with

paddle shift switches).

●Vehicle speed is at or above approximately 30 mph (50 km/h).

However, when a preceding vehicle is detected, the dynamic radar cruise control with

full-speed range can be set even if the vehicle speed is below approximately 30 mph

(50 km/h).

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

The vehicle can accelerate by operating the accelerator pedal. After accelerating, the

set speed resumes. However, during vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehi-

cle speed may decrease below the set speed in order to maintain the distance to the pre-

ceding vehicle.

■When the vehicle stops while follow-up cruising

●Pushing the lever up while the vehicle ahead stops will resume follow-up cruising if the

vehicle ahead starts off within approximately 3 seconds after the lever is pushed up.

●If the vehicle ahead starts off within 3 seconds after your vehicle stops, follow-up cruis-

ing will be resumed.

■Automatic cancelation of vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled in the following situ-

ations.

●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) when there are no

vehicles ahead.

●The preceding vehicle leaves the lane when your vehicle is following at a vehicle speed

at or below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Otherwise, the sensor can not properly

detect the vehicle. (“CRUISE NOT AVAILABLE No Preceding Vehicles” is displayed

on the multi-information display)

●VSC is activated.

●Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.

●When second start mode is set.

●The sensor cannot detect correctly because it is covered in some way.

●Pre-collision braking is activated.

●The parking brake is operated.

●The vehicle is stopped by system control on a steep incline.

●The following are detected when the vehicle has been stopped by system control:

• The driver is not wearing a seat belt.

• The driver’s door is opened.

• The vehicle has been stopped for about 3 minutes

●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential

lock switch has been operated.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is automatically canceled for any other rea-

son, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

279

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Automatic cancelation of constant speed control mode

Constant speed control mode is automatically canceled in the following situations:

●Actual vehicle speed is more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the set vehi-

cle speed.

●Actual vehicle speed falls below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

●VSC is activated.

●Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.

●Pre-collision braking is activated.

●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential

lock switch has been operated.

If constant speed control mode is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may

be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■Warning messages and buzzers for dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

Warning messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to inform

the driver of the need for caution while driving. If a warning message is shown on the

multi-information display, read the message and follow the instructions.

■When the sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

In the case of the following and depending on the conditions, operate the brake pedal

when deceleration of the system is insufficient or operate the accelerator pedal when

acceleration is required.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the approach

warning (→P. 276) may not be activated.

●Vehicles that cut in suddenly

●Vehicles traveling at low speeds

●Vehicles that are not moving in the same lane

●Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board, etc.)

●Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

●When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the detecting of

the sensor

280

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode may not function

correctly

In the case of the following conditions, operate the brake pedal (or accelerator pedal,

depending on the situation) as necessary.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, the system may not

operate properly.

●When the vehicle ahead of you decelerates suddenly

●When your vehicle is pointing upwards

(caused by a heavy load in the luggage com-

partment, etc.)

●Preceding vehicle has an extremely high

ground clearance

●When the road curves or when the lanes are

narrow

●When steering wheel operation or your posi-

tion in the lane is unstable

281

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Cruise control∗

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelera-

tor pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

Press the “ON/OFF” button to acti-

vate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the

cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle

to the desired speed, and push the

lever down to set the speed.

“SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the

lever is released becomes the set speed.

∗: If equipped

Summary of functions

Setting the vehicle speed

282

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the

lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the

desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By 1 mph (1.6 km/h)*1 or 1 km/h (0.6 mph)*2 each time the lever is

operated

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased continually until the

lever is released.

*1: When the set speed is shown in “MPH”

*2: When the set speed is shown in “km/h”

Pulling the lever toward you cancels

the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also canceled when

the brakes are applied.

Pushing the lever up resumes the

constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle

speed is more than approximately 25

mph (40 km/h).

■Cruise control can be set when

●The shift lever is in the D or range 4 or higher of S has been selected.

●Range 4 or higher has been selected by using the paddle shift. (vehicles with paddle

shift switches)

●Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

■Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

●The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

●Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be increased by first accel-

erating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new

speed.

Adjusting the set speed

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

283

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations:

●Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset

vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

●Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

●VSC is activated.

●Active TRAC is activated for a period of time.

●The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center differential

lock switch has been operated.

●When the VSC or Active TRAC system is turned off.

■If “Cruise Control Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is shown on the multi-information

display

Press the “ON/OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press the button

again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after

being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON/OFF” button when not in use.

■Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

●In heavy traffic

●On roads with sharp bends

●On winding roads

●On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

●On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

●When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

284

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving mode select switch

Normal mode/Customized mode

Normal mode and customized mode are selected by pressing the driving

mode select switch. Each time the switch is pressed, the driving mode

changes between normal mode and customized mode. When customized

mode is selected, the “CUSTOMIZE” indicator will be illuminated.

Press the switch to change the driving mode to normal mode when not in normal

mode.

• Normal mode

Provides an optimal balance of fuel economy, quietness, and dynamic per-

formance. Suitable for city driving.

• Customized mode

Allows you to drive with the following functions set to your preferred set-

tings.

Customized mode settings can only be changed on the drive mode cus-

tomization display of the Remote touch screen. (→P. 580)

The driving modes can be selected to suit driving condition.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

285

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Comfort mode

By controlling the suspension, riding comfort is further enhanced. Suitable for

city driving.

When not in comfort mode and the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the

“COMFORT” indicator comes on in the multi-information display.

Eco drive mode

Helps the driver accelerate in an eco-friendly manner and improve fuel econ-

omy through moderate throttle characteristics and by controlling the opera-

tion of the air conditioning system (heating/cooling).

When in comfort mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the left, the

“ECO” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

Sport mode

•SPORT S mode

Controls the transmission and engine to provide quick, powerful accelera-

tion. This mode is suitable for when agile driving response is desired, such

as when driving on roads with many curves.

When not in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the

right, the “SPORT S” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

•SPORT S+ mode

Helps to ensure steering performance and driving stability by simultane-

ously controlling the steering and suspension in addition to the transmis-

sion and engine. Suitable for sportier driving.

When in SPORT S mode, if the driving mode select switch is turned to the right,

the “SPORT S+” indicator will come on in the multi-information display.

Function Setting

Powertrain

Normal

Power

Eco

Chassis Normal

Sport

Air conditioning system Normal

Eco

286

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

Eco drive mode controls the heating/cooling operations and fan speed of the air condi-

tioning system to enhance fuel efficiency. To improve air conditioning performance,

adjust the fan speed or turn off eco mode of the air conditioning system. (→P. 399)

■Automatic deactivation of sport mode and customized mode

If the engine switch is turned off after driving in sport mode or customized mode, the

drive mode will be changed to normal mode.

■Driving mode pop-up display

When the driving mode is changed, the selected driving mode will be temporarily dis-

played on the side display. (→P. 392)

287

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Intuitive parking assist

Front corner sensors

Front center sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

On/off

To turn the system on, press the switch.

The indicator light comes on and the

buzzer sounds to inform the driver that

the system is operational.

To turn the system off, press the switch

again.

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel parking or

maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors and communicated via

the multi-information display, the remote touch screen, and a buzzer. Always

check the surrounding area when using this system.

Types of sensors

Intuitive parking assist switch

288

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the sensors detect an obstacle, a graphic is shown on the multi-informa-

tion display and the remote touch screen depending on the position and distance

to the obstacle.

Multi-information display

Front corner sensor operation

Front center sensor operation

Rear corner sensor operation

Rear center sensor operation

Remote touch screen

Intuitive parking assist

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if

equipped)

A graphic is automatically displayed on

the side display when an obstacle is

detected. The screen can be set so that

the graphic is not displayed.

: Select to mute the buzzer

sounds.

Display

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

289

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Distance display

Sensors that detect an obstacle will illuminate continuously or blink.

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance

Multi-information

display Remote touch

screen

Approximate distance to obstacle

Corner sensor/

front center sensor Rear center sensor

(continuous) (continuous)

Front center

sensor:

3.3 ft. (100 cm) to

2.0 ft. (60 cm)

4.9 ft. (150 cm) to

2.6 ft. (80 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to

1.5 ft. (45 cm) 2.6 ft. (80 cm) to

2.1 ft. (65 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (45 cm) to

1.1 ft. (35 cm) 2.1 ft. (65 cm) to

1.6 ft. (50 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)

Less than

1.1 ft. (35 cm) Less than

1.6 ft. (50 cm)

290

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A buzzer sounds when the sensors are operating.

●The buzzer sounds faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obstacle, the

buzzer sounds continuously.

• Front center sensors: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

• Corner: Approximately 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

• Rear center sensors: Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)

●When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the buzzer system

responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come within the above dis-

tances, the beep will repeat a long tone, followed by fast beeps.

●You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (→P. 291)

Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)

Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)

Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

The diagram shows the detection range

of the sensors. Note that the sensors

may not be able to detect obstacles that

are extremely close to the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may change

depending on the shape of the object

etc.

Detection range of the sensors

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

291

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

You can change the buzzer sound volume and the screen operating conditions.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Select “Vehicle”, and then select “LEXUS Park Assist”/“LEXUS Park Assist

Settings” on the screen.

Select the desired item.

The buzzer sound volume can be

adjusted.

On or off can be selected for intu-

itive parking assist display.

Front or rear center sensors dis-

play and tone indication can be

set.

Setting up intuitive parking assist

292

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■The intuitive parking assist can be operated when

●Front corner sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P.

• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

(At any speed when the shift lever is in R)

●Front center sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than P or R.

• The vehicle speed is less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

●Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in R.

■Intuitive parking assist display

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor system, Lexus parking assist

monitor or Multi-terrain Monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the upper

corner of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.

■Sensor detection information

●The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s bumper.

●Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the ability of a

sensor to correctly detect an obstacle. Particular instances where this may occur are

listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this prob-

lem.)

• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal

display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass.

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air

brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the vicinity.

• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

• A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is installed.

• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of clothing.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because of their shape,

signs and other objects may be judged by a sensor to be closer than they are.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

293

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●The shape of the obstacle may prevent a sensor from detecting it. Pay particular atten-

tion to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

• Sharply-angled objects

• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehi-

cle

●The following situations may occur during use.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance

may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor.

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow

speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within the sensor’s detection

areas before the display is shown and the buzzer sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected when approached,

even if they have been detected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise

of the air conditioning system.

■If “Clean Parking Assist Sensor” is displayed on the multi-information display

A sensor may be dirty or covered with snow or ice. In such cases, if it is removed from the

sensor, the system should return to normal.

Also, due to the sensor being frozen at low temperatures, a malfunction display may

appear or an obstacle may not be detected. If the sensor thaws out, the system should

return to normal.

■If “Parking Assist Malfunction” is displayed on the multi-information display

Depending on the malfunction of the sensor, the device may not be working normally.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Certification for the intuitive parking assist (Canada only)

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

■Customization

Settings (e.g. buzzer sounds volume) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

294

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■When using the intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely and possibly

cause an accident.

●Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).

●The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or

reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehi-

cle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

●Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

■When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor mal-

function etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

●A buzzer does not sound when you turn the intuitive parking assist on.

●The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a buzzer sounds when no

obstacles are detected.

●If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

●If the bumper collides with something.

●If the display shows continuously without a buzzer.

●If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is likely that the

sensor is malfunctioning.

■Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

295

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension)

Easy access mode switch

Height control OFF switch

Height select switch

Higher

Lower

The 4-Wheel AHC adjusts the vehicle height in accordance with driving con-

ditions. There are 3 selectable modes, “HI” (high), “N” (normal), and “LO”

(low).

Selecting vehicle height

296

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Current mode

The vehicle is in the N (normal) height

mode in the illustration. and

show directions in which it is possible to

adjust the vehicle height.

Height up

Height down

Height control “OFF” indicator

When the height control “OFF” indicator is displayed, the vehicle height will not

change even if the height select switch is operated.

Push the height select switch to “∧” to step up one height mode, and pull to “∨” to

step down one height mode. (Ex. When in the low height mode, push to “∧” once

to switch to the normal height mode, and twice to switch to the high height

mode.)

■“HI” (high) height mode

Vehicle height is about 2.0 in. (50 mm) higher at the front, and about 2.4 in.

(60 mm) higher at the rear than the normal mode height.

This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads or through water.

High height mode is only available when the vehicle speed is under 18 mph

(30 km/h).

■N (normal) height mode

The standard vehicle height. This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

When driving at high speeds, the vehicle height is automatically lowered by

0.8 in. (20 mm) in the front and 0.6 in. (15 mm) in the rear, to ensure excellent

aerodynamic characteristics and stability.

If the vehicle speed drops, normal height mode is automatically resumed.

■“LO” (low) height mode

Vehicle height is about 2.4 in. (60 mm) lower at the front, and about 1.6 in. (40

mm) lower at the rear than the normal mode height.

This mode allows easy access to the vehicle.

Low height mode is only available when the vehicle is travelling at 7 mph

(12 km/h) or less. When the vehicle speed exceeds 7 mph (12 km/h), normal

height mode is automatically selected.

Display

Vehicle height modes

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

297

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Some modes may not be selectable depending on the vehicle speed when the

four-wheel drive control switch is in the H4 position. Refer to the following table.

You can select this mode for easy

access and easy loading of the vehicle.

If the engine switch is turned off within

approximately 30 seconds after the

vehicle is stopped while easy access

mode is on, the vehicle height is lowered

automatically.

When the vehicle begins to lower a

beep will sound twice, and while the

vehicle is lowering the indicator light will

flash to alert the driver and surrounding

people that the vehicle is lowering.

The indicator light stops blinking, and comes on continuously to indicate that the shift

is completed.

Easy access mode is available if the following conditions have been met:

●The vehicle height mode is in normal mode.

●The vehicle is stopped on a flat surface.

●The shift lever is in P.

●The side doors and back door are not opened after the vehicle is stopped.

The following method will cancel the vehicle lowering operation and raise the

vehicle again:

●Press the height control OFF switch.

●Push the height select switch to “∧”.

Conditions for changing the vehicle height mode

Low mode Normal mode High mode

Under 7 mph (12 km/h) Yes Yes Yes

7 mph (12 km/h) to

18 mph (30 km/h) No Yes Yes

18 mph (30 km/h) or over No Yes No

Easy access mode

298

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

When the height control OFF switch is

pressed with the vehicle stopped.

The height control “OFF” indicator will

appear on the multi-information display,

and the vehicle height will be fixed in the

current mode. Push the switch again to

turn the system back on.

■Operating conditions

●The engine must be running.

●Vehicle height control must be turned off.

●All side doors and the back door must be closed.

■Switching vehicle height mode while the engine is stopped

●If the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, lowering will continue.

●If any luggage is removed from the vehicle or if any occupants leave the vehicle within

approximately 30 seconds of the engine switch being turned off, the vehicle height may

be lowered by the auto leveling function.

●Operating the height select switch will have no effect while the engine is stopped.

■Automatic change in vehicle height when the four-wheel drive control switch is in the

L4 position

If the vehicle speed exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) while driving on an uneven road with the

four-wheel drive control switch in the “L4” position, high mode is automatically selected.

(On even roads, the height mode will not change.)

■Automatic change in vehicle height when in the high mode

●If the vehicle speed exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h) with the four-wheel drive control switch

in the “H4” position, normal mode is automatically selected.

●If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 mph (50 km/h) with the four-wheel drive control

switch in the “L4” position, the vehicle height is lowered to 1.0 in. (25 mm) higher than

the normal mode height. If the vehicle speed drops to 13 mph (20 km/h) or less, high

mode is automatically resumed.

Disabling the height control

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

299

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Extra high mode

If the vehicle becomes stuck or the Crawl Control system requests the vehicle height be

raised, extra high mode may be automatically selected when the vehicle height is in high

mode with the four-wheel drive control switch in the L4 position.

The vehicle height is raised to 0.8 in. (20 mm) higher than the high mode height, or

slightly higher.

●Extra high mode will change back to high mode when:

• The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h)

• The four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to H4.

●If you pull the height select switch to “∨” when in extra high mode, normal mode is

selected.

●Extra high mode cannot be manually selected.

■Turning off the height control

●The system will remain off until the height control “OFF” switch is pushed again, even if

the engine switch is turned off.

●Even if the system is turned off, the system will intervene automatically if the vehicle

speed exceeds the following.

• 18 mph (30 km/h) with high or low mode

• 50 mph (80 km/h) with normal mode

■Automatic leveling function

The vehicle is adjusted to a fixed height for each mode, regardless of the number of

occupants and the luggage load.

●However the vehicle cannot be raised if the vehicle load exceeds the following limits:

• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 661 lb. (300 kg) in the normal mode

• Up to 4 occupants* plus approximately 441 lb. (200 kg) in the high mode

*: average weight 150 lb. (68 kg) per person

●If the vehicle height cannot be raised when in the normal mode, and “LO” appears on

the display, the vehicle is loaded too heavily. Take extra care when driving in this condi-

tion.

If the vehicle height cannot be raised even after unloading the vehicle, pull the height

select switch to “∨” then push to “∧”. If the vehicle height still cannot be raised, turn the

ignition off then on again, then try once more.

■When the vehicle is stopped during driving

The activation of the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle height to change.

This is not a malfunction.

■If the vehicle height does not change

If the vehicle is loaded too heavily, or the undercarriage has come into contact with the

road surface, the vehicle height cannot be raised/lowered.

300

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■In the following cases the 4-Wheel AHC will not operate

●The brake pedal has been depressed for a few seconds or longer while the vehicle is

stopped.

●Vehicle height control has not been frequently used.

●The suspension fluid temperature is lower than -22°F (-30°C).

●There is ice on the suspension.

●Driving on bumpy roads which may cause the suspension to fully elongate.

●If the steering wheel is abruptly turned more than 3/4 of a revolution with the center dif-

ferential lock system activated.

■Cold weather operation

It may take longer for the vehicle height to change if the suspension fluid temperature

drops below 5°F (-15°C).

The 4-Wheel AHC does not operate when the suspension fluid temperature drops

below -22°F (-30°C).

●In this case, even if the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height will not change.

Once the vehicle has been driven for a short time and the suspension fluid has been

warmed to within normal operating limits, the 4-Wheel AHC will begin operating and

the vehicle height will automatically change to the selected mode.

●When the suspension fluid is around -22°F (-30°C), the vehicle height may not be able

to be raised, even if the 4-Wheel AHC is operating. In this case, pull the height select

switch to “∨” then push to “∧” after driving for a short time longer to select the desired

vehicle height.

■Parking and stopping tips

●If you immediately stop the engine after off-road driving, the vehicle height may gradu-

ally lower. When parking, make sure there is nothing under the vehicle that may come

in contact with the underbody. The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine

is started.

●The vehicle height may change as the temperature changes when the engine is

stopped. The vehicle will return to the set height when the engine is started.

■Propeller shaft noise

If the vehicle height is adjusted on a slope, or with the shift lever in a position other than P

or N while the vehicle is stopped, you may hear a sound caused by the expansion and

contraction of the propeller shaft. This does not indicate a malfunction.

■4-Wheel AHC failure warning

If a malfunction occurs in the 4-Wheel AHC, normal mode is automatically selected.

However, the system may not switch to normal mode depending on the location of the

malfunction.

The warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, and the 4-Wheel

AHC cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected.

Stop the engine and start it again. If the warning message turns off, the system is operat-

ing correctly. If the warning message continues to be displayed, have the vehicle checked

at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

301

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■When switching the vehicle height mode

Before lowering the vehicle height, check that there are no people under or around the

vehicle, and check for obstacles.

If you do not do this, body parts may be caught in the vehicle, possibly leading to an

accident.

■Using the high mode

The high mode should only be used when driving on rough roads, for example when

driving off-road. Because the vehicle’s center of gravity will become higher when in the

mode, the vehicle may become unstable when turning abruptly, resulting in an acci-

dent.

■When jacking up the vehicle or installing tire chains

Turn off the height control and stop the engine, otherwise the vehicle height may

change due to the automatic leveling function and you may catch part of your body in

the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

■When crossing rivers

Select the high mode and turn off the height control. Drive at 18 mph (30 km/h) or

lower. Otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function,

resulting in an accident.

■If your vehicle must be towed

Put the vehicle height in the normal mode and turn off the height control, otherwise the

vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may catch

part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

■If your vehicle becomes stuck in a ditch

Turn off the height control, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in an accident.

■When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier

Do not switch to high mode. Sudden steering could cause the vehicle to lose stability

due to the vehicle’s higher center of gravity, possibly leading to an accident.

302

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE

■When parking in areas with limited overhead height

After leaving the vehicle or unloading the luggage, the vehicle height may be slightly

higher than normal. Take care when overhead height is limited.

■To avoid damage to the vehicle

●Normal mode will be switched to automatically even if the vehicle is started off in low

mode. Take care when overhead height is limited.

●Do not select the low mode when driving on bumpy roads, as the underbody of the

vehicle may contact the road surface.

●When traveling on bumpy roads or through water, or when towing, turn off easy

access mode.

■Avoid rapid changes to the vehicle height

As the pump may overheat. Leave at a few seconds between selections when changing

the vehicle height mode.

303

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Four-wheel drive system

H4 (high speed position)

Normal driving on all types of roads.

L4 (low speed position)

Driving requiring maximum power and

traction such as climbing or descending

steep hills, off-road driving, and hard

pulling in sand or mud, etc.

The low speed four-wheel drive indica-

tor will come on.

Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential lock/unlock

switch to select the following transfer and center differential modes.

Four-wheel drive control switch

304

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Lock the center differential when your

vehicle’s wheels get stuck in a ditch or

when driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface.

The center differential lock indicator will

come on.

Unlock the center differential after the

wheels have been freed, or after moving

to a flat, non-slippery surface.

To unlock the center differential, push the switch again.

■Shifting from H4 to L4

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to L4.

Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on.

■Shifting from L4 to H4

Stop the vehicle completely with brake pedal held down.

Shift the shift lever to N.

Push and shift the four-wheel drive control switch to H4.

Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns off.

■The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when

●The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

●The shift lever is in the N position.

●The vehicle is stopped completely.

■The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light

The indicator light blinks while shifting between H4 and L4.

■Advice for driving on slippery roads

●If you shift the four-wheel drive control switch to L4 and the shift lever to the 2 range of

S or D (vehicles with paddle shift switches) while driving in steep off-road areas, the

output of the brake can be controlled effectively by the Active TRAC, which assists the

driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.

●Use the 1 range of S or D (vehicles with paddle shift switches) for maximum power and

traction when your wheels get stuck or when driving down a steep incline.

Center differential lock/unlock switch

Shifting between H4 and L4

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

305

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■The center differential lock indicator light

The indicator light blinks while locking/unlocking the center differential.

■The center differential lock/unlock switch can be operated when

●The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

●The vehicle speed is less than 62 mph (100 km/h).

■Locking/unlocking the center differential

●When the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4 with the center differential locked,

VSC is automatically turned off. (The center differential lock and VSC OFF indicator

lights come on.)

●If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator blinks. If the indi-

cator light does not turn off when unlocking the center differential, drive straight ahead

while accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.

●If the center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds while the cruise

control system is on, cancel the cruise control system.

■If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator

light blinks

●If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when using the four-

wheel drive control switch, stop the vehicle completely, move the shift lever to N and

operate the switch again.

●If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,

the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both

the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move

regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or

someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer

mode.

To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever to N, and

confirm that the shift was completed (the indicator turns on/off).

●If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the four-wheel drive control system may

not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer operate the switch again.

If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator

light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may be a malfunction in

the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be

able to shift between H4 and L4, and the center differential lock may not be operable.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

306

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■While driving

Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost traction. Doing

so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■When the vehicle is parked

If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator turns on/off,

the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer mode disengages both

the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and allows the vehicle to move

regardless of the shift position. (At this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer

sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in P. You or

someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the shifting of the transfer

mode.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the center differential

●For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differential.

●Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery

or bumpy surface.

●Do not push the center differential lock/unlock switch when the vehicle is turning or

when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.

307

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Crawl Control (with Turn Assist function)

ON/OFF switch

Speed selection switch

Indicators

The Crawl Control indicator is lit and

the slip indicator flashes when operat-

ing.

Multi-information display

The operating status and speed select

status of the Crawl Control are shown

on the multi-information display.

Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low speed with-

out pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes loss of traction or

vehicle slip when driving on slippery road surfaces, allowing for stable driving.

Crawl Control switches

308

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The following table shows some typical

terrains and the recommended speed

modes.

This function assists cornering performance in accordance with steering opera-

tion when driving through a tight corner. It maintains vehicle speed while driving

and reduces the number of turns needed to navigate a corner that requires turn-

ing the wheel in the opposite direction.

Press the Turn Assist switch while

Crawl Control is operating.

Turn Assist indicator will come on.

To turn the system off, press the switch

again.

Speed modes

Mode Road condition

Lo Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel (down-

hill)

Lo-Med Mogul (uphill)

Med

Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand, dirt,

mogul (uphill) and grass

Med-Hi

Turn Assist function

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

309

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Crawl Control

Press the ON/OFF switch while Crawl Control is operating. If the switch is

turned off, the slip indicator and the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn

Assist function is in use), the Crawl Control indicator will flash until the system

has turned off completely, and a message stating that Crawl Control has been

turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several seconds.

When turning off Crawl Control while driving, stop the vehicle before the Crawl

Control indicator turns off, or drive extremely carefully.

Turn Assist function

Press the Turn Assist switch while the Turn Assist function is operating. When the

switch is pressed, the Turn Assist indicator will go off, and a message stating that

the Turn Assist function has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-infor-

mation display for several seconds.

■The Crawl Control and Turn Assist function can be operated when

Crawl Control

●The engine is running.

●The shift lever is in any gear other than P or N.

●The four-wheel drive control switch is in L4.

●The driver’s door is closed.

Turn Assist function

●Crawl Control is operating.

●The center differential is not locked.

●The accelerator and brake are not being operated.

●The shift lever is in any gear other than P, R or N.

●The steering wheel is turned very far.

When the system is turned off

310

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Automatic system cancelation

Crawl Control

In the following situations, the buzzer will sound intermittently and Crawl Control will be

canceled automatically. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash and then go

off, the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn Assist function is in use), and a message

stating that Crawl Control has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information

display for several seconds.

●When the shift lever is moved to P or N.

●When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.

●When the driver’s door is opened.

Turn Assist function

When the center differential is locked, the buzzer will sound intermittently and the Turn

Assist function will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Turn Assist indicator will

go off, and a message stating that the Turn Assist function has been turned off will be dis-

played on the multi-information display for several seconds.

■Function limitations

Crawl Control

●In the following situations, brake control can be used to drive downhill at a constant

speed. However, engine control is not available when driving uphill at a constant speed.

•When switched to second start mode.

●In the following situation, engine control and brake control will stop temporarily. In this

event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 15 mph (25 km/h).

Turn Assist function

In the following situations, the Turn Assist function will stop temporarily. In this event, the

Turn Assist indicator will flash.

●When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

●When the shift lever is moved to R.

■When the Crawl Control system is operated continuously

●If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, a malfunc-

tion notification will be displayed on the multi-information display, the Crawl Control

indicator will go off, and Crawl Control will be temporarily inoperable as a result of the

brake system overheating. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place,

and allow the brake system to cool down sufficiently until the TRAC OFF indicator

goes off. (In the meantime, normal driving is possible.)

●If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will sound, the system

will be temporarily canceled, and a malfunction notification will be displayed on the

multi-information display as a result of the automatic transmission system overheating.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place until the display goes off.

■When depressing the accelerator pedal while the Crawl Control is operating

Multi-terrain Select operates in AUTO mode. (→P. 313)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

311

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just

after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has

occurred in Crawl Control system.

●Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control system is operat-

ing. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

■When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (→P. 520, 528)

WARNING

■When using Crawl Control and Turn Assist function

Do not rely solely on the Crawl Control and Turn Assist function. This function does not

extend the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thoroughly check the road condi-

tions, and drive safely.

■These conditions may cause the system not to operate properly

When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to maintain a fixed

low speed, which may result in an accident:

●Extremely steep inclines.

●Extremely uneven surfaces.

●Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces.

NOTICE

■When using Turn Assist function

The Turn Assist function is a function to assist turning performance when driving off

road. The function may be less effective on paved road surfaces.

312

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-terrain Select

When the Crawl Control is turned off

Select a mode that most closely matches the type of terrain on which you are

driving from among 5 modes.

Brake control can be optimized in accordance with the selected mode.

When the Crawl Control is turned on

A mode which matches the road conditions is automatically selected by

depressing the accelerator pedal (AUTO mode).

Multi-terrain Select mode selector

switch

Multi-terrain Select indicator

Multi-information display

Displays status information including

operating status and road type

selection.

Multi-terrain Select is a system that helps drivability in off-road situations.

Multi-terrain Select switch/indicators

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

313

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

When the Crawl Control is turned off, a

mode which matches the road condi-

tions can be selected from among the

following 5 modes.

MUD & SAND

LOOSE ROCK

MOGUL

ROCK & DIRT

ROCK

When the Crawl Control is turned on, the most suitable mode is automatically

selected according to the Crawl Control mode selected.

When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the Multi-terrain Select indica-

tor will come on, the mode select screen will be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display, and Multi-terrain Select control will begin.

●The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.

●Both Active TRAC and VSC are not off.

Selectable modes

Mode Road Conditions

MUD & SAND Suitable for muddy roads, sandy roads, snow-covered roads, dirt

trails and other slippery or dirty conditions

LOOSE ROCK Suitable for slippery conditions consisting of mixtures of earth

and loose rock

MOGUL Suitable for a wide range of off-road conditions, particularly very

bumpy conditions

ROCK & DIRT Suitable for very bumpy road conditions, such as mogul or rocky

roads.

ROCK Suitable for rocky terrain

Multi-terrain Select control starting conditions

314

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Operate the Multi-terrain Select mode

selector switch during Multi-terrain

Select control to select a mode.

Once the mode is confirmed, the mode

name will be displayed and the control

will switch.

■Automatic system cancelation

In the following situations, the Multi-terrain Select indicator will go off, and Multi-terrain

Select will be canceled automatically.

●When the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4.

●When Active TRAC and VSC are off.

■When it is difficult to generate traction

MUD & SAND mode provides the largest amount of tire slippage, followed by LOOSE

ROCK, MOGUL, ROCK & DIRT and ROCK mode.

Drivability can be improved by selecting a mode which provides a smaller amount of tire

slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slippage is large, or conversely

selecting a mode which provides a larger amount of tire slippage than the current mode

when the amount of tire slippage is small.

■When the vehicle is stuck

Switching the transfer and differential

For the operation of the following functions, refer to the following pages.

●Four-wheel drive system (→P. 303)

●Center differential lock (→P. 304)

■When the brake system operates continuously

The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, the TRAC OFF indica-

tor will flash, and Multi-terrain Select will be temporarily inoperable. In this event, stop

the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool down suffi-

ciently. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

After a short time, the TRAC OFF indicator will go off, and you will be able to use Multi-

terrain Select.

■When there is a malfunction in the system

The slip indicator light will come on. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer

immediately.

Switching modes

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

315

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■When using the Multi-terrain Select

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or

serious injuries:

●There is a chance that the selected mode may not be the most appropriate in terms of

road conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc. (→P. 313)

●Multi-terrain Select is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle. Check the road

conditions thoroughly beforehand, and drive safely and carefully.

NOTICE

■Precaution for use

The Multi-terrain Select is intended for use during off-road driving. Do not use the sys-

tem at any other time.

316

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-terrain Monitor

The following screens can be selected according to driving conditions.

• Screens that can be selected vary depending on conditions such as shift posi-

tion and vehicle speed. (→P. 322)

• Depending on the displayed screen, the display can be switched from normal

to wide view display.

The Multi-terrain Monitor helps the driver to check the vehicle surroundings.

It assists in determining the conditions around the driver in a variety of situa-

tions, such as when judging conditions during off-road driving or checking for

obstacles when parking.

WARNING

■When using the Multi-terrain Monitor system

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or

serious injuries.

●Never rely solely on the Multi-terrain Monitor. As with unequipped vehicles, drive

carefully while directly confirming the safety of your surroundings and the area to the

rear of the vehicle. Take particular care to avoid parked cars and other obstacles.

●Due to the characteristics of the camera lens, the actual position and distance of peo-

ple and other obstacles will differ from those shown on the Multi-terrain Monitor

screen. Directly confirm the safety of your surroundings before driving.

●Do not drive while only looking at the screen. When driving, make sure to directly

confirm the safety of your surroundings, such as by visually checking the area and

using the vehicle’s mirrors.

●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the images may become faint.

Images of moving objects in particular may distort or disappear from the screen.

Therefore, make sure to drive carefully while directly visually confirming the safety of

your surroundings.

Multi-terrain Monitor screens

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

317

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4

●When checking the area to the front and sides of the vehicle

●When checking the condition of the road surface under the vehicle

Front view & dual side view Front view & dual side view (front

magnified)

→P. 325 →P. 325

Under vehicle terrain view & dual

side view

Under vehicle terrain view & dual

side view (front magnified)

→P. 329 →P. 329

318

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle

■Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4

●When checking the area to the front of the vehicle (panoramic view & wide

front view)

→P. 333

●When checking the area to the sides of the vehicle (side views)

→P. 335

Rear view & dual side view Wide rear view

→P. 331 →P. 331

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

319

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●When checking the area to the rear of the vehicle

●When checking the area to the sides, front and rear of the vehicle (with out-

side rear view mirrors retracted)

Panoramic view & rear view Wide rear view

→P. 338 →P. 338

Wide front view & side view Rear view & side view

→P. 344 →P. 344

Side views

→P. 344

320

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Displaying the Multi-terrain Monitor screen

The Multi-terrain Monitor screen will be displayed when the VIEW switch is

pressed while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

When the vehicle speed exceeds a certain value for a specific amount of time, the

display returns to the navigation or information display screen.

The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor is displayed differs depending

on conditions such as the vehicle speed. (→P. 325)

VIEW switch

Display

Using the Multi-terrain Monitor screen

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

321

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Switch operations

On some screens, the display mode or display settings can be changed using

the switches.

●Automatic display mode switch

When automatic display mode is turned on, the Multi-terrain Monitor

screen is displayed in the following conditions, even if the VIEW switch has

not been operated.

• The shift lever is shifted to D or N

• While driving, the vehicle speed drops to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

or less (except when the shift lever is in R)

The automatic display mode

switches between on and off each

time is selected.

When automatic display mode is

on, an indicator illuminates on the

icon.

Even when automatic display

mode is on, the display can still be

switched by pressing the VIEW

switch.

●Display selection switches

The following switches can be pressed or selected to switch the Multi-ter-

rain Monitor display screen and to switch from normal to wide view display.

Indicator

Switch Switch Function

VIEW switch Changing a display (→P. 322)

Angle mode

selection switch Switches between the wide rear view and

wide view display (→P. 331, 338)

Under vehicle ter-

rain view selection

switch

Switches between the front view and under

vehicle terrain view (→P. 325, 329)

322

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The screen display can be switched by operating the switches as follows while

the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed. (Screens that can be displayed will

vary depending on the positions of the shift lever and four-wheel drive control

switch)

■Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4

: Press

: Select

: Operate the shift lever

Changing the Multi-terrain Monitor screen

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

323

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

*: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the camera on the

screen.

Front view & dual side view:

→P. 325

Under vehicle terrain view & dual

side view: →P. 329

Front view & dual side view (front

magnified): →P. 325

Under vehicle terrain view & dual

side view (front magnified):

→P. 329

Rear view & dual side view:

→P. 331

Wide rear view: →P. 331

324

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Screens when the four-wheel drive control switch is in H4

: Press

: Select

: Operate the shift lever

*1: The displayed screen differs when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted.

*2: The screen display can be switched by touching the image from the camera on the

screen.

Navigation screen, information set-

tings screen, etc.

Side views: →P. 335

Panoramic view & wide front view:

→P. 333

Panoramic view & rear view:

→P. 338

Wide rear view: →P. 338

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

325

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Multi-terrain Monitor screen display

The amount of time that the Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed changes as follows

according to the vehicle speed at the time the VIEW switch was pressed.

The Multi-terrain Monitor screen is displayed if the vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph

(12 km/h) or less when the camera switch is pressed.

If the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 7 mph (12 km/h), the Multi-terrain Monitor

display is canceled.

The various screens of the Multi-terrain Monitor display information to support

several different driving situations, such as when checking for obstacles when

moving forward or in reverse, or when judging road surface conditions during

off-road driving.

■Front view & dual side view

Front view & dual side view can be used to check the area around the front of

the vehicle.

• In addition to an image of the front of the vehicle, guide lines are displayed

in a composite view to provide reference for when deciding a direction to

move forward in.

• If the VIEW switch is pressed while the screen is displayed, the screen

switches from normal to magnified display. (Pressing the switch again

returns the screen to the normal display)

• If the steering wheel is turned 270° or more, guide lines and other features

to support turning are automatically displayed.

Screen display and functions

326

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Screen description

Under vehicle terrain view selection

switch

Switches between front view and under

vehicle terrain view display each time

the switch is selected.

Automatic display mode selection

switch

→P. 321

Tilt meter/slip display

Displays the vehicle’s estimated degree

of incline or indicates a tire slippage.

(→P. 327)

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Indicate the width of the vehicle includ-

ing the outside rear view mirror.

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line

(red)

3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (blue)

6 ft. (2 m) distance guide line

(blue)

Items to indicate the estimated

distance from the front end of the vehi-

cle.

Front tire course line (yellow)

Indicates the estimated course of the

front tires according to steering wheel

position.

Forward movement guide line

(blue)

Indicates the estimated tire course of

the tightest possible turn.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Items and indicate estimated tire

positions on the image.

Rear tire course line (yellow)

Indicates the estimated course of the

rear tires.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

327

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Front view rotating display function

This function operates when the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4.

The front view image is automatically adjusted to be parallel and assist the

driver to check road surface conditions regardless of the vehicle inclina-

tion.

●Tilt meter

Tilt meter displays the vehicle

inclination to the front, rear, left

and right within a range of 0° to

approximately 30°.

Degree markers of incline to

the front and rear

Indicates the vehicle inclination in

degrees in the front and rear

directions.

Degree markers of incline to the left and right

Indicates the vehicle inclination in degrees in the left and right directions.

Pointer

Indicates the degree of the vehicle inclination in comparison to a parallel line.

328

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Slip display

When tire slippage is detected,

the tilt meter display area is auto-

matically switched to the slip dis-

play.

Tire display

Indicates the position of freely

spinning tires in yellow if the tire

spins. (During Crawl Control is

operating, all of the tires are indi-

cated in yellow.)

Pop-up display of the intuitive parking assist

Displayed if an obstacle is detected while the intuitive parking assist is turned

on.

Pop-up display of the RCTA (if equipped)

Displayed if a vehicle approaching from right or left rear of the vehicle is

detected while the RCTA is turned on.

■Front view & dual side view display

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.

■Front view rotating display function

●The vehicle inclination displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.

●When the rotated screen is displayed, the corners of the front bumper may not be seen

on the screen.

■Tilt meter display

●The display indicates the incline of the vehicle in degrees shown by the movement of

the pointer and the rotation of the vehicle image.

●The color of the degree markers of incline to the front, rear, left and right changes

according to the current incline of the vehicle.

●After the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the degree of incline is not

displayed until such information is determined.

●The degree of incline showed on the tilt meter is only an approximate indication, and

may differ from the degree of incline measured using other equipment.

■Tilt meter/slip display

When the intuitive parking assist or RCTA (if equipped) detects an obstacle or another

vehicle, a warning message pops up in the tilt meter/slip display area.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

329

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

Lines indicating current vehicle and tire position are displayed in a composite

view on an image taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle

position and assists the driver to check conditions underneath the vehicle or

determine the position of the front tires.

Current vehicle position

Image displayed in the under vehicle terrain view (image taken approximately

10 ft. (3 m) behind the current vehicle position)

Vehicle position at the time the image was taken (approximately 10 ft. (3 m)

behind the current vehicle position)

●Displaying the under vehicle terrain view

While the front view is displayed, stop the vehicle completely, and then

press .

Pressing again returns the screen to the front view display.

●Screen description

Tire position indicator lines

(black)

Indicates the estimated position of

the front tires.

Vehicle position indicator lines

(blue)

Indicates the estimated position of

the vehicle.

Icon (flashing)

Indicates that the under vehicle terrain view display is of an image taken in the

past.

330

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Under vehicle terrain view & dual side view

●The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in D or N.

●While the under vehicle terrain view is displayed, if the vehicle speed reaches or

exceeds approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), the screen automatically returns to the front

view display.

●In the following situations, the under vehicle terrain view selection switch cannot be

operated.

• The vehicle is not completely stopped

• After the engine starts, a fixed distance or more has not been driven

• After the four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to L4, a fixed distance or more

has not been driven

●In the following situations, the system may not operate normally, or it may not be possi-

ble to switch to the under vehicle terrain view.

• The road is covered with snow

• It is nighttime and the road has no illumination

• Dirt or foreign matter is adhering to the camera lens

• There is water in front of the vehicle (a river, puddle, sea water, etc.)

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

■Under vehicle terrain view display

The image displayed is one that was previously taken at a point approximately 10 ft.

(3 m) behind the current vehicle position. In cases such as when objects move after the

image is taken, the image displayed on the screen may differ from the actual state.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

331

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view

Guide lines are displayed in a composite view on an image of the area to the

rear of the vehicle to use as a reference when deciding a course of movement

and assist the driver to check the safety of the area to the rear of the vehicle or

to park the vehicle.

●Screen description

The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according to condi-

tions.

Angle selection switch

Switches between rear view & dual side view display and wide rear view display each

time the switch is selected.

Tilt meter/slip display

→P. 327

Projected course lines (yellow)

Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering operations.

1.5 ft. (0.5 m) distance guide line (red)

3 ft. (1 m) distance guide line (yellow)

8 ft. (2.5 m) distance guide line (yellow)

, and indicate the estimated distance from the rear end of the vehicle.

Vehicle width extension guide line (blue)

Indicates the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mirrors.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Items and indicate estimated tire positions on the image.

Rear view & dual side view display Wide rear view display

332

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Rear view & dual side view/wide rear view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.

■Guide lines

If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide lines do not

display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus

dealer.

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

333

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Panoramic view & wide front view

The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image from the

front camera are displayed simultaneously and assist the driver to check con-

ditions in front, and to the right and left, of the vehicle at intersections or T-

junctions with poor visibility.

●Screen description

The following 2 types of display mode can be selected according to condi-

tions.

Panoramic view

Displays an image looking down at the vehicle from above.

Wide front view

Displays an image of the area to the front of the vehicle.

Display area

Guide line display selection switch

→P. 334

Automatic display mode selection switch

→P. 321

Front distance guide line (blue)

Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Forward projected course lines

Automatically displayed when the steering wheel is turned 90° or more from the cen-

ter position.

Indicates the estimated course of the vehicle according to steering wheel operations.

Distance guide line display mode Projected course line display mode

334

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Switching to automatic display mode

→P. 321

●Switching guide line display modes

The mode switches and the switch display changes each time the guide line

display selection switch is selected.

■Panoramic view & wide front view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.

Selected mode Distance guide line display

mode Projected course line display

mode

Switch display

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

335

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Side views

The image from the both side cameras is displayed and assists the driver to

check conditions on the sides of the vehicle or to confirm the safety of narrow

roads.

●Screen description

Side view (left front side)

Side view (right front side)

Display area

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Indicate the estimated vehicle

width including the outside rear

view mirrors.

Front distance guide line (red)

Indicates a distance approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the front end of the vehi-

cle.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.

Automatic display mode selection switch

→P. 321

336

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Using the vehicle width lines

The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines can be con-

firmed.

Example 1: When there is an obstacle in front of the vehicle

Operate the steering wheel so that the vehicle width line and

the obstacle do not overlap.

Example 2: When parking on the shoulder

Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle width

line to overlap the curb or other obstacles.

After confirming the distance to the shoulder of the road,

maneuvering the vehicle so that the vehicle width line and

the curb or other obstacle are parallel allows the vehicle to

be parked evenly.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

337

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Side views

●The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in P, D or N.

●When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, the displayed area changes (the area

on the screen that is not masked in black). (→P. 344)

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

338

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view

• Panoramic view & rear view:

The image looking down at the vehicle from above and the image from the

rear camera are displayed simultaneously and assist the driver to check the

safety of the area when parking.

• Wide rear view:

The image from the rear camera is displayed in a range of approximately

180° and assists the driver to check the safety of the area when backing up.

●Screen description

Guide line selection switch

→P. 334

Angle mode selection switch

Switches between the panoramic view & rear view and wide rear view display each

time the switch is selected.

Panoramic view & rear view

Rear view

Switches the screen to wide rear view display when you touch the display.

Wide rear view

Switches the screen to the panoramic & rear view display when the display is touched.

Panoramic view & rear view Wide rear view

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

339

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Switching modes

The display mode switches and the icon display changes each time the

guide line display selection switch is selected.

• Projected course line display mode:

Projected course lines that change according to steering wheel opera-

tions are displayed.

• Parking assist guide line display mode:

Inverted steering wheel operations (parking assist guide line) are dis-

played. Use this mode if you are used to how the vehicle handles (if you

can park without needing the course line display).

• Distance guide line display mode:

Only distance guide lines are displayed.

●Guide lines

The panoramic view & rear view screen is explained here as an example.

Selected mode Projected course

line display mode Parking assist guide

line display mode Distance guide line

display mode

Icon display

Projected course line display mode Parking assist guide line display

mode

340

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Front distance guide line (blue)

Indicates a distance approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Rear vehicle width extension guide lines

Indicate the estimated course of the vehicle when backing up straight.

• The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle width.

• In projected course line display mode, this item overlaps the projected course lines

when going straight.

Side projected course line (yellow)

Indicates the projected reverse course calculated by the angle of the steering wheel.

The projected reverse course line on the outside of the turn is displayed according to

the direction of the steering wheel.

Rear distance guide line

Indicates the estimated distance from the end of the rear bumper (at the center). (Red

line: approximately 1.5 ft. [0.5 m] away. Yellow line: approximately 3 ft. [1 m] away.)

In projected course line display mode, the rear distance guide line changes according

to steering wheel operations.

Projected reverse course (yellow)

Changes according to steering wheel operations and indicates the estimated course

of the vehicle.

Rear distance guide line (blue)

Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the end of the rear bumper (at

the center).

Parking assist guide line (blue)

Indicates the estimated tire course of the tightest possible turn in reverse.

Intuitive parking assist

When the intuitive parking assist is on, an icon will be displayed when an obstacle is

detected. (Refer to P. 287 for information about the intuitive parking assist.)

Vehicle center line (blue)

Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.

Distance guide line display mode

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

341

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Parking operation (using the estimated curse line)

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space

described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

Shift the shift lever to the R position.

Turn the steering wheel so that

the estimated course lines are

within the parking space, and

back up slowly.

Parking space

Estimated course lines

When the rear position of the

vehicle has entered the parking

space, turn the steering wheel so

that the vehicle width extension

guide lines are within the left and

right dividing lines of the parking

space.

Vehicle width extension guide

line

342

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Once the vehicle width extension guide lines and the parking space lines

are parallel, straighten the steering wheel and back up slowly until the vehi-

cle has completely entered the parking space.

Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

●Parking operation (using the parking assist guide line)

When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space

described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

Shift the shift lever to the R position.

Back up until the parking assist

guide line meets the edge of the

left-hand dividing line of the park-

ing space.

Parking assist guide line

Parking space dividing line

Turn the steering wheel all the way to the right, and back up slowly.

Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steering

wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the

parking space.

Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

343

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Panoramic view & rear view/wide rear view

The screen can be displayed when the shift lever is in R.

■Guide lines

If the back door is not closed, guide lines will not be displayed. If the guide lines do not

display even when the back door is closed, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus

dealer.

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

■When using panoramic view & rear view or wide rear view

●If the vehicle width extension guide lines and projected course lines are not aligned

with the steering wheel in the center position, drive straight on a road without as little

traffic and as few bends or curves as possible for approximately 5 minutes or more. If

the symptom is not resolved, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●Rear vehicle width extension guide lines are displayed wider than the actual vehicle

width. When backing up, always confirm the safety of your surroundings and the area

to the rear of the vehicle.

344

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Display when the outside rear view mirrors are retracted (side view and

side views)

When the outside rear view mirrors are retracted, one of the following

screens is displayed and assists the driver to confirm the safety of the area

around the vehicle, or park alongside and close to another object.

●Screen description

For information about other than the side view and side views display area, refer

to the page for the respective screen.

Front distance guide line (red)

Indicates a distance approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the front end of the vehicle.

Front tire contact line (blue)

Indicates the estimated front tire position on the image.

Vehicle width lines (blue)

Indicate the estimated vehicle width including the outside rear view mirrors.

Rear tire contact line (blue)

Indicates the estimated rear tire position on the image.

When the wide front view is dis-

played

When the rear view is displayed

When the side views is displayed

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

345

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Using the vehicle width lines

The relative distance of obstacles from the vehicle width lines can be con-

firmed.

• Approach the shoulder, but do not allow the vehicle width line to overlap

the curb or other obstacles.

• After confirming the distance to the shoulder, maneuvering the vehicle

so that the vehicle width line and the curb or other obstacle are parallel

allows the vehicle to be parked evenly.

WARNING

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

346

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Intuitive parking assist and RCTA cooperative display

When either the intuitive parking

assist (→P. 287) or Blind Spot Mon-

itor (→P. 363) is turned on, an icon

warns the driver when an obstacle is

detected.

■Intuitive parking assist cooperative display

While the intuitive parking assist is in use, an icon is displayed when an obstacle is

detected (→P. 287).

However, this function only informs the driver that an obstacle is close to the vehicle and

the detected obstacle is not displayed on the screen. Be sure to visually confirm the

safety of your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

347

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in an unexpected

accident. Also, when driving, make sure to directly confirm the safety of your sur-

roundings and the area to the rear of the vehicle.

When using the Multi-terrain Monitor

WARNING

■Conditions under which the Multi-terrain Monitor should not be used

Do not use the Multi-terrain Monitor in the following situations. The system may not

operate properly, resulting in an unexpected accident.

●When driving on an icy, snow-covered or otherwise slippery road surface

●When using tire chains or a spare tire

●When either front door or the back door is not completely closed

●When driving on an uneven road, such as a hill

●When tires or suspension parts other than those specified are equipped

When the tires are replaced, the position indicated by the guide lines displayed on the

screen may differ.

■Guide lines

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may differ from

actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers, cargo weight, road

grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the surrounding environment, etc. Always

drive the vehicle while confirming the safety of your surroundings.

348

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

NOTICE

■Panoramic view

●In the panoramic view, the system combines images taken from the front, back, left

and right side cameras into a single image. There are limits to the range and content

that can be displayed. Understand the characteristics of this system before using.

●Image clarity may decline at the four corners of the panoramic view. However, this is

not a malfunction, as these are the regions along the border of each camera image

where the images are combined.

●Depending on lighting conditions near each of the cameras, bright and dark patches

may appear on the panoramic view.

●The panoramic view display does not extend higher than the installation position and

image capture range of each camera.

●There are blind spots around the vehicle and there are regions that are not displayed

in the panoramic view.

●Three-dimensional objects displayed in wide front view or rear view may not be dis-

played in the panoramic view.

●People and other three-dimensional obstacles may appear differently when dis-

played in the panoramic view. (These differences include, among others, cases in

which displayed objects appear to have fallen over, disappear near image processing

areas, appear from image processing areas, or when the actual distance to an object

differs from the displayed position.)

●The panoramic view will not be properly displayed when either front door or the back

door is open.

●The vehicle icon displayed in the panoramic view is a computer generated image, and

properties such as the color, shape and size will differ from the actual vehicle. There-

fore, nearby three-dimensional objects may appear to be touching the vehicle, and

actual distances to three-dimensional objects may differ from those displayed.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

349

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Display range

●Panoramic view

Not displayed.

Not displayed. (Displayed in black around the vehicle icon.)

●Wide front view

Masking

Parts of the vehicle (such as the bumper or grille) are displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera

Object not detectable by camera

350

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Side views

The side of the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera

●Side view

The side of the vehicle is displayed on the screen.

Camera visibility range

Object detectable by camera

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

351

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Rear view

The corners of the bumper are not seen on the screen.

●Wide rear view

The corners of the bumper are not seen on the screen.

352

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Panoramic view display range

●In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays images acquired form the 4

cameras under the assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the

display may appear as follows.

• Three-dimensional objects may appear to have fallen over, and be long and thin or

bigger than they actually are

• Three-dimensional objects at a point higher than the surface of the road may appear

further away than they actually are, or may not appear

• Tall objects may appear to emerge from the image processing seams

●Inconsistencies in the brightness of images from each camera may occur depending on

lighting conditions.

●The displayed image may not be aligned when the tilt or height of the vehicle changed

due to the number of passengers, cargo weight or remaining quantity of gasoline.

●The displayed image may not be aligned when the vehicle is in other than “N” (normal)

height mode. (→P. 295)

●Images and guide lines may not be properly displayed when the doors are not com-

pletely closed.

●The relative distances between the vehicle icon and road surface or an obstacle dis-

played in the panoramic view may differ from the actual state.

●If an illuminated license plate is used, it may appear on the screen.

●The black area around the vehicle icon is an area that is not appear in the camera.

Check these areas directly.

■Wide front view display range

●Certain areas at the front of the vehicle have a different sense of distance, and are

masked in black so that they do not appear on the screen.

●There are limits to the range displayed on the screen. Objects at either corner of the

bumper or directly below the bumper are not displayed.

●The perceived distance in images displayed on the screen differs from the actual dis-

tance.

■Images displayed on the screen

Cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system use special lenses. The distance of the

image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance.

●The circled areas shown in the illustration may

be difficult to see, as these are points where

images are combined.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

353

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Multi-terrain Monitor cameras

●Camera positions

The cameras of the Multi-terrain Monitor system are installed as follows.

Side camera (left and right

sides)

Front camera

Rear camera

●Using the cameras

If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering

to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a

large quantity of water and wipe the camera lens with a soft and wet cloth.

NOTICE

■How to use the cameras

●Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Multi-terrain

Monitor from operating properly.

• Do not strike the camera area, or allow any objects to bump into it

If the camera or surrounding area has received a strong impact, the camera posi-

tion, installation angle, etc., may deviate. If the camera is accidentally subjected to

an impact, have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus dealer.

• Do not remove, disassemble or modify the camera or surrounding parts

Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. This also may result in a loss of

waterproof performance.

• If the camera lens is dirty, follow the above procedures to clean it

If the camera lens is damaged it cannot transmit a clear image.

Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, oil film remover, glass coating, etc. to con-

tact the camera cover

Doing so will negatively affect the camera cover (resin). If this happens, wipe it off

immediately.

• When the outside temperature is cold, do not cause any sudden changes in tem-

perature, such as by applying hot water

●When washing the vehicle, do not apply water with a high-pressure washer to the

camera or surrounding area. Doing so may cause the camera to receive a strong

impact, and the camera may not operate properly

354

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Differences between the panoramic view screen and the actual road

The distance guide lines, the combined panoramic view image, guide lines,

etc., indicate estimated distances on a flat road surface. In the following situa-

tions, actual distances and vehicle course will differ from the guide lines on the

screen.

●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply

The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the

actual distance. Therefore, obstacles on an upward slope appear further

away than they actually are. In the same way, the actual course of the vehi-

cle will differ from the course indicated by the guide lines.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

355

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●When the ground behind the vehicle slopes down sharply

The distance guide lines are displayed further away than the actual dis-

tance. Therefore, obstacles on a downward slope appear closer than the

actually are. In the same way, the actual course of the vehicle will differ from

the course indicated by the guide lines.

●When the vehicle is tilted

When the vehicle is tilted due to the number of passengers or weight of the

load, actual distances and vehicle course will differ.

Margin of error

356

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Differences between the panoramic view display and actual three-dimen-

sional objects

Be aware of the following points when three-dimensional objects higher than

the surface of the road (such as a vehicle bumper) are nearby.

●Panoramic view display

In the panoramic view, the system processes and displays images under the

assumption that the vehicle is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the position

of three-dimensional objects higher than the road surface (such as a vehi-

cle bumper) cannot be determined. Even if it seems that a collision will not

occur according to the screen, there may not actually be any extra space

between the vehicle and an obstacle higher than the road surface, resulting

in a collision. In these cases, confirm the safety of your surroundings

directly.

WARNING

■Intuitive parking assist pop-up display

When the intuitive parking assist pop-up display is red, park the vehicle and make sure

to confirm the safety of your surroundings.

Failure to do so may lead to an unexpected accident.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

357

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

●Projected course lines

Projected course lines are displayed under the assumption that the vehicle

is on a flat road surface. Therefore, the position of three-dimensional

objects higher than the road surface (such as a vehicle bumper) cannot be

determined. Even if it seems that an obstacle is outside of the projected

course lines and a collision will not occur according to the screen, an

obstacle may actually be in the vehicle course, resulting in a collision.

Projected course lines

Three-dimensional objects in high positions (such as walls with protrusions

or the loading areas of trucks) may not be displayed on the screen. Con-

firm the safety of your surroundings directly.

Protrusion of a wall

358

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Differences between the rear view or wide rear view and actual roads

The guide lines on the screen are intended for flat surfaces (such as the road).

Be aware of the following points when three-dimensional objects with protru-

sions (obstacles such as the cargo bed of a truck) are nearby.

●Projected course lines

Guide lines are displayed in reference to a level road surface and cannot

be used to determine the location of three-dimensional objects. Confirm

the safety of your surroundings directly. Even if it seems that the cargo bed

of a truck is outside the projected course lines and a collision will not occur

according to the screen, it may actually be in the vehicle course, resulting in

a collision.

Projected course lines

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

359

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Differences between the panoramic view, rear view and wide rear view and

actual roads

●Distance guide lines

Guide lines are displayed in reference to the road surface and cannot be

used to determine the distance of three-dimensional objects from the vehi-

cle. Confirm the safety of your surroundings directly. On the screen, it

appears that a truck is parking at point according to the distance guide

lines. However, in reality if you back up to point , you will hit the truck.

On the screen, it appears that is closest and is farthest away. How-

ever, in reality, the distance to and is same, and is farther than

and .

●Under vehicle terrain view

The tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines may dif-

fer from actual vehicle positions depending on the number of passengers,

weight of the load, road grade, road surface conditions, brightness of the

surrounding environment, etc. Always drive the vehicle while directly con-

firming the safety of your surroundings.

1 3

2 1

360

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Using under vehicle terrain view

●The images displayed were previously taken approximately 10 ft. (3 m) behind the cur-

rent vehicle position.

Therefore, actual conditions may differ from those shown on the screen in the following

situations.

• An obstacle has appeared after the image was taken

• Loose material like sand or snow has crumbled or shifted

• An obstacle has moved

• There is a puddle, tract of mud, etc., within the display range

• The vehicle slips

●In the following situations, actual tire positions and vehicle position may differ from

those indicated by the tire position indicator lines and vehicle position indicator lines.

• Tires have been replaced

• Optional equipment has been installed

WARNING

■Guide lines

The displayed guide lines are composed with the image that was previously taken and

may differ from the actual state.

Always drive the vehicle while confirming your surroundings.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

361

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■If you notice any symptoms

If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the

solution, and re-check.

If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by

your Lexus dealer.

Likely cause Solution

The image is difficult to see

• The vehicle is in a dark area

• The temperature around the lens is

either high or low

• The outside temperature is low

• There are water droplets on the cam-

era

• It is raining or humid

• Foreign matter (mud etc.) is adhering to

the camera

• Sunlight or headlights are shining

directly into the camera

•The vehicle is under fluorescent lights,

sodium lights, mercury lights, etc.

Drive while visually checking the vehicle’s

surroundings. (Use the Multi-terrain

Monitor again once conditions have been

improved.)

The procedure for adjusting the picture

quality of the Multi-terrain Monitor is

same as the procedure for adjusting the

navigation screen. Refer to the

“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such as water

droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to

the camera

Flush the camera with a large quantity of

water and wipe the camera lens with a

soft and wet cloth.

The image is out of alignment

The camera or surrounding area has

received a strong impact Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

The guide lines are very far out of alignment

The camera position is out of alignment Have the vehicle inspected at your Lexus

dealer.

• The vehicle is tilted (there is a heavy

load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low

due to a tire puncture, etc.)

• The vehicle is used on an incline

If this happens due to these causes, it

does not indicate a malfunction.

Drive while visually checking the vehicle’s

surroundings.

362

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The projected course lines move even though the steering wheel is straight (vehi-

cle width extension guide lines and projected course lines are not aligned)

There is a malfunction in the signals being

output by the steering sensor Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

Guide lines are not displayed

The back door is open

Close the back door.

If this does not resolve the symptom, have

the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

“!” is displayed

The battery is disconnected and recon-

nected

Turn the steering wheel fully to right and

left.

If this does not resolve the symptom, have

the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

There is a malfunction in the Multi-terrain

Monitor Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

NOTICE

■How to use the camera

●The Multi-terrain Monitor system may not operate properly in the following cases.

• If the front or the rear of the vehicle or the outside rear view mirror has been hit,

the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed.

• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or

modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

• When cleaning the camera lens, flush the camera with a large quantity of water

and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens may cause

the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image.

• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to adhere to

the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

• If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehi-

cle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally.

• When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or

camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning.

• When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium light or mercury light

etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

• The camera can be damaged by flying rocks and other debris.

●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunction. If this

happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Likely cause Solution

363

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)

The Blind Spot Monitor is a system that has 2 functions:

●The BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) function

Assists the driver in making a decision when changing lanes

●RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) function

Assists the driver when backing up

These functions use same sensors.

Summary of the Blind Spot Monitor

364

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Multi-information display

The BSM function/RCTA function can be turned on/off. (→P. 365)

The RCTA function is available when the BSM function is on.

Outside rear view mirror indicators

BSM function:

When a vehicle is detected in a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or

approaching rapidly from behind into a blind spot, the outside rear view mirror indica-

tor on the detected side will illuminate. If the turn signal lever is operated toward the

detected side, the outside rear view mirror indicator will flash.

RCTA function:

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is

detected, both outside rear view mirror indicators will flash.

“BSM” indicator/“RCTA” indicator

When the BSM function/RCTA function is turned on, the indicator illuminates

Monitor screen display (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, the

RCTA icon (→P. 372) for the detected side will be displayed on the monitor screen.

This illustration shows an example of a vehicle approaching from the left at the rear of

the vehicle.

RCTA buzzer (RCTA function only)

If a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is detected, a

buzzer will sound. The buzzer also sounds for approximately 1 second immediately

after the BSM function is operated to turn the system on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

365

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Press or of the meter control switches, select .

Press or of the meter control switches, select “BSM”, and then press

Press or of the meter control switches, select “BSM” or “RCTA”, and

then press .

■Outside rear view mirror indicator visibility

In strong sunlight, the outside rear view mirror indicator may be difficult to see.

■Hearing RCTA buzzer

The RCTA buzzer may be difficult to hear over loud noises, such as if the audio system

volume is high.

■When “Blind Spot Monitor Unavailable” is shown on the multi-information display

Water, snow, mud, etc., may be built up in the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper. (→P. 366)

Removing the water, snow, mud, etc., from the vicinity of the sensor area of bumper should

return it to normal.

Also, the sensor may not function normally when used in extremely hot or cold weather.

■When “Blind Spot Monitor System Malfunction” is shown on the multi-information dis-

play

There may be a sensor malfunction or voltage abnormality. Have the vehicle inspected at

your Lexus dealer.

■Certification for the Blind Spot Monitor

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam and Puerto Rico

For vehicles sold in Canada

Turning the BSM function/RCTA function on/off

366

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

■Handling the radar sensor

One Blind Spot Monitor sensor is installed inside the left and right side of the vehicle

rear bumper respectively. Observe the following to ensure the Blind Spot Monitor can

function correctly.

●Do not subject a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear bumper to a strong

impact.

If a sensor is moved even slightly off position, the system may malfunction and vehi-

cles may not be detected correctly.

In the following situations, have your vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

• A sensor or its surrounding area is subject to a strong impact.

• If the surrounding area of a sensor is scratched or dented, or part of it has become

disconnected.

●Do not disassemble the sensor.

●Do not attach stickers to the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.

●Do not modify the sensor or surrounding area on the rear bumper.

●Do not paint the rear bumper any color other than an official Lexus color.

●Keep the sensors and the surrounding areas

on the rear bumper clean at all times.

If a sensor or its surrounding area on the rear

bumper is dirty or covered with snow, the

Blind Spot Monitor may not operate and a

warning message (→P. 365) will be dis-

played. In this situation, clear off the dirt or

snow and drive the vehicle with the operation

conditions of the BSM function (→P. 369)

satisfied for approximately 10 minutes. If the

warning message does not disappear, have

the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

367

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The BSM function uses radar sensors to detect the following vehicles traveling in

adjacent lanes and advises the driver of the presence of such vehicles via the

indicators on the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles that are traveling in areas that are not visible using the outside rear

view mirrors (the blind spots)

Vehicles that are approaching rapidly from behind in areas that are not visible

using the outside rear view mirrors (the blind spots)

BSM function

368

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The range of each detection area is:

Approximately 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) to 11.5 ft. (3.5 m) from either side of the vehicle*

*: The area between the side of the vehicle and 1.6 ft. (0.5 m) from the side of the vehicle

cannot be detected.

Approximately 3.3 ft. (1 m) forward of the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) from the rear bumper

Approximately 9.8 ft. (3 m) to 197 ft. (60 m) from the rear bumper*

*: The greater the difference in speed between your vehicle and the detected vehicle is,

the farther away the vehicle will be detected, causing the outside rear view mirror

indicator to illuminate or flash.

BSM function detection areas

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings.

The BSM function is a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehicle is in

a blind spot of the outside rear view mirrors or is approaching rapidly from behind into

a blind spot. Do not overly rely on the BSM function. As the function cannot judge if it is

safe to change lanes, over reliance could lead to an accident resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

As the system may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own

visual confirmation of safety is necessary.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

369

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■The BSM function is operational when

The BSM function is operational when all of the following conditions are met:

●The BSM function is on.

●The shift lever is in a position other than R.

●The vehicle speed is greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h).

■The BSM function will detect a vehicle when

The BSM function will detect a vehicle present in the detection area in the following situ-

ations:

●A vehicle in an adjacent lane overtakes your vehicle.

●Another vehicle enters the detection area when it changes lanes.

■Conditions under which the BSM function will not detect a vehicle

The BSM function is not designed to detect the following types of vehicles and/or

objects:

●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*

●Vehicles traveling in the opposite direction

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*

●Following vehicles that are in the same lane*

●Vehicles traveling 2 lanes away from your vehicle*

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

370

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Conditions under which the BSM function may not function correctly

●The BSM function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-

ing area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on

the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,

such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short

• When there is a significant difference in speed between your vehicle and the vehicle

that enters the detection area

• When the difference in speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is changing

• When a vehicle enters a detection area traveling at about the same speed as your

vehicle

• As your vehicle starts from a stop, a vehicle remains in the detection area

• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,

etc.

• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When vehicle lanes are wide, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and the vehicle

in an adjacent lane is far away from your vehicle

• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle

• When there is a significant difference in height between your vehicle and the vehicle

that enters the detection area

• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on

●Instances of the BSM function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle and/or object may

increase in the following situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-

ing area

• When the distance between your vehicle and a guardrail, wall, etc. that enters the

detection area is short

• When driving up and down consecutive steep inclines, such as hills, dips in the road,

etc.

• When vehicle lanes are narrow, or when driving on the edge of a lane, and a vehicle

traveling in a lane other than the adjacent lanes enters the detection area

• When driving on roads with sharp bends, consecutive curves, or uneven surfaces

• When the tires are slipping or spinning

• When the distance between your vehicle and a following vehicle is short

• When a bicycle carrier or other accessory is installed to the rear of the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

371

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The RCTA function uses radar sensors to detect vehicles approaching from the

right or left at the rear of the vehicle and alerts the driver of the presence of such

vehicles by flashing the outside rear view mirror indicators and sounding a

buzzer.

Approaching vehicles

Detection areas of approaching vehicles

RCTA function

372

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■RCTA icon display

When a vehicle approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle is

detected, the following will be displayed on the monitor screen

Display Content

A vehicle is approaching from the left at the rear of the vehicle

A vehicle is approaching from the right at the rear of the vehicle

Vehicles are approaching from both sides of the vehicle

The RCTA function is malfunctioning (→P. 365)

WARNING

■Cautions regarding the use of the function

The driver is solely responsible for safe driving. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings.

The RCTA function is only a supplementary function which alerts the driver that a vehi-

cle is approaching from the right or left at the rear of the vehicle. As the RCTA function

may not function correctly under certain conditions, the driver’s own visual confirma-

tion of safety is necessary. Over reliance on this function may lead to an accident

resulting death or serious injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

373

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

The areas that vehicles can be detected in are outlined below.

The buzzer can alert the driver of faster vehicles approaching from farther away.

Example:

■The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is operational when

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function operates when all of the following conditions are

met:

●The RCTA function is on.

●The shift lever is in R.

●The vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

●The approaching vehicle speed is between approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and 18 mph

(28 km/h).

RCTA function detection areas

Approaching vehicle Speed Approximate

alert distance

Fast 18 mph (28 km/h) 65 ft. (20 m)

Slow 5 mph (8 km/h) 18 ft. (5.5 m)

374

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

■Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function will not detect a vehicle

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function is not designed to detect the following types of

vehicles and/or objects:

●Vehicles approaching from directly behind

●Vehicles backing up in a parking space next to your vehicle

●Guardrails, walls, signs, parked vehicles and similar stationary objects*

●Small motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.*

●Vehicles moving away from your vehicle

●Vehicles approaching from the parking spaces next to your vehicle*

*: Depending on the conditions, detection of a vehicle and/or object may occur.

●Vehicles that the sensors cannot detect due to

obstructions

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

375

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Conditions under which the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not function cor-

rectly

●The Rear Cross Traffic Alert function may not detect vehicles correctly in the following

situations:

• When the sensor is misaligned due to a strong impact to the sensor or its surround-

ing area

• When mud, snow, ice, a sticker, etc. is covering the sensor or surrounding area on

the rear bumper

• When driving on a road surface that is wet with standing water during bad weather,

such as heavy rain, snow, or fog

• When multiple vehicles are approaching with only a small gap between each vehicle

• When a vehicle is approaching at high speed

• Immediately after the BSM function is turned on

• Immediately after the engine is started with the BSM function on

• When backing up on a slope with a sharp

change in grade

• When backing out of a shallow angle park-

ing spot

• When the sensors cannot detect a vehicle

due to obstructions

376

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

●Instances of the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function unnecessarily detecting a vehicle

and/or object may increase in the following situations:

• When a vehicle passes by the side of your vehicle

• When the distance between your vehicle and metal objects, such as a guardrail,

wall, sign, or parked vehicle, which may reflect electrical waves toward the rear of

the vehicle, is short

You can change the BSM function/RCTA function settings.

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, and then select “Setup” on

the screen.

Select “Vehicle”, and then select “Blind Spot Monitor Settings” on the screen.

Select the desired setting. (→P. 591)

• When the parking space faces a street and

vehicles are being driven on the street

Setting up BSM function/RCTA function

377

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

Driving assist systems

◆Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are

applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-road conditions (such as

rough roads, sand and mud)

◆Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed

when the system detects a panic stop situation

◆VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery

road surfaces

◆Active TRAC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning when starting

the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads, or in off-road conditions

◆Hill-start assist control

Helps to reduce the backward movement of the vehicle when starting on an incline or

slippery slope

◆AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)

By independently controlling the damping force of the shock absorbers for each of

the 4 wheels according to the road and driving conditions, this system helps riding

comfort with superior steering stability, and helps good vehicle posture. When

SPORT S+ mode is selected by the driving mode select switch, the damping force is

suitable for sporty driving. (→P. 284)

◆VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering)

Helps to adjust the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and

steering wheel movement.

◆Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake pressure for indi-

vidual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer sway is detected.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if VSC turned off

or experiences a malfunction.

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems oper-

ate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however,

that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heav-

ily when operating the vehicle.

378

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

The slip indicator light flashes to indi-

cate that the VSC/Trailer Sway Con-

trol/Active TRAC/hill-start assist

control systems have been engaged.

The stop lights and high mounted stop-

light turn on when the hill-start assist

control system or Trailer Sway Control is

operating.

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, Active TRAC system reduce

power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to

enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

Quickly push and release the button to

turn off Active TRAC.

The TRAC OFF indicator will come on.

Push the button again to turn the system

back on.

■Turning off Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off

Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

The VSC OFF indicator light and TRAC OFF indicator will come on.*

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

*: On vehicles with pre-collision system, pre-collision brake assist and pre-collision brak-

ing will also be disabled. The PCS warning light will come on and the message will be

shown on the multi-information display. (→P. 249)

■Automatic reactivation of Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Turning the engine switch off after turning off the Active TRAC and VSC systems will

automatically re-enable them.

When the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/Active TRAC/hill-start assist

control systems are operating

Disabling the Active TRAC system

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

379

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

■Automatic Active TRAC reactivation

If only the Active TRAC system is turned off, the Active TRAC system will turn on when

vehicle speed increases.

■Automatic Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control reactivation

If the Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are turned off, the systems will not

turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

■If the brake system overheats

The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, and the TRAC OFF

indicator will flash, and Active TRAC and hill-start assist control will be temporarily inop-

erable. In this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake sys-

tem to cool down sufficiently until the TRAC OFF indicator goes off. (There is no

problem with continuing normal driving.)

■Sounds and vibrations caused by the Multi Terrain ABS, brake assist, Active TRAC,

VSC, Trailer Sway Control, hill-start assist control and VGRS

●A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just

after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has

occurred in any of these systems.

●Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating.

None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is activated.

■Hill-start assist control is operational when

●The shift lever is in D or S.

●The brake pedal is not depressed.

■VGRS is disabled in the following situations

●During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while driving at

lower speeds.

●After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).

●If you disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, the center position of the

steering wheel could be slightly and temporary changed. To initialize the VGRS, drive

for a short while.

380

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-5. Using the driving support systems

WARNING

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause death or seri-

ous injury:

■The Multi Terrain ABS does not operate effectively when

●The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as excessively

worn tires on a snow covered road).

●The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on a wet or slick road.

■Stopping distance when the Multi Terrain ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-

mal conditions

The Multi Terrain ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance.

Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, especially in the follow-

ing situations.

●When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

●When driving with tire chains

●When driving over bumps in the road

●When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads

■Active TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road

surfaces, even if the Active TRAC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

■If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively

Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control may not

operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.

■When Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these

are systems to help to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off Active

TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control unless necessary.

■When the VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.

Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator

light flashes.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

381

4-5. Using the driving support systems

Driving

WARNING

■Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capac-

ity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pressure level.

The Multi Terrain ABS, Active TRAC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control will not function

correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

■Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving

assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

■Trailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situations.

Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle, trailer, road surface,

and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control system may not be effective. Refer to

your trailer owner’s manual for information on how to tow your trailer properly.

■If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

●Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

●Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to reduce

speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle and trailer

should stabilize. (→P. 201)

382

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

Winter driving tips

●Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

•Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

●Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

●Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for

the rear tires.*

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the

tires.

*: Tire chains cannot be mounted on vehicles with 21-inch tires

Perform the following according to the driving conditions:

●Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour

warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water imme-

diately to prevent it from freezing.

●To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any

snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

●Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on

the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

●Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the

vehicle.

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehi-

cle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevail-

ing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations

Before driving the vehicle

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

383

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle

ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

●Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P without setting the parking

brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If

the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, make sure to block the

wheels.

Failure to do so may be dangerous because it may cause the vehicle to move

unexpectedly, possibly leading to an accident.

●If the vehicle is parked without setting the parking brake, confirm that the shift

lever cannot be moved out of P*.

When the parking brake is in automatic mode, release the parking brake after shifting

the shift lever to P. (→P. 218)

*: The shift lever will be locked if it is attempted to be shifted from P to any other position

without depressing the brake pedal. If the shift lever can be shifted from P, there may

be a problem with the shift lock system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer immediately.

Vehicles with 20-inch tires

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

(0.20 in. [5 mm] in diameter)

Cross chain

(0.25 in. [6.3 mm] in diameter)

Vehicles with 21-inch tires

Tire chains cannot be mounted.

Snow tires should be used instead.

When driving the vehicle

When parking the vehicle

Selecting tire chains

384

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary depending on location and type

of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains.

■Tire chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains:

●Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

●Install tire chains on the rear tires. Do not install tire chains on the front tires.

●Install tire chains on rear tires as tightly as possible. Retighten chains after driving 1/4 -

1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

●Install tire chains following the instructions provided with the tire chains.

Regulations on the use of tire chains

WARNING

■Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

●Use tires of the specified size.

●Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.

●Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires

being used.

●Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

■Driving with tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may

cause death or serious injury.

●Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30

mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

●Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

●Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting operations

that cause sudden engine braking.

●Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is main-

tained.

●Do not use LDA (Lane Departure Alert) system. (if equipped)

■When installing tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)

Turn off the vehicle height control.

The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may

catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident. (→P. 298)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

385

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing snow tires

Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Lexus dealers or legitimate tire

retailers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the

tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

■Fitting tire chains (vehicles with 20-inch tires)

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire

chains are fitted.

386

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

Off-road precautions

●Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity than ordinary

passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes this type of vehicle to be

more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover

rate than other types of vehicles.

●An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road

allowing you to anticipate problems.

●It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars

any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily

under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp turns at excessive speeds may

cause the vehicle to rollover.

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground clear-

ance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road applications.

Off-road vehicle features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

387

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

WARNING

■Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury

or damage to your vehicle:

●In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person

wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers should always fasten

their seat belts.

●Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury.

●Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make the center of the vehicle gravity

higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking or abrupt

maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover due to failure

to operate this vehicle correctly.

●Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher center of

gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary passenger car.

Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

●Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or straight down is

preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or backward.

388

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

When driving your vehicle off-road, please observe the following precautions to

ensure your driving enjoyment and to help prevent the closure of areas to off-

road vehicles:

●Drive your vehicle only in areas where off-road vehicles are permitted to

travel.

●Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before entering private

property.

●Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers and signs that

restrict travel.

●Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques

should be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.

■Additional information for off-road driving

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your vehicle off-road, consult the

following organizations:

●State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments

●State Motor Vehicle Bureau

●Recreational Vehicle Clubs

●U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management

Off-road driving

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

389

4-6. Driving tips

Driving

WARNING

■Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death, serious injury

or damage to your vehicle:

●Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving in danger-

ous places.

●Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump could jerk

the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

●Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in sand, mud,

water or snow.

●After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that there is no

grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the underbody.

Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materi-

als trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown or fire could occur.

●When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive speeds, jump,

make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You are also risking expensive damage to your vehi-

cle’s suspension and chassis.

390

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

4-6. Driving tips

NOTICE

■To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the engine or other

components does not occur.

●Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

●Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift quality,

locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.

●Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and premature fail-

ure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and transfer case, reducing the

gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

■When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check the depth of

the water and the bottom of the riverbed for firmness. Drive slowly and avoid deep

water.

■Inspection after off-road driving

●Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake discs may

affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system components.

●Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driving that has

taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled maintenance

information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

391

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Interior features

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch/12.3-inch

display..........................................392

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge..... 398

5-3. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Front automatic air

conditioning system ...............399

Rear air conditioning

system...........................................410

Heated steering wheel/seat

heaters/seat ventilators.........413

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list........................... 417

• Interior lights ...........................418

• Personal lights........................419

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features ............420

• Glove box.................................421

• Console box.............................421

• Overhead console..............422

• Cup holders...........................423

• Bottle holders........................424

• Card holder............................424

• Auxiliary boxes.....................425

Luggage compartment

features ....................................... 427

5-6. Using the other interior

features

Other interior features............430

• Cool box..................................430

• Sun visors ................................. 431

• Vanity mirrors ........................ 431

• Clock ........................................432

• Power outlets.........................433

• Wireless charger .................435

• Armrest....................................442

• Rear door sunshades .........443

• Coat hooks.............................443

• Assist grips..............................444

Garage door opener ...............445

LEXUS Enform Safety

Connect......................................452

392

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Remote Touch/12.3-inch display

“MAP” button

Press this button to display the vehicle’s current position.

“∧•∨” button

Press this button to change map scale and scroll through lists.

Back button

Press this button to display the previous screen.

“MENU” button

Press this button to display the “Menu” screen.

Remote Touch knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function, letter and screen button.

Press the knob to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.

“ENTER” button

Press this button to enter the selected function, letter or screen button.

The Remote Touch can be used to operate the Remote Touch screens.

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should refer to the

“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Remote Touch operation

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

393

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Interior features

Select: Move the Remote Touch

knob in the desired direction.

Enter: Press the Remote Touch knob

or “ENTER” button.

■Screen display during low temperatures

When the ambient temperature is extremely low, screen response may be delayed even

if the Remote Touch is operated.

Remote Touch operation

WARNING

■When using the Remote Touch

●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to become caught in the Remote Touch as this

may cause an injury.

●Be careful when selecting the Remote Touch in extreme temperatures as it may

become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the Remote Touch

●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit

cigarettes as doing so may cause it to change color, emit a strange odor or stop func-

tioning.

●Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as the knob

may bend or break off.

●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or other such items to become caught in the

Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop functioning.

●Items of clothing may rip if they become caught on the Remote Touch knob.

●If your hand or any object is on the Remote Touch knob when the engine switch is in

ACCESSORY mode, the Remote Touch knob may not operate properly.

394 5-1. Remote Touch screen

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the “Menu” screen.

The display may differ depending on the type of the system.

When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will be displayed on

the main display. (→P. 395)

“Menu” screen

Switch Function

Select to display the “Destination” screen.*

Select to display the radio control screen.*

Select to display the media control screen.*

Select to display the hands-free operation screen.*

Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.*

Select to display the “Information” screen.*

Select to display the air conditioning control screen. (→P. 399)

Select to display the “Setup” screen.*

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

395

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Interior features

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■Full screen display

The following functions can be displayed full screen:

●Initial screen

●“Menu” screen (→P. 394)

●Map screen*

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

“Display” Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the

screen off, etc.*

12.3-inch display operation

Switch Function

396 5-1. Remote Touch screen

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Split-screen display

Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For

example, air conditioning system or audio screens can be displayed and oper-

ated while the fuel consumption information screen is being displayed. The

large screen on the left of the display is called the main display, and the small

screen to the right is called the side display.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

397

5-1. Remote Touch screen

Interior features

■Main Display

For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the

respective section and “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■Side Display

Basic screens

To change the screen displayed on the side display, use the screen buttons on

the right side of the display.

Navigation system*

Audio*

Phone*

Vehicle information (→P. 105)

Air conditioning system

(→P. 399)

Interruption screens

Each of the following screens is displayed automatically in accordance with

conditions.

• Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)

•Phone

• Destination Assist

•Driving mode (→P. 284)

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

Split-screen display operation

398

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-2. Lexus Climate Concierge

Lexus Climate Concierge

“CLIMATE CONCIERGE” switch

When the switch is pressed, the indica-

tor above the switch illuminates and all

of the following systems operate in auto-

matic mode.

If any of the system is operated manually,

the indicator turns off. However, all

other functions continue to operate in

automatic mode.

■Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 399, 410)

The temperature can be adjusted individually for the driver seat, passenger seat, and

rear seats.

When a passenger is detected in the second seat, the rear air conditioning operates

in automatic mode.

■Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped) (→P. 413)

Heating or ventilation is automatically selected according to the set temperature of

the air conditioning system, the outside temperature, etc.

The seat heaters and ventilators of the front passenger seat and second outboard

seats operate in automatic mode if passengers are detected.

■Heated steering wheel (if equipped) (→P. 413)

Heated steering wheel operates automatically according to the outside temperature

and cabin temperature.

■Front air conditioning system operation

To improve air conditioning performance in the front seat area, the air outlets on the rear

of the console box may close when there is no passenger in the second seat.

■Rear air conditioning system operation

The rear air conditioning system may stop automatically when there is no passenger in

the second seat.

■Seat heater/ventilator operation

When automatic mode is selected using the seat heater/ventilator switch, passenger

detection is not performed.

The seat heaters, seat ventilators and heated steering wheel are each auto-

matically controlled according to the set temperature of the air conditioning

system, the outside and cabin temperature, etc. Lexus Climate Concierge

allows a comfortable condition to be maintained without adjusting each sys-

tem.

399

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

Front automatic air conditioning system

■Adjusting the temperature setting

Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-

perature.

■Adjusting the fan speed setting

Press to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan

speed.

Press to turn the fan off.

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

Select the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select to display

the air conditioning control screen. (→P. 394)

The air conditioning system can be displayed and operated on the side display.

(→P. 396)

Control panel

400 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Change the airflow mode

To change the air outlets, press .

The air outlets used are switched

each time the button is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the wind-

shield defogger operates

■Other functions

●Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes (→P. 405)

●Defogging the windshield (→P. 405)

●Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors (→P. 405)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

401

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■Main display

Left-hand front seat side temperature control

Left-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates

Fan speed control

Right-hand front seat side air outlet selector

Option control screen

Right-hand front seat side temperature control

Rear air conditioning operation screen

Eco mode

Adjust the temperature for driver, passenger and rear seats separately

(“4-ZONE” mode)

Cooling and dehumidification function on/off

Automatic mode

Control screen

402 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Changing the air flow mode

To adjust settings, select the screen button.

⎯ Air flows to the upper body.

⎯ Air flows to the upper body and feet.

⎯ Air flows to the feet.

⎯ Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

■Side display

Select the left-hand front seat

side air flow mode

Adjust the left-hand side tem-

perature setting

Adjust the fan speed setting

Select the right-hand front seat

side air flow mode

Adjust the right-hand side tem-

perature setting

Adjust the temperature for driver

and passenger seats separately

(“4-ZONE” mode)

Select to set cooling and dehumidification function on/off

Select to set auto mode on

■Option control screen

Select on the main display to display the option control screen. The func-

tions can be switched on and off.

Prevent ice from building up on

the windshield and wiper blades

(→P. 405)

Micro dust and pollen filter

(→P. 405)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

403

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■Using the automatic mode

Press or select on the control screen.

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed

are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Press to switch to automatic air intake mode.

The air conditioning system automatically switches between outside air

and recirculated air modes.

Press or select to increase the temperature and press

or select to decrease the temperature.

The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats can be set separately.

To stop the operation, press .

■Automatic mode indicator

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode

indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that

operated is maintained.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultaneous

modes each time on the control screen is selected.

Individual mode (the indicator is on.): The temperature for the driver’s, front pas-

senger’s and rear seats (→P. 410) can be adjusted separately. Operating the

passenger’s side or rear temperature control will enter individual mode.

In the simultaneous mode, only (increase) or (decrease) on the

driver’s side can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

Air conditioning controls

Adjusting the temperature for driver and passenger seats separately

(“4-ZONE” mode)

404 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Using the automatic mode

Select on the main display.

Select .

Select to increase the tem-

perature and to decrease the

temperature.

■Adjusting the temperature setting

Select on the main display.

Select to increase the tem-

perature and to decrease the

temperature.

Operating the switch will enter indi-

vidual mode.

Left-hand rear seat

Right-hand rear seat

■Adjusting the fan speed setting

Select on the main display.

Select to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan speed.

Select to turn the fan off.

Changing the rear seat settings

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

405

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press on the control panel.

The mode switches among (recirculated air mode), “AUTO” and

(outside air mode) each time is pressed.

When the system is switched to automatic mode, it operates automatically.

■Defogging the windshield

Defoggers are used to defog the windshield and front side windows.

Press on the control panel.

Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated

air mode is used. (It may switch automatically.)

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and tempera-

ture up.

To return to the previous mode, press again when the windshield is

defogged.

■Defogging the rear window and outside rear view mirrors

Defoggers are used to defog the rear window and to remove raindrops, dew

and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press on the control panel.

Press again to turn the defogger off.

■Micro dust and pollen filter

Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Select on the option control screen.

In order to prevent the windshield from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the

dehumidification function may operate.

The pollens are filtered out even if the micro dust and pollen filter is turned off.

■Windshield wiper de-icer

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the windshield and

wiper blades.

Select on the option control screen.

When the windshield wiper de-icer is on, the indicator turns on.

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after a period of time.

Other functions

406 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume

changes according to the selected

air flow mode.

■Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

Air outlets

Front side Front center

Rear

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

407

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■Using automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambi-

ent conditions.

Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow immediately

after the is pressed or on the control screen is selected.

■Operation of the air conditioning system in Eco drive mode

●In the Eco drive mode, the air conditioning system is controlled as follows to prioritize

fuel efficiency

• Engine speed and compressor operation controlled to restrict heating/cooling

capacity

• Fan speed restricted when automatic mode is selected

●To improve air conditioning performance, perform the following operations

• Adjust the fan speed

• Turn off Eco mode

■Using the voice command system

Air conditioning system can be operated using voice commands. For details, refer to the

“NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

■Fogging up of the windows

●The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high. Selecting

will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the windshield effectively.

●If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

●The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used.

■Outside/recirculated air mode

●When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recircu-

lated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing out-

side air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the

recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

●Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the tempera-

ture setting or the inside temperature.

■When the outside temperature exceeds 75°F (24°C) and the air conditioning system

is on

●In order to reduce the air conditioning power consumption, the air conditioning system

may switch to recirculated air mode automatically.

This may also reduce fuel consumption.

●Recirculated air mode is selected as a default mode when the engine switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

●It is possible to switch to outside air mode at any time by pressing .

■Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automati-

cally switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

When the dehumidification function is off, and the fan is operating, turning automatic

mode on will activate the dehumidification function.

408 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■When the outside temperature is low

The dehumidification function may not operate even when is selected.

■Micro dust and pollen filter

●In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is cold, the fol-

lowing may occur.

• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.

• The air conditioning system operates automatically.

• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

●In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

■The rear window defogger, outside rear view mirror defogger and windshield wiper de-

icer can be operated when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.

■Ventilation and air conditioning odors

●To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode.

●During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter into and accu-

mulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the

vents.

●To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior

to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time immediately

after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

■While the cool box is on (if equipped)

The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.

■Air conditioning filter

→P. 501

■Customization

Settings (e.g. Exhaust gas sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

WARNING

■To prevent the windshield from fogging up

●Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The differ-

ence between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause

the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

■To prevent burns

●Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces when the outside rear view mirror defog-

gers are on.

●Do not touch the glass at lower part of the windshield or to the side of the front pillars

when the windshield wiper de-icer is on.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

409

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is

not running.

410

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear air conditioning system

■Adjusting the temperature setting

Press to increase the temperature and to decrease the tem-

perature.

■Adjusting the fan speed setting

Press to increase the fan speed and to decrease the fan speed.

Press to turn the fan off.

■Changing the air flow mode

Press .

The air flow mode switches each time the button is pressed.

Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

The rear air conditioning operation switches are on the second seat armrest.

(→P. 442)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

411

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

■Using the automatic mode

Press the .

Adjust the temperature setting.

To stop the operation, press the .

■If the system is operated manually in automatic mode

If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the automatic mode

indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for functions other than that

operated are maintained.

■Location of air outlets

The air outlets and air volume

changes according to the selected

air flow mode.

■Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right,

up or down.

Turn the knob fully to the back of

the vehicle to close the vent.

Air conditioning controls

Air outlets

412 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

NOTICE

■To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is

not running.

413

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

Heated steering wheel∗/seat heaters/seat

ventilators∗

∗: If equipped

Heated steering wheel and seat heaters heat the side grips of the steering

wheel and seats. Seat ventilators maintain good airflow by blowing air from

the seats.

WARNING

●Care should be taken to prevent injury if anyone in the following categories comes in

contact with the steering wheel and seats when the heater is on:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically challenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold

remedies, etc.)

●Observe the following precautions to prevent the minor burns or overheating:

• Do not cover the seat with a blanket or cushion when using the seat heater.

• Do not use seat heater more than necessary.

NOTICE

●Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

●To prevent battery discharge, do not use the functions when the engine is off.

414 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Automatic operation

Operates automatically according to

the outside and cabin temperature

when “CLIMATE CONCIERGE”

switch is on. (→P. 398) Automatic

operation can be turned off using the

switch.

The indicator light comes on when the

heated steering wheel is operating.

Manual operation

Turns the heated steering wheel on/off

The indicator light comes on when the heated steering wheel is operating.

■The heated steering wheel can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Timer function

Automatic operation: Operates for a maximum of 30 minutes.

(Turns off according to outside and cabin temperature.)

Manual operation: Turns off after approximately 30 minutes.

■If the indicator light flashes

Press the switch to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the switch again. If

the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occurring. Turn the heated steering

wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■Customization

The automatic turning on/off of the heated steering wheel can be customized. (Custom-

izable features →P. 580)

Heated steering wheel (if equipped)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

415

5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

Seat heater switches

The indicator light (yellow) on the switch comes on when the seat heater is operating.

Seat ventilator switches (if equipped)

The indicator light (green) on the switch comes on when the seat ventilator is operat-

ing.

Level indicator lights

The seat heater temperature level or the seat ventilator fan speed level (if equipped) is

displayed.

“AUTO” indicator lights

Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)

Front seats Second outboard seats

416 5-3. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Modes and indicators

The mode can be changed by pressing the switch.

*: When automatic mode is selected, the level automatically changes depending on the

air conditioning settings.

■The seat heaters/seat ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

■Replacing the air filters

Filters are installed in the seat ventilators. For replacement of the filters, contact your

Lexus dealer.

■Customization

The automatic mode settings for the seat heaters and ventilators can be changed.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

Mode “AUTO” indicator light Level indicator lights

Off Off Off

Automatic* On 3 to 1, or off

Hi Off 3

Mid Off 2

Lo Off 1

417

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior features

Interior lights list

Rear interior lights (→P. 418)

Rear personal lights (→P. 419)

Inside door handle light

Front interior lights (→P. 418)

Front personal lights (→P. 419)

Shift lever light (when the engine

switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode)

Footwell lights

Scuff lights (if equipped)

Engine switch light

Door courtesy light

Luggage compartment light (if

equipped)

Outer foot lights

Running board lights

Door trim lights

418

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-4. Using the interior lights

Front

On/off (touch the light)

Door position on/off

Rear

On/door position on

Interior lights

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

419

5-4. Using the interior lights

Interior features

■Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to engine switch mode, the presence of the

electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are

open/closed.

■To prevent battery discharge

If the interior lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off

automatically after 20 minutes:

■Customization

Settings (e.g. adjust the time elapsed before the interior lights automatically turn off) can

be changed. (Customizable features: →P. 580)

Personal lights

Front Rear

Turns the lights on/off (touch the lights) Turns the lights on/off

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the

engine is not running.

420

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Auxiliary boxes (→P. 425)

Card holder (→P. 424)

Overhead console (→P. 422)

Glove box (→P. 421)

Bottle holders (→P. 424)

Door pockets

Cup holders (→P. 423)

Console box (if equipped)

(→P. 421)

Cool box (if equipped) (→P. 430)

Auxiliary box (if equipped)

(→P. 425)

Wireless charger (if equipped)

(→P. 435)

WARNING

■Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the

following when cabin temperature becomes high:

●Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact with other

stored items.

●Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other stored items,

the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

421

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

Open (push button)

Unlock with the mechanical key

Lock with the mechanical key

■Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

■Removing the separate tray

Your vehicle is equipped with either a console box or cool box.

For vehicles with the cool box, refer to page 430.

Press the button to open the lid.

Glove box

Pull out the separate tray while releasing the

clips.

WARNING

Keep the glove box closed while driving.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Console box (if equipped)

422

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

Remove the tray.

Press the button.

WARNING

Keep the console box closed while driving.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Overhead console

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for storing

Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb (0.2 kg).

Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may fall out,

resulting in an accident.

■While driving

Do not leave the overhead console open.

Items may fall out and cause injury.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

423

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

Cup holders

Front seats Second seats

Press down and release the lid. To open, pull down the armrest, press

the button and release the rear cup

holder on the armrest.

Third seats (if equipped) Luggage compartment (if

equipped)

WARNING

■Items unsuitable for the cup holders

Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders. Even when

the lid is closed, items must not be stored in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden

braking, and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

■When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

424

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the cup holders

Stow the cup holders before stowing the rear armrest.

Bottle holders

Front seats Second seats

NOTICE

■Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bottle holders,

or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may

break.

Card holder

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

425

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

Your vehicle is equipped with either a front auxiliary box type B or wireless char-

ger.

For vehicles with wireless charger, refer to page 435.

■Front seats

Type A

Press the button to open.

Type B (if equipped)

Press the lid to open.

■Second seats

Pull down the armrest.

Auxiliary boxes

426

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

Press the button to release the

lock.

■Third seats /luggage compartment

WARNING

■While driving

For the front seats and the second seats: Do not leave the auxiliary box open while driv-

ing.

Items stored in it may fall out and cause death or serious injury in case of an accident or

sudden stop.

427

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

Luggage compartment features

Raise the hook to use.

The cargo hooks are provided for

securing loose items.

To hang the cargo net, use the cargo

net hooks and rear tie-down hooks.

The cargo net itself is not included as an

original equipment.

Remove the cover.

Cargo hooks

Cargo net hooks

Storage compartment (if equipped)

428

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-5. Using the storage features

Remove the cover. Hold the warning

reflector with the bands.

The warning reflector itself is not

included as an original equipment.

Remove the cover. Hold the first-aid kit

with a band.

The first-aid kit itself is not included as an

original equipment.

■Using the luggage cover

Pull out the luggage cover and hook

it on the anchors.

Warning reflector holder

First-aid kit holder

Luggage cover (if equipped)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

429

5-5. Using the storage features

Interior features

■Removing the luggage cover

Retract the cover and release both

ends, then lift it out.

After removing the luggage cover,

place it somewhere other than the

passenger compartment.

■When installing the luggage cover (if equipped)

Keep the “TOP” mark on the luggage cover

ends upward.

WARNING

●To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when not in use.

●Keep the auxiliary box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerving, an

accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by an open auxiliary box or the

items stored inside.

●Vehicles with luggage cover: Do not allow children to climb on the luggage cover.

Climbing on the luggage cover could result in damage to the luggage cover, possibly

causing death or serious injury to the child.

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the cargo net hooks

Avoid hanging things other than a cargo net on it.

430

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

Other interior features

While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air conditioning,

can be used.

Press the button to open the lid.

Turns the cool box on/off

When on, the indicator light comes on.

■While the cool box is on

The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.

■When the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below

The cool box may not operate.

Cool box (if equipped)

WARNING

Keep the cool box closed while driving.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

431

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Main sun visor

To set the visor in the forward posi-

tion, flip it down.

To set the visor in the side position,

flip down, unhook, and swing it to the

side.

To use the side extender, place the

visor in the side position, then slide it

backward.

Sub sun visor

Flip down with the main sun visor in

position or .

Slide the cover to open.

The light turns on when the cover is

opened.

If the vanity lights remain on when the engine switch is turned off, the lights will go off

automatically after 20 minutes.

Sun visors

Vanity mirrors

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods

when the engine is not running.

432

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

The GPS clock’s time is automatically

adjusted by utilizing GPS time informa-

tion. For details, refer to “NAVIGA-

TION SYSTEM OWNER’S

MANUAL”.

Clock

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

433

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

The power outlet can be used for the following components:

12 V DC: Accessories that run on less than 10 A

120 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W

■Center of console

Front (12 V DC)

Press the lid to open.

Rear (12 V DC)

Power outlets

434

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Luggage compartment (120 V AC)

■The power outlet can be used when

12 V DC: The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

120 V AC: The engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

■To prevent the fuse from being blown

12 V DC: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

120 V AC: Do not use a 120 V AC appliance that requires more than 100 W.

If a 120 V AC appliance that consumes more than 100 W is used, the protection circuit

will cut the power supply.

■To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

■Appliances that may not operate properly (120 V AC)

The following 120 V AC appliances may not operate properly even if their power con-

sumption is under 100 W:

●Appliances with high initial peak wattage

●Measuring devices that process precise data

●Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

435

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

A portable device can be charged by just placing Qi standard wireless charge

compatible portable devices according to the Wireless Power Consortium, such

as smart phones and mobile batteries, etc., on the charge area.

This function cannot be used with portable devices that are larger than the

charging area. Also, depending on the portable device, it may not operate as

normal. Please read the operation manual for portable devices to be used.

■The “Qi” symbol

The “Qi” symbol is a trademark of the Wireless Power Consortium.

■Name for all parts

Power supply switch

Operation indicator light

Charge area

Wireless charger (if equipped)

436

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Using the wireless charger

Press the lid to open.

Press the power supply switch of

the wireless charger.

Switches on and off with each press

of the power supply switch.

When turned on, the operation indi-

cator light (green) comes on.

Even with the engine off, the on/off

state of the power supply switch is

memorized.

Place the charging side of the

portable device down.

When charging, the operation indi-

cator light (orange) comes on.

If charging is not occurring, try plac-

ing the portable device as close to

the center of the charging area as

possible.

When charging is complete, the

operation indicator light (green)

comes on.

●Recharging function

• When charging is complete and after a fixed time in the charge suspen-

sion state, charging restarts.

• When the portable device is moved, charging is stopped for a moment

and then it restarts.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

437

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■Lighting conditions of operation indicator light

*: Depending on the portable device, there are cases where the operation indicator

light will continue being lit up orange even after the charging is complete.

●When the operation indicator light flashes

When an error occurs, the operation indicator light flashes an orange color.

Handle the error based on the following table.

■The wireless charger can be operated when

The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

■Usable portable devices

Qi standard wireless charge standard can be used on compatible devices.

However, not all Qi standard devices and compatibility are guaranteed.

Starting with mobile phones and smart phones, it is aimed for low power electrically sup-

plied portable devices of no more than 5W.

Operation indicator light Conditions

Turning off When the Wireless charger power supply is off

Green (comes on) On Standby (charging possible state)

When charging is complete*

Orange (comes on)

When placing the portable device on the charging

area (detecting the portable device)

Charging

Operation indicator light Suspected causes Handling method

Flashing repeatedly once

every second (Orange) Vehicle to charger commu-

nication failure. Contact your Lexus dealer.

Repeatedly flashes

3 times continuously

(Orange)

A foreign substance is

between the portable device

and charge area.

Remove the foreign sub-

stance from between por-

table device and the

charge area.

The portable device is out of

sync due to the device being

shifted from its position.

Place the portable device

near the center of the

charge area.

Repeatedly flashes

4 times continuously

(Orange)

Temperature rising within

the wireless charger.

Stop charging at once and

start charging again after

for a while.

438

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■When covers and accessories are attached to portable devices

Do not charge in situations where cover and accessories not able to handle Qi are

attached to the portable device. Depending on the type of cover and accessory, it may

not be possible to charge. When charging is not performed even with the portable

device placed on the charge area, remove the cover and accessories.

■While charging, noise enters the AM radio

Turn off the wireless charger and confirm that the noise has decreased. If the noise

decreases, continuously pushing the power supply switch of the wireless charger for 2

seconds, the frequency of the charger can be changed and the noise can be reduced.

Also, on that occasion, the operation indicator light will flash orange 2 times.

■Important points of the wireless charger

●If the electronic key cannot be detected within the vehicle interior, charging cannot be

done. When the door is opened and closed, charging may be temporarily suspended.

●When charging, the wireless charging device and portable device will get warmer,

however this is not a malfunction.

When a portable device gets warm while charging, charging may stop due to the pro-

tection function on the portable device side. In this case, when the temperature of the

portable device drops significantly, charge again.

■Operation sounds

When the power supply is turned on, while searching for the portable device a sound will

be produced, however this is not a malfunction.

■Certification for the wireless charger

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

439

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

440

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

WARNING

■Caution while driving

When charging a portable device, for safety reasons, the driver should not operate the

portable device while driving.

■Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-

pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators, as well as any other electrical

medical device, should consult their physician about the usage of the wireless charger.

The operations of the wireless charger may have an affect on medical devices.

■To prevent damage or burns

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in a possibility of equipment failure and damage, catch fire,

burns due to overheat.

●Do not insert any metallic objects between the charging area and the portable device

while charging

●Do not attach stickers, metallic objects, etc., to the charger area or portable device

●Do not cover with cloth, etc., and charge

●Do not charge portable devices other than designated

●Do not attempt to dismantle for disassembly or modifications

●Do not hit or apply a strong force

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

441

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

WARNING

■Conditions in which the function may not operate correctly

In the following conditions, the wireless charger may not operate correctly

●The portable device is fully charged

●There is foreign matter between the charge area and portable device

●The temperature of the portable device gets higher from charging

●The charging surface of the portable device is facing up

●The placement of the portable device is out of alignment with the charge area

●Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport

or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

●When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic

objects

• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached

• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside

• Metallic wallets or bags

•Coins

• Hand warmers made of metal

• Media such as CDs and DVDs

●When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby

In addition, excluding the above-mentioned, when the charger does not perform nor-

mally or the operation indicator light is flashing continuously, it is considered that the

wireless charger is malfunctioning. Contact your Lexus dealer.

■To prevent failure or damage to data

●Do not bring magnetic cards, such as credit cards, or magnetic recording media, etc.,

close to the charger while charging, otherwise, data may disappear under the influ-

ence of magnetism. Also, do not bring precision instruments such as wrist watches,

etc., close to the charger, as such objects may break.

●Do not leave portable devices in the cabin. The temperature inside the cabin may

become high, when under the sun, and cause damage to the device.

■To prevent battery discharge

When the engine is stopped, do not use the wireless charger for a long time.

442

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

Fold down the armrest for use.

Armrest

NOTICE

To prevent damage, do not apply too much load on the armrest.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

443

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Pull the tab of the rear door sunshade

and hook the shade on using the

anchor.

To retract the rear door sunshade,

unhook the shade and retract it slowly.

The coat hooks are provided with the

second seat assist grips.

Rear door sunshades

NOTICE

To ensure normal operation of the rear door sunshade, observe the following precau-

tions.

●Do not place anything where it may hinder the opening/closing of the sunshade.

●Do not attach anything to the rear door sunshade.

●Do not retract the rear door sunshade at an angle.

Coat hooks

WARNING

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard or sharp objects on the hook. If the SRS cur-

tain shield airbags deploy, these items may become projectiles, causing death or seri-

ous injury.

444

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

An assist grip (Type A) can be used to support your body while sitting on the seat.

An assist grip (Type B) can be used when getting in or out of the vehicle and oth-

ers.

Assist grip (Type A)

Assist grip (Type B)

Assist grips

WARNING

Do not use the assist grip (Type A) when getting in or out of the vehicle or rising from

your seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage, do not hang heavy objects or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

445

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Garage door opener

The HomeLink® wireless control system in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can

be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming meth-

ods on the following pages to determine the method which is appropriate for the

device.

HomeLink® indicator light

Garage door operation indicators

HomeLink® icon

Illuminates while HomeLink® is operat-

ing.

Buttons

■Before programming HomeLink®

●During programming, it is possible that garage doors, gates, or other

devices may operate. For this reason, make sure that people and objects

are clear of the garage door or other devices to prevent injury or other

potential harm.

●It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the remote control

transmitter for more accurate programming.

●Garage door opener motors manufactured after 1995 may be equipped

with rolling code protection. If this is the case, you may need a stepladder

or other sturdy, safe device to reach the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the

garage door opener motor.

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates,

entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, security systems, and other

devices.

Programming HomeLink®

446

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Programming the HomeLink®

Steps through must be performed within 60 seconds, otherwise the

indicator light will stop flashing and programming will not be able to be com-

pleted.

Press and release the HomeLink® button you want to program and check

that the HomeLink® indicator light flashes (orange).

Point the remote control transmit-

ter for the device at the rear view

mirror, 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm)

from the HomeLink® buttons.

Keep the HomeLink® indicator light

in view while programming.

Program a device.

Programming a device other

than an entry gate (for U.S.A.

owners)

Press and hold the remote control

transmitter button until the

HomeLink® indicator light

changes from slowly flashing

orange to rapidly flashing green

(rolling code) or continuously lit

green (fixed code), then release

the button.

Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming a device

in the Canadian market

Press and release the remote control transmitter button at 2 second inter-

vals, repeatedly, until the HomeLink® indicator light changes from slowly

flashing (orange) to rapidly flashing (green) (rolling code) or continuously

lit (green) (fixed code).

Test the HomeLink® operation by pressing the newly programmed button

and observing the indicator light:

●Indicator light illuminates: Programming of a fixed code device has com-

pleted. The garage door or other device should operate when a Home-

Link® button is pressed and released.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

447

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

●Indicator light flashes rapidly: The garage door opener motor or other

device is equipped with a rolling code. To complete programming, firmly

press and hold the HomeLink® button for 2 seconds then release it.

●If the garage door or other device does not operate, proceed to “Pro-

gramming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for any of the remaining

HomeLink® buttons.

■Programming a rolling code system

2 or more people may be necessary to complete rolling code programming.

Locate the “Learn” or “Smart”

button on the garage door

opener motor in the garage.

This button can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the unit. The name and

color of the button may vary by man-

ufacturer. Refer to the owner’s man-

ual supplied with the garage door

opener motor for details.

Press and release the “Learn” or

“Smart” button.

Perform within 30 seconds

after performing .

Press and hold the desired

HomeLink® button (inside the

vehicle) for 2 seconds and

release it. Repeat this sequence

(press/hold/release) up to 3

times to complete programming.

If the garage door opener motor

operates when the HomeLink®

button is pressed, the garage

door opener motor recognizes

the HomeLink® signal.

448

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Enabling 2-way communication with a garage door (only available for com-

patible devices)

When enabled, 2-way communication allows you to check the status of the

opening and closing of a garage door through indicators in your vehicle.

2-way communication is only available if the garage door opener motor used

is a compatible device. (To check device compatibility, refer to www.Home-

Link.com.)

Within 5 seconds after programming the garage door opener has been

completed, if the garage door opener motor is trained to HomeLink®,

both garage door operation indicators will flash rapidly (green) and the

light on the garage door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-

way communication is enabled.

If the indicators do not flash, perform and within the first 10 presses of

the HomeLink® button after programming has been completed.

Press a programmed HomeLink® button to operate a garage door.

Within 1 minute of pressing the HomeLink® button, after the garage door

operation has stopped, press the “Learn” or “Smart” button on the garage

door opener motor. Within 5 seconds of the establishment of 2-way com-

munication with the garage door opener, both garage door operation indi-

cators in the vehicle will flash rapidly (green) and the light on the garage

door opener motor will blink twice, indicating that 2-way communication is

enabled.

■Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button

When the following procedure is performed, buttons which already have

devices registered to them can be overwritten:

With one hand, press and hold the desired HomeLink® button.

When the HomeLink® indicator starts flashing (orange), continue to hold

the HomeLink® button and perform “Programming HomeLink®” (it

takes 20 seconds for the HomeLink® indicator to start flashing).

Press the appropriate HomeLink® button. The HomeLink® indicator light

should turn on.

Operating HomeLink®

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

449

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

The status of the opening and closing of

a garage door is shown by the indica-

tors.

Opening

Closing

This function is only available if the

garage door opener motor used is a

compatible device. (To check device

compatibility, refer to www.Home-

Link.com.)

The indicators can operate within approximately 820 ft. (250 m) of the

garage door. However, if there are obstructions between the garage door and

the vehicle, such as houses and trees, feedback signals from the garage door

may not be received.

To recall the previous door operation status, press and release either Home-

Link® buttons and or and simultaneously. The

last recorded status will be displayed for 3 seconds.

Press and hold the 2 outside buttons for

10 seconds until the HomeLink® indi-

cator light changes from continuously

lit (orange) to rapidly flashing (green).

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase

the programs stored in the HomeLink®

memory.

Garage door operation indicators

Color Status

Orange (flashing) Currently opening/closing

Green Opening/closing has completed

Red (flashing) Feedback signals cannot be received

Erasing the entire HomeLink® memory (all three codes)

450

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Codes stored in the HomeLink® memory

●The registered codes are not erased even if the battery cable is disconnected.

●If learning failed when registering a different code to a HomeLink® button that already

has a code registered to it, the already registered code will not be erased.

■Before programming

●Install a new battery in the transmitter.

●The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink®.

■Certification for the garage door opener

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, NATO Germany, Guam and Puerto Rico

For vehicles sold in Canada

■When support is necessary

Visit on the web at www.homelink.com/lexus or call 1-800-355-3515.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

451

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

WARNING

■When programming a garage door or other remote control device

The garage door or other device may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of

danger to prevent potential harm.

■Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink® compatible transceiver with any garage door opener or

device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety stan-

dards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an interfering object. A door or

device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

■When operating or programming HomeLink®

Never allow a child to operate or play with the HomeLink® buttons.

452

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

LEXUS Enform Safety Connect∗

Microphone

LED light indicators

“SOS” button

∗: If equipped

Safety Connect is a subscription-based telematics service that uses Global

Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide

safety and security features to subscribers. Safety Connect is supported by

Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24 hours per day, 7 days

per week.

Safety Connect service is available by subscription on select, telematics hard-

ware-equipped vehicles.

By using the Safety Connect service, you are agreeing to be bound by the

Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and its Terms and Conditions, as

in effect and amended from time to time, a current copy of which is available

at Lexus.com. All use of the Safety Connect service is subject to such then-

applicable Terms and Conditions.

System components

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

453

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

Subscribers have the following Safety Connect services available:

●Automatic Collision Notification*

Helps drivers receive necessary response from emergency service providers.

(→P. 454)

*: U.S. Patent No. 7,508,298 B2

●Stolen Vehicle Location

Helps drivers in the event of vehicle theft. (→P. 454)

●Emergency Assistance Button (SOS)

Connects drivers to response-center support. (→P. 455)

●Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Provides drivers various on-road assistance. (→P. 455)

After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are

enrolled, you can begin receiving services.

A variety of subscription terms is available for purchase. Contact your Lexus

dealer, call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) or push the “SOS” button in

your vehicle for further subscription details.

■Safety Connect Services Information

●Phone calls using the vehicles Bluetooth® technology will not be possible during Safety

Connect.

●Contact with the Safety Connect response center is dependent upon the telematics

device being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, and GPS satellite

signal reception, which can limit the ability to reach the response center or receive

emergency service support. Enrollment and Telematics Subscription Service Agree-

ment required. A variety of subscription terms is available; charges vary by subscription

term selected.

●Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance and Stolen Vehicle Location

will function in the United States, including Hawaii and Alaska, and in Canada, and

Enhanced Roadside Assistance will function in the United States (except Hawaii) and in

Canada. No Safety Connect services will function outside of the United States in coun-

tries other than Canada.

●Safety Connect services are not subject to section 255 of the Telecommunications Act

and the device is not TTY compatible.

■Languages

The Safety Connect response center will offer support in multiple languages. The Safety

Connect system will offer voice prompts in English and Spanish. Please indicate your lan-

guage of choice when enrolling.

Services

Subscription

454

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■When contacting the response center

You may be unable to contact the response center if the network is busy.

■Safety Connect backup battery depletion

An exclusive backup battery is built in to assist the Automatic Collision Notification,

which is activated when impact above a certain level is applied to the vehicle, or when the

airbags operate. This battery is a primary battery, and cannot be recharged. The red LED

indicator will flash to indicate that the battery should be replaced.

The backup battery will need to be replaced if the Automatic Collision Notification oper-

ates for 60 seconds or more. For replacement, consult your Lexus dealer.

When the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the red indicator

light comes on for 2 seconds then turns off. Afterward, the green indicator light

comes on, indicating that the service is active.

The following indicator light patterns indicate specific system usage conditions:

●Green indicator light on = Active service

●Green indicator light flashing = Safety Connect call in process

●Red indicator light (except at vehicle start-up) = System malfunction (contact

your Lexus dealer)

●No indicator light (off) = Safety Connect service not active

■Automatic Collision Notification

In case of either airbag deployment or severe rear-end collision, the system is

designed to automatically call the response center. The responding agent

receives the vehicle’s location and attempts to speak with the vehicle occu-

pants to assess the level of emergency. If the occupants are unable to commu-

nicate, the agent automatically treats the call as an emergency, contacts the

nearest emergency services provider to describe the situation, and requests

that assistance be sent to the location.

■Stolen Vehicle Location

If your vehicle is stolen, Safety Connect can work with local authorities to

assist them in locating and recovering the vehicle. After filing a police report,

call the Safety Connect response center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-

3987) and follow the prompts for Safety Connect to initiate this service.

In addition to assisting law enforcement with recovery of a stolen vehicle,

Safety-Connect-equipped vehicle location data may, under certain circum-

stances, be shared with third parties to locate your vehicle. Further informa-

tion is available at Lexus.com.

Safety Connect LED light Indicators

Safety Connect services

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

455

5-6. Using the other interior features

Interior features

■Emergency Assistance Button (“SOS”)

In the event of an emergency on the road, push the “SOS” button to reach the

Safety Connect response center. The answering agent will determine your

vehicle’s location, assess the emergency, and dispatch the necessary assis-

tance required.

If you accidentally press the “SOS” button, tell the response-center agent that you

are not experiencing an emergency.

■Enhanced Roadside Assistance

Enhanced Roadside Assistance adds GPS data to the already included war-

ranty-based Lexus roadside service.

Subscribers can press the “SOS” button to reach a Safety Connect response-

center agent, who can help with a wide range of needs, such as: towing, flat

tire, fuel delivery, etc. For a description of the Roadside Assistance services

and their limitations, please see the Safety Connect Terms and Conditions,

which are available at Lexus.com.

Important! Read this information before using Safety Connect.

■Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Safety Connect system installed in your vehicle is a low-power radio

transmitter and receiver. It receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF)

signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted

RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those

guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by the fol-

lowing U.S. and international standards bodies.

●ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992]

●NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)

Report 86 [1986]

●ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)

[1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of

the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physi-

cians from universities, and government health agencies and industries

reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).

The design of Safety Connect complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to

those standards.

Safety information for Safety Connect

456

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

5-6. Using the other interior features

■Certification for Lexus Enform with Safety Connect

457

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Maintenance and care

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ................458

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior................... 461

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements ............................464

General maintenance..............466

Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M)

programs....................................469

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions................................470

Hood ............................................... 472

Engine compartment ...............473

Tires.................................................486

Tire inflation pressure...............495

Wheels ...........................................499

Air conditioning filter ................501

Electronic key battery..............503

Checking and replacing

fuses............................................. 505

Light bulbs.................................... 508

458

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

●Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel

wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

●Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

●For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with

water.

●Wipe away any water.

●Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

■Automatic car washes

●Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front of the

vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving.

●Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your

vehicle’s paint.

●Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There may also be an

increased risk of damage to vehicle.

■High pressure car washes

●Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows.

●Before using the car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed prop-

erly.

■Wheels (including surrounding parts)

●Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or

abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild

detergent and wax as used on the paint.

●Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after driving for

long distance in the hot weather.

●Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

■Bumpers

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condi-

tion:

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

459

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

■Notes for a smart access system with push-button start

●If the door handle becomes wet while the electronic key is within the effective range,

the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. Place the key in a position 6 ft. (2 m) or more

separate from the vehicle while the vehicle is being washed. (Take care to ensure that

the key is not stolen.)

●If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car

wash, a message may be shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer will

sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

WARNING

■When washing the vehicle

Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the

electrical components etc. to catch fire.

■When cleaning the windshield

●When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is located is

touched by hand

●When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

●If something bumps against the windshield

●If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into the raindrop

sensor

■Precautions regarding the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled suffi-

ciently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

■Precautions regarding the Blind Spot Monitor (if equipped)

If the paint of the rear bumper is chipped or scratched, the system may malfunction.

If this occurs, consult your Lexus dealer.

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may

operate unexpectedly in the following situa-

tions, and may result in hands being caught or

other serious injuries and cause damage to the

wiper blades.

OFF

AUTO

460

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and components (aluminum

wheels etc.)

●Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If coal tar or tree sap is present on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron pow-

der or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

●If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

●To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place with low

humidity when storing wheels.

■Cleaning the exterior lights

●Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

●Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

■When using an automatic car wash

Set the wiper switch to the off position.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be

damaged.

■When using a high pressure car wash

Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured cover), con-

nectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact

with high-pressure water.

• Traction related parts

•Steering parts

• Suspension parts

• Brake parts

461

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water.

●If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral

detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining

traces of detergent and water.

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted deter-

gent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remain-

ing traces of detergent.

●Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture.

Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.

●Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

●Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to

approximately 1%.

●Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining

traces of detergent and water.

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and keep it

in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior

Cleaning the leather areas

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas

462

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-1. Maintenance and care

■Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain

the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

■Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to

apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not use water. The excellent results are

obtained when keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

■Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts

periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

■Water in the vehicle

●Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

●Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (→P. 40)

An electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly,

resulting in death or serious injury.

■Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the wind-

shield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or

serious injury.

NOTICE

■Cleaning detergents

●Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior

or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces:

• Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, alkaline or

acidic solutions, dye, and bleach

• Seats: Alkaline or acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzene, and alcohol

●Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other interior part’s

painted surface may be damaged.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

463

6-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

NOTICE

■Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather

surfaces:

●Remove any dust or dirt from leather surfaces immediately.

●Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the

vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

●Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or containing wax on the upholstery, as they

may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

■When cleaning the inside of the windshield (vehicles with Lexus Safety System +)

Do not allow glass cleaner to contact the lens. Also, do not touch the lens. (→P. 245)

■Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact

with electrical components such as the audio system above or under the floor of the

vehicle. Water may also cause the body to rust.

■Cleaning the inside of the rear quarter windows and rear window

●Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear quarter windows and rear window, as this

may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth

dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window

in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.

●Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

464

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

General maintenance should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by

yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified intervals according to

the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and

Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.

You can perform some maintenance procedures by yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Lexus repair manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, refer to the separate “Owner’s Guide”, “War-

ranty and Service Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular mainte-

nance are essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks.

Lexus recommends the following maintenance:

General maintenance

Scheduled maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

465

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

■Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repairs to ensure performance

of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than

a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

■Resetting the message indicating maintenance is required (U.S.A. only)

After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance schedule,

please reset the message.

To reset the message, follow the procedures described below:

Press or of the meter control switches, select .

Press or of the meter control switches, select “Scheduled Maintenance” and

then press .

Select the “Yes” and press .

A message is displayed on the multi-information display.

■Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer

●Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest ser-

vice information. They are well informed about the operation of all systems on your

vehicle.

●Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been per-

formed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is

under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

■If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible seri-

ous injury or death.

■Handling of the battery

●Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

●Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component

wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area

immediately.

●Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds

which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (→P. 482)

466

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at

the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Service Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should

be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for

advice.

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery Check the connections. (→P. 482)

Brake fluid Is the brake fluid at the correct level? (→P. 479)

Engine coolant Is the engine coolant at the correct level? (→P. 478)

Engine oil Is the engine oil at the correct level? (→P. 475)

Exhaust system There should not be any fumes or strange sounds.

Power steering fluid Is the power steering fluid at the correct level?

(→P. 481)

Radiator/condenser The radiator and condenser should be free from

foreign objects. (→P. 479)

Washer fluid Is there sufficient washer fluid? (→P. 485)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

467

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal • The accelerator pedal should move smoothly

(without uneven pedal effort or catching).

Automatic transmission

“Park” mechanism • When parked on a slope and the shift lever is in P, is

the vehicle securely stopped?

Brake pedal

• Does the brake pedal move smoothly?

• Does the brake pedal have appropriate clearance

from the floor? (→P. 564)

• Does the brake pedal have the correct amount of

free play? (→P. 564)

Brakes

• The vehicle should not pull to one side when the

brakes are applied.

• The brakes should work effectively.

• The brake pedal should not feel spongy.

• The brake pedal should not get too close to the floor

when the brakes are applied.

Head restraints • Do the head restraints move smoothly and lock

securely?

Indicators/buzzers • Do the indicators and buzzers function properly?

Lights • Do all the lights come on?

Seat belts • Do the seat belts operate smoothly?

• The seat belts should not be damaged.

Seats • Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel

• Does the steering wheel rotate smoothly?

• Does the steering wheel have the correct amount of

free play?

• There should not be any strange sounds coming

from the steering wheel.

468

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Doors • Do the doors operate smoothly?

Engine hood • Does the engine hood lock system work properly?

Fluid leaks • There should not be any signs of fluid leakage after

the vehicle has been parked.

Tires

• Is the tire inflation pressure correct?

• The tires should not be damaged or excessively

worn.

• Have the tires been rotated according to the mainte-

nance schedule?

• The wheel nuts should not be loose.

Windshield wipers/rear

window wiper

•The wiper blades should not show any signs of crack-

ing, splitting, wear, contamination or deformation.

• The wiper blades should clear the windshield/rear

window without streaking or skipping.

WARNING

■If the engine is running

Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing

maintenance checks.

469

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission

control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be

repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

●When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be com-

pletely set.

●When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on indicating a temporary malfunction

and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven

40 or more times.

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD

(On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of

the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test in the following situations:

When the malfunction indicator lamp still remains on after several driv-

ing trips

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

470

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedures

as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition

(→P. 482)

•Warm water • Baking soda •Grease

• Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level

(→P. 479)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

Engine coolant level

(→P. 478)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality eth-

ylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and

non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid tech-

nology.

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50 %

coolant and 50 % deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55 %

coolant and 45 % deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

Engine oil level

(→P. 475)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses (→P. 505) • Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Power steering fluid

level (→P. 481)

• Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding power steering fluid)

Radiator and

condenser

(→P. 479) ⎯

Tire inflation

pressure (→P. 495) • Tire pressure gauge • Compressed air source

Washer fluid

(→P. 485)

• Water or washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel (used only for adding water or washer fluid)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

471

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly,

become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe

the following precautions:

■When working on the engine compartment

●Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

●Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving

as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

●Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine com-

partment.

●Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and

battery fumes are flammable.

●Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corro-

sive sulfuric acid.

■When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode, the

electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or

the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 479)

■When working on or under the vehicle

Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.

Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

■Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in

your eyes.

NOTICE

■If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt

in the air.

472

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood

Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Lift the hood catch and lift the hood.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

WARNING

■Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause

an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

473

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Engine compartment

Power steering fluid reservoir

(→P. 481)

Engine oil level dipstick

(→P. 475)

Engine coolant reservoir

(→P. 478)

Engine oil filler cap (→P. 476)

Brake fluid reservoir (→P. 479)

Fuse box (→P. 505)

Washer fluid tank (→P. 485)

Battery (→P. 482)

Cooling fans

Condenser (→P. 479)

Radiator (→P. 479)

474

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■Removing the engine compartment cover

■Installing the clips

Push up center portion

Insert

Press

Engine compartment cover

NOTICE

■After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure the cover is securely installed in its original position.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

475

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on

the dipstick.

■Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning

it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of

the engine.

Holding a rag under the end, pull

the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may dif-

fer depending on the type of vehi-

cle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Engine oil

476

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the

low level mark, add engine oil of the

same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding

oil.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

■Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the following situations,

oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil

maintenance intervals.

●When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle or after

replacing the engine

●If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

●When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing, or when driving

while accelerating or decelerating frequently

●When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently through

heavy traffic

■After changing the engine oil

The engine oil maintenance data should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

Press or of the meter control switches, select .

Press or of the meter control switches, select “Oil Maintenance” and then

press .

Select the “Yes” and press .

A message is displayed on the multi-information display.

Engine oil selection →P. 560

Oil quantity (Low → Full) 1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Items Clean funnel

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

477

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

WARNING

■Used engine oil

●Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin dis-

orders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid pro-

longed and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash

thoroughly with soap and water.

●Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of

used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Lexus

dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or dis-

posal.

●Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

■To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

■When replacing the engine oil

●Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

●Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

●Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

●Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

478

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the reser-

voir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“F” line

“L” line

If the level is on or below the “L” line, add

coolant up to the “F” line.

■Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or a similar high quality ethylene glycol-

based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50 % coolant and 50 % deion-

ized water. (Minimum temperature: -31°F [-35°C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55 % coolant and 45 % deion-

ized water. (Minimum temperature: -44°F [-42°C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

■If the coolant level drops within a short time of replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock

and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

Engine coolant

WARNING

■When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap, or the coolant reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is

removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

479

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts is extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

■Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be

between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines

on the tank.

NOTICE

■When adding coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and

antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cool-

ing. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

■If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

WARNING

■When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause serious injuries,

such as burns.

Brake fluid

480

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■Adding fluid

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary item.

■Refilling brake fluid

Turn the engine switch off.

Depress the brake pedal more than 40 times.

Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the “MAX” line.

If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may overflow.

■Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only

newly opened brake fluid.

Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Items Clean funnel

WARNING

■When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted sur-

faces. If fluid gets on your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If

you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

■If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when

the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may

indicate a serious problem.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

481

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■Fluid level

The fluid level should be within the appropriate range.

Full (when cold)

Add fluid (when cold)

Full (when hot)

Add fluid (when hot)

Hot: The vehicles has been driven around 50 mph (80 km/h) for 20 min-

utes, or slightly longer in frigid temperatures.

(Fluid temperature, 140°F - 175°F [60°C - 80°C]).

Cold: The engine has not been run for about 5 hours.

(Room temperature, 50°F - 85°F [10°C - 30°C]).

■Checking the fluid level

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Clean all dirt off the reservoir.

Remove the cap by turning it counterclockwise.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinstall the cap and remove it again.

Check the fluid level.

Power steering fluid

Fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

Items Rag or paper, clean funnel (only for adding fluid)

482

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Check the battery as follows.

■Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no

loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

WARNING

■When checking the reservoir

Take care as the reservoir may be hot.

NOTICE

■When adding fluid

Avoid overfilling, or the power steering may be damaged.

■After replacing the reservoir cap

Check the steering box case, vane pump and hose connections for leaks or damage.

Battery

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

483

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive.

Therefore, observe the following before recharging:

●If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground

cable.

●Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting

the charger cables to the battery.

■After recharging/reconnecting the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the system.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Open and close any of the doors.

Restart the engine.

●Unlocking the doors using the smart access system with push-button start may not be

possible immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wireless

remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

●Start the engine with the engine switch in ACCESSORY mode. The engine may not

start with the engine switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from

the second attempt.

●The engine switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the

vehicle will return the engine switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was

disconnected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take

extra care when connecting the battery if the engine switch mode prior to discharge is

unknown.

If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■Chemicals in the battery

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen

gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take

the following precautions while working on or near battery:

●Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

●Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

●Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

●Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

●Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

●Keep children away from the battery.

■Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or

closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

484

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■How to recharge the battery

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a

quicker rate.

■Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

●If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical

attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to

the nearest medical facility.

●If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention

immediately.

●If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and fol-

low the procedure above if necessary.

●If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immedi-

ately.

NOTICE

■When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories

are turned off.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

485

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

If any washer does not work or “Wind-

shield Washer Fluid Low” appears on

the multi-information display, the

washer tank may be empty. Add

washer fluid.

Washer fluid

WARNING

■When adding washer fluid

Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running as washer fluid contains

alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

■Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surface, as well as damaging the

pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

■Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bottle.

486

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires

Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires

for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread. Check the

spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread

Worn tread

Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a “TWI” or “ ” mark, etc., molded

on the sidewall of each tire.

Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life,

Lexus recommends that tire rotation is

carried out at the same interval as tire

inspection.

Do not fail to initialize the tire pressure

warning system after tire rotation.

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and tread-

wear.

Checking tires

Tire rotation

Front

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

487

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pres-

sure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before

serious problems arise.

●If the tire pressure drops below a predetermined level, the driver is warned by

a screen display and a warning light. (→P. 522)

●The tire pressure detected by the

tire pressure warning system can be

displayed on the multi-information

display. (→P. 91)

◆Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new ID

codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire

pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter ID codes registered by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 488)

◆Initializing the tire pressure warning system

■The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circum-

stances:

●When rotating the tires in above situation.

●When the set tire pressure has been changed before towing. (→P. 565)

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation

pressure is set as the benchmark pressure.

Tire pressure warning system

488

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch to off.

Initialization cannot be performed while the vehicle is moved.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure

level. (→P. 565)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure

level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

Turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Push and hold the tire pressure

warning reset switch until the tire

pressure warning light blinks

slowly 3 times.

“--” will be displayed for inflation

pressure of each tire on the multi-

information display while the tire

pressure warning system determines

the position of each tire.

When position of each tire is determined, the inflation pressure of each tire will be

displayed on the multi-information display.

Drive the vehicle at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for approx-

imately 10 minutes.

When initialization is complete, the inflation pressure of each tire will be displayed

on the multi-information display.

Initialization will take longer than approximately 10 minutes if the vehicle is

stopped for a long time, such as at traffic signals.

◆Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID

code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is nec-

essary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter.

Have the ID code registered by your Lexus dealer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

489

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

●The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

●You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, and

bulges indicating internal damage

●A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of

a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

■Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire

pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the

tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system mal-

function.

■Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if it has seldom

or never been used or damage is not obvious.

■Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks.

Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

■Maximum load of tire

Check that the number given by dividing the maximum load by 1.10 of the replacement

tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle

or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For

the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit

at maximum cold tire inflation pressure men-

tioned on the sidewall of the tire. (→P. 569)

490

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■Tire types

●Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under

dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as

snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For

driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended.

When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

●All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for

driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, how-

ever, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy

or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling perfor-

mance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

●Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If

you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the

originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make

sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without

first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed

on all wheels. (→P. 382)

■Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tire pressure warning system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the

specified level.

■If the tread on snow tires wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm)

The effectiveness of the tires as snow tires is lost.

■If you press the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and ini-

tialize the tire pressure warning system again.

■Situations in which the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly

●In the following cases, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

• If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not an OE (Original Equipment) tire.

• A tire has been replaced with a tire that is not of the specified size.

• Tire chains etc. are equipped.

• An auxiliary-supported run-flat tire is equipped.

• If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

• If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, particularly around the wheels or wheel

housings.

• If the tire inflation pressure is extremely higher than the specified level.

• If the spare tire is in a location subject to poor radio wave signal reception.

• If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is put near the

spare tire.

• If tires not equipped with the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

• If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered

in the tire pressure warning computer.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

491

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

●Performance may be affected in the following situations.

• Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, air-

port or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

• When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless

communication device

If tire position information is not correctly displayed due to the radio wave conditions,

the display may be corrected by driving and changing the radio wave conditions.

●When the vehicle is parked, the time taken for the warning to start or go off could be

extended.

●When tire inflation pressure declines rapidly for example when a tire has burst, the

warning may not function.

■The initialization operation

●Make sure to carry out initialization after adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Also, make sure the tires are cold before carrying out initialization or tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment.

●If you have accidentally turned the engine switch off during initialization, it is not neces-

sary to press the reset switch again as initialization will restart automatically when the

engine switch has been turned to IGNITION ON mode for the next time.

●If you accidentally press the reset switch when initialization is not necessary, adjust the

tire inflation pressure to the specified level when the tires are cold, and conduct initial-

ization again.

●While the position of each tire is being determined and the inflation pressures are not

being displayed on the multi-information display, if the inflation pressure of a tire drops,

the tire pressure warning light will come on.

492

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the set-

tings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated

attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light

does not blink 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-informa-

tion display.

●After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1

minute then stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.

If the inflation of each tire is not displayed after driving for approximately 1 hour, perform

the following procedure.

●Park the vehicle in a safe place for approximately 20 minutes. Then drive straight (with

occasional left and right turns) at approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) or more for

approximately 10 to 20 minutes.

However, in the following situations, the tire inflation pressure will not be recorder and

the system will not operate properly. Perform initialization.

●When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light

does not blink 3 times.

●After performing initialization, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute then

stays on after driving for about 20 minutes.

If the inflation pressure of each tire is still not displayed, have the vehicle inspected by

your Lexus dealer.

■Tire pressure warning system certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii, Guam, Puerto Rico and NATO Germany

FCC ID: PAXPMVC015

NOTE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Model: PMV-C015

NOTE

This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

493

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

WARNING

■Tire pressure warning system operation

The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire bursts

or if sudden air leakage occurs.

■When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous han-

dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

●Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

●Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

●Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply tires).

●Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

●Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

■When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not operate the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire

inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may

not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire

inflation pressure is actually normal.

494

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

■Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

and tire valve caps

●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

●Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water

could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves

could be bound.

●When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified.

The cap may become stuck.

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or

other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 487)

■Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning

ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires

themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

■If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

495

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressure and tire size are displayed on

the tire and loading information label.

(→P. 565)

Tire inflation pressure

496

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the gauge gradations.

If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level, adjust the pres-

sure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to deflate.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment,

apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Put the tire valve cap back on.

Inspection and adjustment procedure

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

497

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do

not forget to check the spare.

■Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

●Reduced fuel economy

●Reduced driving comfort and poor handling

●Reduced tire life due to wear

●Reduced safety

●Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent inflating, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

■Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

●Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more

than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

●Always use a tire pressure gauge.

It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

●It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated

in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

●Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

498

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated.

If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could

lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury:

●Excessive wear

●Uneven wear

●Poor handling

●Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

●Air leaking from between tire and wheel

●Wheel deformation and/ or tire damage

●Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards, expansion

joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

■When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to put the tire valve caps back on.

If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air

leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

499

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Wheels

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent

to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*.

Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Lexus does not recommend using the following:

●Wheels of different sizes or types

●Used wheels

●Bent wheels that have been straightened

●Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your alumi-

num wheels.

●When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are

still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

●Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

●Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber

hammer when balancing your wheels.

■When replacing wheels

The wheels of your vehicle are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advance warning in the event

of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters must be installed. (→P. 487)

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling

control.

Wheel selection

Aluminum wheel precautions

500

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

■When replacing wheels

●Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the Owner’s

Manual, as this may result in a loss of handling control.

●Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire. Doing

so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

■Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an accident.

NOTICE

■Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

●Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer or other qualified

service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

●Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genu-

ine wheels.

501

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Air conditioning filter

Turn the engine switch IGNITION ON mode and switch to recirculated air

mode, then turn the engine switch off.

Open the glove box and remove the separate tray. (→P. 421)

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the filter case.

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain

air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method

502

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing

compressed air through the filter from

the downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5 cm) from the fil-

ter and blow for approximately 2 min-

utes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm2 or

bar).

If it is not available, have the filter

cleaned by your Lexus dealer.

Remove the air conditioning filter and

replace it with a new one.

The “↑UP” marks shown on the filter

should be pointing up.

■Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance

schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more frequent cleaning or early

replacement may be required.

(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual

Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”.)

■If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

Cleaning method

Replacement method

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the system

●When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

●When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

503

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Electronic key battery

●Flathead screwdriver

●Lithium battery (CR2032)

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the

tip of the flathead screwdriver with a

tape.

Remove the depleted battery.

When removing the cover, if the battery

cannot be seen due to the electronic key

module attaching to the upper cover,

remove the electronic key module from

the cover so that the battery is visible as

shown in the illustration.

Insert a new battery with the “+” termi-

nal facing up.

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items:

Replacing the battery

504

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

■Use a CR2032 lithium battery

●Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, local electrical appliance shops or

camera stores.

●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

■When the card key battery needs to be replaced

The battery for the card key is available only at Lexus dealers. Your Lexus dealer can

replace the battery for you.

■If the electronic key battery is depleted

The following symptoms may occur:

●The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not

function properly.

●The operational range will be reduced.

WARNING

■Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away

from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents:

●Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

●Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control.

●Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

505

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

Checking and replacing fuses

Turn the engine switch off.

Open the fuse box cover.

Passenger’s side instrument panel

Remove the cover.

Remove the lid.

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If

this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Engine compartment Driver’s side instrument panel

Push the tab in and lift the lid off. Remove the lid.

506

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Remove the fuse with the pull-out tool.

Only type A fuse can be removed using

the pull-out tool.

Check if the fuse is blown.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Type A and B:

Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse of an appropriate amperage rating. The

amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type C and D:

Contact your Lexus dealer.

Type A Type B

Type C Type D

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

507

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

■After a fuse is replaced

●If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need

replacement. (→P. 508)

●If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

■If there is an overload in a circuit

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

■To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury.

●Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object

in place of a fuse.

●Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

●Do not modify the fuses or the fuse boxes.

NOTICE

■Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer,

as soon as possible.

508

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

6-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

■LED lights

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.

●Headlights

●Parking lights/daytime running lights

●Front side marker lights

●Fog lights

●Front turn signal lights

●Side turn signal lights

●Outer foot lights

●Rear turn signal lights

●High mounted stoplight

●Stop/tail lights

●License plate lights

●Stop lights

●Back-up lights

●Rear side marker lights

●Running board light

■Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a

malfunction. Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations:

●Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

●Water has built up inside the headlight.

If any lights burn out, have it replaced by your Lexus dealer.

WARNING

■Handling lights

Do not touch the lights while they are on or immediately after they have been turned

off. Doing so may result in burns.

509

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ...................510

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency.......511

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs

to be towed................................. 512

If you think something is

wrong............................................518

Fuel pump shut off system....... 519

If a warning light turns

on or a warning buzzer

sounds..........................................520

If a warning message is

displayed.....................................528

If you have a flat tire ..................532

If the engine will not start........544

If the electronic key does

not operate properly.............546

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.................................549

If your vehicle overheats.........552

If the vehicle becomes

stuck .............................................555

510

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash.

To turn them off, press the switch once

again.

■Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the

battery may discharge.

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has

to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

511

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-1. Essential information

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to

slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as

much as possible.

To stop the engine, press and hold

the engine switch for 2 consecutive

seconds or more, or press it briefly 3

times or more in succession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in

the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following procedure:

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more,

or press briefly 3 times or more

WARNING

■If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake pedal

harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possi-

ble before turning off the engine.

512

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle needs to be towed

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your

Lexus dealer or commercial towing service before towing.

●The engine is running but the vehicle does not move.

●The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your

Lexus dealer or commercial towing service, using a wheel-lift type truck or

flatbed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and

local laws.

If towing your vehicle with a wheel-lift type truck, use a towing dolly.

(→P. 513, 516)

Situations when it is necessary to contact dealers before towing

513

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Do not tow with a sling-type truck to

prevent body damage.

Towing with a sling-type truck

Towing with a wheel-lift type truck

From the front From the rear

Use a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

Use a towing dolly under the front

wheels.

514 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

If your vehicle is transported by a flat-

bed truck, it should be tied down at the

locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down

your vehicle, the angles shaded in black

must be 45°.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or

the vehicle may be damaged.

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily

towed using cables or chains secured to the emergency towing hooks. This

should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for at most 50 miles (80 km)

at under 18 mph (30 km/h).

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s

wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

Using a flatbed truck

Emergency towing

515

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Securely attach cables or chains to

the towing hooks.

Take care not to damage the vehicle

body.

Enter the vehicle being towed and start the engine.

If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “H4”. (The center differential is

unlocked.)

Change the vehicle height to N (normal) mode and press the height control

OFF button to end the vehicle height control operation. (→P. 298)

Shift the shift lever to N and release the parking brake.

When the shift lever cannot be shifted: →P. 215

■While towing

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function,

making steering and braking more difficult.

Emergency towing procedure

516 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

■When towing the vehicle

■While towing

●When towing using cables or chains, avoid sudden starts, etc. which place excessive

stress on the towing hooks, cables or chains. The towing hooks, cables or chains may

become damaged, broken debris may hit people and cause serious damage.

●Do not turn the engine switch off.

There is a possibility that the steering wheel is locked and cannot be operated.

Be sure to transport the vehicle with all four

wheels raised off the ground. If the vehicle is

towed with the tires contacting the ground, the

drivetrain or related parts may be damaged,

the vehicle may fly off the truck.

517

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

NOTICE

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing using a wheel-lift type truck

●Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the engine switch is off. The steering lock

mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

●When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the oppo-

site end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be dam-

aged while being towed.

■To prevent damage to the vehicle when towing with a sling-type truck

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

■To prevent damage to the vehicle during emergency towing

Do not secure cables or chains to the suspension components.

■To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not use the rear emergency towing hook.

518

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you think something is wrong

●Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal)

●Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

●Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than nor-

mal

●Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than normal

●Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal

●Changes in exhaust sound

●Excessive tire squeal when cornering

●Strange noises related to the suspension system

●Pinging or other noises related to the engine

●Engine missing, stumbling or running roughly

●Appreciable loss of power

●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

●Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

●Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs

adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms

Audible symptoms

Operational symptoms

519

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Turn the engine switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.

Restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or when an airbag

inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops the supply of fuel to

the engine.

NOTICE

■Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked onto the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and

is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

520

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer

sounds

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights comes on or

flashes. If a light comes on or flashes, but then goes off, this does not necessar-

ily indicate a malfunction in the system. However, if this continues to occur,

have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Warning light and warning buzzer list

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*1

Indicates that:

• The brake fluid level is low; or

• The brake system is malfunctioning.

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Lexus dealer. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your

Lexus dealer.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The emission control system;

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The electronic automatic transmission control system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system; or

• The front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

521

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

(Flashes or illuminates)

PCS warning light (if equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or that

the system is temporarily unavailable due to the vehicle being

extremely hot/cold, or dirt around a front sensor, etc. (→P. 260,

528)

→Follow the instructions displayed on the multi-information dis-

play. (→P. 260, 528)

If the PCS (Pre-Collision System) or VSC (Vehicle Stability Con-

trol) system is disabled, the PCS warning light will illuminate.

→P. 260

Slip indicator

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The Multi-terrain Select;

• The Crawl Control;

• The VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) system;

• Active TRAC (Traction Control) system;

• Trailer Sway Control; or

• The hill-start assist control system

The light will flash when any of the above systems other than the

Multi-terrain Select are operating.

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

522 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

(Flashes)

Low speed four-wheel drive indicator light

Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system if the light

continues flashing. (→P. 303)

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(Flashes)

Center differential lock indicator light

Indicates a malfunction in the four-wheel drive system if the light

continues flashing. (→P. 303)

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Open door warning light (warning buzzer)*2

Indicates that a door is not fully closed

→Check that all the doors are closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Indicates that remaining fuel is approximately 4.0 gal. (15.0 L,

3.3 Imp.gal.) or less

→Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

→Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center panel)

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*3

Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

→Fasten the seat belt.

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on or flashes to indi-

cate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

→P. 528

Tire pressure warning light

Indicates that:

•Flat tire

• Natural causes

• The tire pressure warning system is malfunctioning

→Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Handling method (→P. 525)

Power steering system warning light (warning buzzer)

Indicates a malfunction in the power steering system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(Flashes)

(U.S.A.)

(Flashes)

(Canada)

Parking brake indicator

Indicates that the parking brake is not fully engaged or released

→Operate the parking brake switch once again.

This light comes on when the parking brake is not released.*4 If the

light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is

operating normally.

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

523

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

*1: Brake system warning buzzer:

The buzzer sounds to indicate that the brake fluid level is low (with the vehicle

reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

*2: Open door warning buzzer:

The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is not fully

closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3mph [5 km/h]).

*3: Driver’s seat belt buzzer:

The driver’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not

fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer

sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer

sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound

intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will

sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Front passenger’s seat belt buzzer:

The front passenger’s seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or

her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehicle reaches a speed of

12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will

sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer

will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*4: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer sounds to indicate that the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle

having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Brake system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the electric parking brake system

→Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details/Actions

524 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front impact sensors, side

impact sensors (rear), side impact sensors (front door), safing sensor (rear), driver’s seat

belt buckle switch, driver’s seat position sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,

airbags, interconnecting wiring and power sources, front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system, “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights, seat belt pretensioners

and force limiters. (→P. 38)

■Front passenger detection sensor, seat belt reminder and warning buzzer

●If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor

may cause the warning light to flash and the warning buzzer to sound even if a passen-

ger is not sitting in the seat.

●If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passenger, and the warn-

ing light may not operate properly.

■If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following:

●Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.

●Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as

possible.

■If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator

light blinks

Take the specified steps. (→P. 305)

If the brake system warning light or the malfunction indicator light also comes on, or the

low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock indicator light

continues to blink after taking the specified steps, there may be a malfunction in the

engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able

to transfer between “H4” and “L4” modes, and the center differential lock may not be

able to be locked or unlocked. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer, immedi-

ately.

525

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

■When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Inspect the tires to check if a tire is punctured.

If a tire is punctured: →P. 532

If none of the tires are punctured:

Turn the engine switch off then turn it to IGNITION ON mode. Check if the tire pressure

warning light comes on or flashes.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on

After the temperature of the tires has lowered sufficiently, check the inflation pressure

of each tire and adjust them to the specified level.

If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, check

that the inflation pressure of each tire is at the specified level and perform initialization.

(→P. 487)

If the warning light does not turn off even after several minutes have elapsed, have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

If the tire pressure warning light flashes for 1 minute then stay on

There may be a malfunction in the tire pressure warning system. Have the vehicle

inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks

or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire

inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

■When a tire is replaced with a spare tire

The spare tire is also equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The

tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is low. If

a tire goes flat, even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the tire pressure

warning light does not turn off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the

proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few min-

utes.

■Conditions that the tire pressure warning system may not function properly

→P. 490

■Changing the engine oil

Make sure to reset oil change system

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

526 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■If both the ABS and the brake system warning lights remain on

Stop your vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact your Lexus dealer. The vehi-

cle will become extremely unstable during braking, and the ABS system may fail, which

could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

■If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehi-

cle control and result in death or serious injury.

●Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure

immediately.

●If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjust-

ment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to

the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Lexus dealer.

●Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose

control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

■If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

527

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

WARNING

■Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure moni-

toring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning

light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low

tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) mal-

function indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS

(tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pres-

sure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the

telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-

nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the

malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not

be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one

or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate

tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function

properly.

NOTICE

■To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly

Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning

system may not operate properly.

528

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on

or flashes in order to indicate that a mes-

sage is currently being displayed on the

instrument cluster.

Multi-information display

Handling Method

Follow the instructions of the message

on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning messages are shown again after the following actions have

been performed, contact your Lexus dealer.

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunctions, incor-

rectly performed operations, and messages that indicate a need for mainte-

nance. When a message is shown, perform the correction procedure

appropriate to the message.

529

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

The warning lights and warning buzzers operate as follows depending on the

content of the message. If a message indicates the need for inspection by a

dealer, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

*: A buzzer sounds the first time a message is shown on the multi-information display.

■System warning lights

The master warning light does not come on or flash in the following case. Instead, a sepa-

rate system warning light will come on along with a message or image shown on the

multi-information display.

●Indicates that the PCS (Pre-Collision System) is not currently functional

The PCS warning light comes on. (→P. 521)

Messages and warnings

System

warning

light

Warning

buzzer*Warning

Comes on Comes on Sounds Indicates an important situation, such as

when a system related to driving is malfunc-

tioning or that danger may result if the cor-

rection procedure is not performed

Comes on ⎯Sounds

⎯Comes on

or flashes Sounds Indicates an important situation, such as

when the systems shown on the multi-infor-

mation display may be malfunctioning

Flashes ⎯Sounds Indicates a situation, such as when damage

to the vehicle or danger may result

Comes on ⎯Does not

sound

Indicates a condition, such as malfunction of

electrical components, their condition, or

indicates the need for maintenance

Flashes ⎯Does not

sound

Indicates a situation, such as when an opera-

tion has been performed incorrectly, or indi-

cates how to perform an operation correctly

530 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■If “See Owner’s Manual” is shown

●If “Smart Access System Malfunction” is shown, this may be a malfunction.

Immediately have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

●If “Transmission Fluid Temp High” is shown, it indicates that the automatic transmission

fluid temperature is too high.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, shift the shift lever to P and wait until the

warning message and light go off. If the warning message and light go off, you may

start the vehicle again. If the warning message and light do not go off, contact your

Lexus dealer.

■If “Shift to P Before Exiting Vehicle” is shown

Message is displayed when the driver’s door is opened without turning the engine switch

to off with the shift lever in any position other than P.

Shift the shift lever to P.

■If “Power Turned Off to Save Battery” is shown

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off function.

Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and maintain that

level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery.

■When a message that indicates the need for the shift lever operation is shown

To prevent the shift lever from being operated incorrectly or the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly, a message that requires shifting the shift lever may be shown on the multi-

information display. In that case, follow the instruction of the message and shift the shift

lever.

■When “Headlight System Malfunction Visit Your Dealer” is displayed on the multi-

information display

The following systems may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus

dealer.

●The LED headlight system

●The automatic headlight leveling system

●Automatic High Beam

■If “Forward Camera System Unavailable” or “Forward Camera System Unavailable

Clean Windshield” is displayed (if equipped)

The following systems may be suspended until the problem shown in the message is

resolved.

●PCS (Pre-Collision System)

●LDA (Lane Departure Alert)

●Dynamic radar cruise control with full-speed range

●Automatic High Beam

■If “Engine Oil Level Low” is shown

Indicates that engine oil level is low.

Check the level of engine oil, and add if necessary.

This message may appear if the vehicle is stopped on a slope.

Move the vehicle to a level surface and check to see if the message disappears.

531

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

■If a following message is shown, take appropriate action and confirm that the message

has disappeared. (→P. 307)

●“Crawl Not Available Select L4 and Shift to [D] or [R] Position”

●“Crawl Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”

●“Turn Assist Function Not Available Check System Operation Conditions”

●“Turn Assist Function Not Available Activate Crawl Control”

■If “Maintenance Required Soon” is shown (U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance according to the driven distance on the maintenance

schedule* should be performed soon.

Comes on approximately 4500 miles (7200 km) after the message has been reset.

If necessary, perform maintenance.

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

■If “Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown (U.S.A. only)

Indicates that all maintenance is required to correspond to the driven distance on the

maintenance schedule*.

Comes on approximately 5000 miles (8000 km) after the message has been reset.

(The indicator will not work properly unless the message has been reset.)

Perform the necessary maintenance. Please reset the message after the maintenance is

performed (→P. 465)

*: Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.

■If “Oil Maintenance Required Soon” is shown

Indicates that the engine oil is scheduled to be changed. (The indicator will not work

properly unless the message has been reset.)

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary. After changing the engine oil, the mes-

sage should be reset. (→P. 475)

■If “Oil Maintenance Required Visit Your Dealer” is shown

Indicates that the engine oil should be changed. (The indicator will not work properly

unless the message has been reset.)

Check and change the engine oil, and oil filter by your Lexus dealer. After changing the

engine oil, the message should be reset. (→P. 475)

■If “Visit Your Dealer” is shown

The system or part shown on the multi-information display is malfunctioning. Have the

vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

■Warning buzzer

In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard due to being in a noisy location or audio

sound.

NOTICE

■While the engine oil level warning is displayed

Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.

532

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

●Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

●Set the parking brake.

●Shift the shift lever to “P”.

●Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC. (→P. 295)

●Stop the engine.

●Turn on the emergency flashers.

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with

the spare tire.

For details about tires: →P. 486

WARNING

■If you have a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond

repair, which could result in an accident.

Before jacking up the vehicle

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack

Spare tire

Tool box

533

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

WARNING

■Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle

suddenly falling off the jack.

●Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and

removing tire chains.

●Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on

this vehicle.

●Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

●Be sure to turn off the 4-Wheel AHC and stop the engine.

●Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

●Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

●When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

●Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

●Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or

near the vehicle will be injured.

■Using the jack handle

Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver, to prevent

the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

534 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Remove the cover.

Unhook the rubber band and take

out the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Loosen and remove the jack.

Remove the cover.

Take out the tool box.

Taking out the jack

Taking out the tool box

535

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Assembling the jack handle.

Remove the jack handle and the jack extension bar from the tool box and assemble by

following these steps.

Loosen the screw using a screw-

driver.

Assemble the jack handle and the

jack handle extension bar and

tighten the screw.

Check that the screw is firmly tight-

ened.

Open the cover.

Insert the jack handle extension into

the lowering screw.

Lower

Raise

Place a rag under the jack handle

extension to protect the back door.

Taking out the spare tire

536 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Lower the spare tire completely to

the ground.

Pull out the spare tire and remove

the holding bracket and spare wheel

cover.

Chock the tires.

Replacing a flat tire

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Rear Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

537

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

21-inch tires: Pry off the wheel orna-

ment, using the beveled end of the

wheel ornament remover as shown.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one

turn).

Assembling the jack handle.

Remove the jack handle, jack extension bar and jack handle bar from the tool box and

assemble by following these steps.

Loosen the bolts and the screw

using either the jack handle or a

screwdriver.

Assemble the jack handle exten-

sion bar and the jack handle bar

and tighten the bolts.

Check that the bolts are firmly tight-

ened.

538 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Assemble the jack handle exten-

sion bar and the jack handle and

tighten the screw.

Check that the screw is firmly tight-

ened.

Position the jack at the jack points as

shown.

Front

Under the chassis frame side rail

Rear

Under the rear axle housing

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

539

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Remove all the wheel nuts and the

tire.

When resting the tire on the ground,

place the tire so that the wheel design

faces up to avoid scratching the wheel

surface.

WARNING

■Replacing a flat tire

●Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:

• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from under the

vehicle.

• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in handling the

ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immediately after the

vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes

will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts

while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

• Turn off the vehicle height control.

The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and you may

catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident. (→P. 295)

●Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire

to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to

bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts

to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing a serious accident. Remove any oil or

grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4

kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically designed for

that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads or bolt holes

of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while

the vehicle is moving.

■Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door

In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back door main

switch (→P. 124). Failure to do so may cause the back door to operate unintentionally if

the power back door switch is accidentally touched, resulting in hands and fingers

being caught and injured.

540 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Remove any dirt or foreign matter

from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact

surface, the wheel nuts may loosen

while the vehicle is in motion, and the

tire may come off the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely

tighten each nut by hand to approxi-

mately the same amount.

Turn the nut washers until they come

into contact with the disc wheel.

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or three

times in the order shown in the illus-

tration.

Tightening torque:

97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)

Installing the spare tire

Disc wheel

Washer

541

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Reinstall the wheel ornament.

20-inch tires 21-inch tires

Remove the center wheel ornament

from the flat tire by pushing from the

reverse side, and reinstall it.

Make sure to push the center part of

the wheel ornament.

542 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Lay down the tire with the valve stem

facing up and install the spare wheel

cover.

Install the holding bracket, inserting

the claw into the wheel lug nut hole.

Turn the jack handle extension

clockwise to take up slack in the

chain.

Then, check to ensure the claw is in the

wheel lug nut hole and the holding

bracket is centered in the wheel hub.

Holding bracket

Claw

WARNING

■Stowing the flat tire

Failure to follow steps listed under stowing the tire may result in damage to the spare

tire carrier and loss of the tire, which could result in death or serious injury.

Stowing the flat tire, jack and all tools

incorrect

correct

543

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Raise the tire.

While raising, secure the tire, taking

care that the tire goes straight up with-

out catching on any surrounding part, to

prevent it from flying forward during a

collision or sudden braking.

After the tire goes half way up, check

that the suspended chain is able to enter

the tire hole, for proper storage.

Tightening torque:

33.2 ft•lbf (45 N•m, 4.6 kgf•m)

Confirm that the tire is not loose

after tightening:

Push and pull the tire

Try rotating

Visually check to ensure the tire is

not hung on surrounding parts.

If looseness or misassembly exists, repeat step and step .

Repeat step , any time the tire is lowered or disturbed.

Stow the tools and jack securely.

■After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 487)

NOTICE

■When stowing the flat tire

Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle underbody.

■When replacing the tires

●When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

●Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.

■To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and trans-

mitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Lexus dealer or

other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 487)

544

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Refuel the vehicle.

●The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine again following correct starting procedures.

(→P. 205)

●There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (→P. 75)

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●The battery may be discharged. (→P. 549)

●The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem

such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. However, an interim measure is available

to start the engine. (→P. 545)

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being

followed (→P. 205), consider each of the following points:

The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates nor-

mally.

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights

are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume.

The starter motor does not turn over.

545

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

One of the following may be the cause of the problem:

●One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

●The battery may be discharged. (→P. 549)

●There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact your Lexus dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures

are unknown.

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim

measure to start the engine if the engine switch is functioning normally.

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in P.

Set the engine switch to the ACCESSORY mode.

Push and hold the engine switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the

brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be mal-

functioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights

do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.

Emergency start function

546

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly

Use the mechanical key (→P. 111) in

order to perform the following opera-

tions (driver’s door only):

Locks all the doors

Closes the windows and moon roof*

(turn and hold)

Unlocks the doors

Turning the key rearward unlocks the

driver’s door. Turning the key once again

unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows and moon roof* (turn and hold)

*: These settings must be customized at your Lexus dealer.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted

(→P. 134) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is

depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless

remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be opened and

the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions

547

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

Ensure that the shift lever is in P and depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Lexus emblem side of the

electronic key to the engine switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a

buzzer sounds and the engine switch

will turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart access system with

push-button start is deactivated in cus-

tomization setting, the engine switch will

turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that is shown on the

multi-information display.

Press the engine switch.

In the event that the engine still cannot be started, contact your Lexus dealer.

■Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping

the engine.

■Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic

key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted. (→P. 503)

■Changing engine switch modes

Release the brake pedal and press the engine switch in step above. The engine does

not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 206)

■Alarm

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.

If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm

may be triggered. (→P. 77)

■When the electronic key does not work properly

●Make sure that the smart access system with push-button start has not been deacti-

vated in the customization setting. If it is off, turn the function on.

(Customizable features: →P. 580)

●Check if battery-saving mode is set. If it is set, cancel the function. (→P. 134)

Starting the engine

548 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■When using the mechanical key and operating the power windows or moon roof

Operate the power window or moon roof after checking to make sure that there is no

possibility of any passenger having any of their body parts caught in the window or

moon roof.

Also, do not allow children to operate the mechanical key. It is possible for children and

other passengers to get caught in the power window or moon roof.

549

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt

battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.

Confirm that the electronic key is

being carried.

When connecting the jumper (or

booster) cables, depending on the

situation, the alarm may activate and

doors locked. (→P. 79)

Open the hood. Remove the engine compartment cover. (→P. 474)

Connect the jumper cables.

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illus-

tration.

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s bat-

tery is discharged.

You can also call your Lexus dealer or qualified repair shop.

550 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and

maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of

your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the engine switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to

IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact

reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer, as soon

as possible.

■Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

■Avoiding a discharged battery

●Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

●Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low

speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

■Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not

in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of certain electrical appliances. If

the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be

unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

■When the battery is removed or discharged

The power back door must be initialized. (→P. 126)

551

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

WARNING

■Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas

that may be emitted from the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not

unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

●Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

●Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.

■Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts

contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling

the battery.

●When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow

any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

●Do not lean over the battery.

●In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately

wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be

received.

●Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other bat-

tery-related parts.

●Do not allow children near the battery.

NOTICE

■When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of

the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

552

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air conditioning system, and

then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator

core (radiator) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks,

immediately contact your Lexus

dealer.

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

●The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (→P. 88) enters the

red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced. (For example, the vehicle

speed does not increase.)

●Steam is coming from under the hood.

Correction procedures

553

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on the res-

ervoir.

Reservoir

“F” line

“L” line

Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emergency if

coolant is unavailable.

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the air

conditioning condenser cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks

from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a

cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow.

If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact your Lexus dealer.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Lexus dealer.

554 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■When inspecting under the hood of your vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury such as burns.

●If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the steam

has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot.

●Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and

belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in seri-

ous injury.

●Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radi-

ator are hot. High temperature steam or coolant could spray out.

NOTICE

■When adding engine coolant

Add coolant slowly after the engine has cooled down sufficiently. Adding cool coolant

to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

■To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

●Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust etc.).

●Do not use any coolant additive.

555

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

When trouble arises

7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help pro-

vide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the D or R position and release the parking brake. Then,

while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

■When it is difficult to free the vehicle

■Extra high mode

→P. 299

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes

stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:

Press to turn off Active TRAC.

556 7-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

WARNING

■When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding

area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also

lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

■When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an acci-

dent and result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

■To avoid damaging the transmission and other components

●Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more than nec-

essary.

●If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed, the vehicle

may require towing to be freed.

●When a warning message for the automatic transmission fluid temperature is dis-

played while attempting to free a stuck vehicle, immediately remove your foot from

the accelerator pedal and wait until the warning message disappears. Otherwise, the

transmission may become damaged. (→P. 528)

557

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Vehicle specifications

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ................. 558

Fuel information..........................566

Tire information ..........................569

8-2. Customization

Customizable features...........580

8-3. Initialization

Items to initialize.........................593

558

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

*1: Unladen vehicles

*2: Vehicles with roof antenna

*3: Vehicles with 20-inch tires

*4: Vehicles with 21-inch tires

Dimensions and weights

Overall length 200.0 in. (5080 mm)

Overall width 78.0 in. (1980 mm)

Overall height*173.4 in. (1865 mm)

75.2 in. (1910 mm)*2

Wheelbase 112.2 in. (2850 mm)

Tread

Front 64.8 in. (1645 mm)*3

65.0 in. (1650 mm)*4

Rear 64.6 in. (1640 mm)*3

65.0 in. (1650 mm)*4

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage) 1285 lb. (580 kg)

TWR

(trailer weight +

cargo weight)

With brake 7000 lb. (3175 kg)

Without

brake 1000 lb. (454 kg)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

559

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in register-

ing the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top

left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the Certifica-

tion Label.

■Engine number

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown.

Vehicle identification

560

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine

oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level

on the dipstick.

Engine

Model 5.7L V8 (3UR-FE)

Type 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.70 × 4.02 in. (94.0 × 102.0 mm)

Displacement 345.6 cu.in. (5663 cm3)

Valve clearance Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal.)

Lubrication system

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill — reference*)

With filter

Without filter 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)

7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

561

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus

approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the following

grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for

good fuel economy and good start-

ing in cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE

5W-20 oil may be used. However, it

must be replaced with SAE 0W-20

at the next oil change.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold

startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of

the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the

oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher

value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or

under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Cer-

tification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you

should use.

Outside temperature

562

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity (Reference) 17.1 qt. (16.2 L, 14.3 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-

borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic

acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make

Gap DENSO SK20HR11

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

NOTICE

■Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage at 68°F

(20°C): 12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged

12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged

11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine

and all lights are turned off.)

Charging rates 5 A max.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

563

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the

factory.

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of

matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus

dealer for further details.

The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, con-

tact your Lexus dealer.

Differential

Oil capacity

Front

Rear 2.01 qt. (1.90 L, 1.67 Imp.qt.)

4.44 qt. (4.20 L, 3.70 Imp.qt.)

Oil type and viscosity Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT 75W-85

GL-5 or equivalent

Automatic transmission

Fluid capacity 10.7 qt. (10.1 L, 8.9 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

■Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration

in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-

mately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

564

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

*: Your Lexus vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at the factory.

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or an equivalent of

matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact your Lexus dealer

for further details.

*: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

while the engine is running

Transfer

Oil capacity 1.53 qt. (1.45 L, 1.28 Imp.qt.)

Oil type*Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or equivalent

Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W

Brakes

Pedal clearance*4.5 in. (114 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1.0 ⎯ 6.0 mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

Chassis lubrication

Propeller shafts

Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yoke Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chassis

grease, NLGI No.2 or Lithium base chassis

grease, NLGI No.2

Steering

Free play Less than 1.18 in. (30 mm)

Power steering fluid type Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON® II or III

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

565

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

20-inch tires

21-inch tires

Suspension

Fluid type Suspension fluid AHC

Tires and wheels

Tire size 285/50R20 112V

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Normal driving

Front:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Spare:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Trailer towing

Add 2 psi (10 kPa, 0.1 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the rear

tires.

Wheel size 20 × 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)

Tire size 275/50R21 113V XL

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Normal driving

Front:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Spare:

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Trailer towing

Add 6 psi (40 kPa, 0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) to the

rear tires.

Wheel size 21 X 8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 97 ft•lbf (131 N•m, 13.4 kgf•m)

566

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Fuel information

■Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are

using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not

correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

■Gasoline quality standards

●Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.A., Europe and Japan have developed a specifi-

cation for fuel quality called the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC), which is expected

to be applied worldwide.

●The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In

the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.

●The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and improves

customer satisfaction through better performance.

■Recommendation of the use of gasoline containing detergent additives

●Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid the

build-up of engine deposits.

●All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to clean and/or

keep clean intake systems, per EPA’s lowest additives concentration program.

●Lexus strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more informa-

tion on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official

website www.toptiergas.com.

■Recommendation of the use of low emissions gasoline

Gasolines containing oxygenates such as ethers and ethanol, as well as reformulated

gasolines, are available in some cities. These fuels are typically acceptable for use, pro-

viding they meet other fuel requirements.

Lexus recommends these fuels, since the formulations allow for reduced vehicle emis-

sions.

You must only use unleaded gasoline.

Select premium unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (Research

Octane Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance

and fuel economy. If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine

may occur and may void the vehicle warranty.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. .

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

567

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

●If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 91.

●Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

■Non-recommendation of the use of gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains on octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopenta-

dienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing

MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,

contact your Lexus dealer for service.

■If your engine knocks

●Consult your Lexus dealer.

●You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driv-

ing uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

●Use only gasoline containing up to 15% etha-

nol.

DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that

could contain more than 15% ethanol, includ-

ing from any pump labeled E30, E50, E85

(which are only some examples of fuel con-

taining more than 15% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline con-

taining more than 15% ethanol.

(30% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

568

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

NOTICE

■Notice on fuel quality

●Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be damaged.

●Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters

causing the emission control system to malfunction.

●Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

●Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previ-

ously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle warranty.

■Fuel-related poor driveability

If poor driveability (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.) is encoun-

tered after using a different type of fuel, discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

■When refueling with gasohol

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

569

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Tire information

Tire size (→P. 571)

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 570)

Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 486)

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the

plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “RADIAL” is a bias-ply

tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly put into the tire. A tube type tire

has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 575)

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 575)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tires or all season tires (→P. 490)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer

tire.

Typical tire symbols

570

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

DOT symbol*

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

Manufacturer’s code

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards.

Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Type A Type B

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

571

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

■Typical tire size information

The illustration indicates typical tire

size.

Tire use (P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index

(2 digits or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

■Tire dimensions

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

Tire size

572

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

Tire section names

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

573

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Trans-

portation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with

information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this infor-

mation.

■DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in

addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

■Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire

when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test

course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on

the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use.

Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

■Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they rep-

resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight

ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

574

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

■Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s

resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and

reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test

wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and

not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in com-

bination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

575

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for

three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1

mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pres-

sure The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may

be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation

pressure Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manu-

facturer

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items

which may be replaced) of automatic transmission,

power steering, power brakes, power windows, power

seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are

available as factory-installed equipment (whether

installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment,

including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,

and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional

weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle

weight

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(d) Production options weight

Normal occupant weight 150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified

in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the

third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production

options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the

standard items which they replace, not previously con-

sidered in curb weight or accessory weight, including

heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty

battery, and special trim

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly

upon which the tire beads are seated

576

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation The industry manufacturer’s designation for a rim by

style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity) The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg)

times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on

the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by dis-

tributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded

vehicle weight, and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the

tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by dis-

tributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory

weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in

accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated

tire

Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped

or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the

rim

Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the

bead

Bias ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to

the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less

than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber

which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of

the tire extending to cord material

Tire related term Meaning

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

577

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim

system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges

pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on

the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the

rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher

inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire

that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the

carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white

lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or deeper than

the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,

(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire

that has a particular side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily

intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose

passenger vehicles

Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given

inflation pressure

Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible

inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may

be inflated

Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension

requirements

Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or inner-

liner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Tire related term Meaning

578

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-1. Specifications

Overall width The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-

walls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to label-

ing, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose

passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric

and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an

automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains

the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to

the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher

inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

Section width The linear distance between the exteriors of the side-

walls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to

labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord

material in the sidewall

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater

than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard Ref-

erence Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as

described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method

for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on

Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked

with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

Tire related term Meaning

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

579

8-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

*:Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various des-

ignated seating capacities

Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be

any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the

road

Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI) The projections within the principal grooves designed

to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the

tread

Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly

securely during testing

Tire related term Meaning

Designated seating capac-

ity, Number of occupants Vehicle normal load, Num-

ber of occupants Occupant distribution in a

normally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second seat, 1

in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second seat,

2 in third seat, 1 in fourth

seat

580

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

Customizable features

■Changing by using the Remote Touch screen

Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

Select “Setup” on the “Menu” screen and select “Vehicle”.

Various setting can be changed. Refer to the list of settings that can be

changed for details.

■Changing by using the multi-information display

Press or of the meter control switches, select .

Press or of the meter control switches, select the item or the

desired setting, and then press .

To go back to the previous screen, press .

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized

to suit your preferences. The settings of these features can be changed by

using the multi-information display, by using the Remote Touch screen or at

your Lexus dealer.

Customizing vehicle features

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

581

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being

customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Settings that can be changed using the Remote Touch screen

Settings that can be changed using the multi-information display

Settings that can be changed by your Lexus dealer

Definition of symbols: O = Available, – =Not available

■Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 132)

■Wireless remote control (→P. 110)

Customizable features

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Smart access system with

push-button start On Off O — O

Smart door unlocking Driver’s door All the doors O — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Wireless remote control On Off — — O

Unlocking operation

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

steps

All doors unlocked

in one step O — O

Power back door operation Push and hold

One short push — — O

Push twice — — O

Off — — O

Alarm (panic mode) On Off — — O

582

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■Smart access system with push-button start (→P. 132) and wireless remote

control (→P. 110)

■Door lock (→P. 115)

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Operation signal (Emer-

gency flashers) On Off O — O

Adjust the volume of confir-

mation buzzer sounds

when the vehicle is locked

or unlocked

Off

O — O

1 to 7

Open door warning func-

tion (when locking the vehi-

cle) On Off — — O

Time elapsed before auto-

matic door lock function is

activated if door is not

opened after being

unlocked

60 seconds

Off

O — O30 seconds

120 seconds

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Unlocking using a mechan-

ical key

Driver’s door

unlocked in one

step, all doors

unlocked in two

steps

All doors unlocked

in one step — — O

Automatic door lock Shifting the shift

lever to position

other than P

Off

O — O

Vehicle speed is

approximately

12 mph (20 km/h)

or higher

Automatic door unlock Shifting the shift

lever to P

Off

O — O

Driver’s door is

opened

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

583

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■Power back door (→P. 122)

*1: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote control can also

be made only by pushing and holding.

*2: In this case, the power back door operation using the wireless remote control can also

be made only by pushing twice.

*3: The back door can be opened using the wireless remote control after unlocking the

back door.

■Power windows (→P. 165)

*: The settings of the moon roof are changed in conjunction with the settings of the

power windows.

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Power back door switch

operation Push and hold One short push — — O

Operation signal Off On — — O

Back door opener switch

automatic open function On Off — — O

Wireless remote control

linked operation (one

motion) On*1On (Push twice)*2

— — O

Off *1, 3

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Mechanical key linked

operation (close)*Off On — — O

Mechanical key linked

operation (open)*Off On — — O

Wireless remote control

linked operation (open)*Off On — — O

Power windows open warn-

ing buzzer On Off — — O

Buzzer sounds if operated

using wireless remote con-

trol On Off — — O

584

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■Moon roof (→P. 168)

*: The settings of the power windows are changed in conjunction with the settings of the

moon roof.

■Automatic light control system (→P. 221)

*: Vehicles sold outside Canada

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Mechanical key linked

operation*Off On — — O

Linked operation of com-

ponents when mechanical

key is used Slide only Tilt only — — O

Wireless remote control

linked operation (open)*Off On — — O

Linked operation of com-

ponents when wireless

remote control is used Slide only Tilt only — — O

Moon roof open warning

buzzer On Off — — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Light sensor sensitivity Standard -2 to 2 O — O

Daytime running light sys-

tem On Off*O — O

Time elapsed before head-

lights automatically turn off

after doors are closed 30 seconds

Off

O — O60 seconds

90 seconds

Welcome lighting illumina-

tion control On Off — — O

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

585

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■Illumination (→P. 417)

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Interior lights illumination

control On Off — — O

Time period before the inte-

rior lights turn off 15 seconds

Off

O — O7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation after the engine

switch is turned off On Off — — O

Operation when the doors

are unlocked On Off — — O

Operation when you

approach the vehicle with

the electronic key on your

person (when the interior

light switch is door position)

On Off — — O

Shift lever light On Off — — O

Footwell lights On Off — — O

Door trim lights and foot-

well lights illumination con-

trol On Off — — O

Door trim lights On Off — — O

Operation of the outer foot

lights when you approach

the vehicle with the elec-

tronic key on your person

On Off — — O

Operation of the outer foot

lights when the doors are

unlocked with the power

door lock switch

On Off — — O

Operation of the running

board lights when you

approach the vehicle with

the electronic key on your

person

On Off — — O

Operation of the running

board lights the doors are

unlocked with the power

door lock switch

On Off — — O

586

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■Intuitive parking assist (→P. 287)

■Automatic air conditioning system (→P. 399)

Operation of the running

board lights when a door is

opened On Off — — O

Sensitivity of the ambient

light sensor used for dim-

ming the meter lights etc. Standard -2 to 2 — — O

Sensitivity of the ambient

light sensor used for bright-

ening the meter lights etc. Standard -2 to 2 — — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Detection distance of the

front center sensor Far Near O — O

Detection distance of the

rear center sensor Far Near O — O

Alert Volume (alert volume

can be adjusted) 31 to 5 O — O

Display setting (when intui-

tive parking assist is operat-

ing)

All sensors dis-

played Display off O — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Exhaust gas sensor sensitiv-

ity Standard -3 to 3 O — O

A/C Auto switch operation Auto Manual O — O

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

587

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■Rear window wiper and washer (→P. 235)

■Driving position memory (→P. 151)

■Outside rear view mirrors (→P. 162)

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Drip prevention function On Off — — O

Rear window wiper opera-

tion linked with washer On Off — — O

Linked operation when the

shift lever in R position On Off — — O

Times of the linked opera-

tion when the shift lever in R

position Once Continuously — — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Driver’s seat movement

when exiting the vehicle Standard Off O — O

Partial

Selection the door linking

driving position memory

with door unlock operation Driver’s door All doors — — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Automatic folding/extend-

ing operation

Linked to locking/

unlocking of the

doors

Off

— — O

Linked to engine

switch operation

Linked mirror function

when reversing On Off — — O

588

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■Seat heaters and ventilators* (→P. 413)

*: If equipped

■Heated steering wheel* (→P. 413)

*: If equipped

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Adjustment of the front seat

heater temperature or the

ventilator fan speed during

automatic operation (indi-

vidual seat adjustment

available)

Level 3 (standard) Level 1 (low) to

level 5 (high) O — O

Adjustment of the rear seat

heater temperature or the

ventilator fan speed during

automatic operation (indi-

vidual seat adjustment

available)

Level 3 (standard) Level 1 (low) to

level 5 (high) O — O

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Automatic steering wheel

heating On Off O — O

Time until automatic steer-

ing wheel heating turns off Level 3 (standard) Level 1 (short) to

level 5 (long) O — O

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

589

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■Drive mode customization (→P. 284)

■Turn signal lever (→P. 217)

Function Default setting Customized

setting

Powertrain Normal Eco O — —

Power

Chassis Normal Sport O — —

Comfort

Automatic air conditioning

system Normal Eco O — —

Function Default setting Customized

setting

The number of times the

turn signal lights flash auto-

matically when the turn sig-

nal lever is moved to the

first position during a lane

change

— — O

Off

590

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■Multi-information display (→P. 91)

*1: The default setting varies according to countries.

*2: Some status screens cannot be registered (indicated on the multi-information display)

*3: 2 of the following items: current fuel consumption, average fuel economy (after reset),

average fuel economy (after refuel), average fuel economy (after start), average vehi-

cle speed (after reset), average vehicle speed (after start), distance (driving range),

distance (after start), elapsed time (after reset), elapsed time (after start), blank

Function Default

setting Customized

setting

Language English French O O –

Spanish

Units*1miles (MPG US)

miles

(MPG Imperial)

O O –

km (L/100 km)

km (km/

Eco Driving Indicator Light On Off – O –

switch settings Drive

information 1 Desired status

screen*2– O –

Drive information screen dis-

played on the first screen of

(Drive information 1)

Current fuel

consumption

*3– O –

Average fuel

economy

(after reset)

Drive information screen dis-

played on the second screen

(Drive information 2)

Distance (range)

*3– O –

Average speed

(after reset)

Pop-up display On Off – O –

Accent color Color 1 Color 2 O O –

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

591

8-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

■LDA (Lane Departure Alert)* (→P. 261)

*: If equipped

■BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) (→P. 363)

Function Default

setting Customized

setting

Alert method (Steering

vibration) (Buzzer) — O —

Alert sensitivity Standard High — O —

Vehicle sway warning On Off — O —

Vehicle sway warning sensi-

tivity Standard Low — O —

High

Function Default setting Customized set-

ting

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor) On Off — O —

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic

Alert function) On Off — O —

Outside rear view mirror indi-

cator brightness Bright Dim O — O

Alert timing for presence of

approaching vehicle (BSM

function only) Intermediate

Early

O — O

Late

Only when in

blind spot

RCTA buzzer volume Level 2 Level 1 O — O

Level 3

592

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-2. Customization

■HUD (Head-up Display)* (→P. 100)

*: If equipped

■Vehicle customization

●When smart access system with push-button start is turned off, unlock door cannot be

selected.

●When doors are not opened after unlocking and are then automatically re-locked, a

signal will be given if Operation signal (Emergency flashers) or Operation signal

(Buzzer) are set to on.

■When setting using the multi-information display

When using the vehicle switches to set an item that can also be set using the touch

screen, the item displayed on the Remote Touch will not change immediately.

If the engine switch is first turned to off, the screen display will change once the engine

switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode again.

■When customizing using the Remote Touch

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift lever to P. Also,

to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running while customizing the features.

Function Default

setting Customized

setting

Driving support display

(Navigation system*)On Off — O —

Driving support display

(Driving assist*)On Off — O —

Driving support display

(compass*)On Off — O —

Driving support display

(audio*)On Off — O —

WARNING

■During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the vehicle is

parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust

gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This

may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

■During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while customizing fea-

tures.

593

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-3. Initialization

Vehicle specifications

Items to initialize

*: If equipped

The following item must be initialized for normal system operation such cases

as the battery being reconnected, or maintenance being performed on the

vehicle:

Item When to initialize Reference

Message indicating mainte-

nance is required (U.S.A. only) After the maintenance is per-

formed P. 465

Power back door

• After reconnecting or changing

the battery with power back door

opened

• After changing a fuse with power

back door opened

P. 122

Tire pressure warning system

• When the set tire pressure has

been changed before towing.

• When rotating the tires in above

situation.

P. 486

Multi-terrain Monitor After reconnecting or changing the

battery P. 361

Engine oil maintenance data*After the maintenance is per-

formed P. 475

594

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

8-3. Initialization

595

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For owners

Reporting safety defects

for U.S. owners.....................................596

Seat belt instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)..............................................597

SRS airbag instructions

for Canadian owners

(in French)..............................................599

596

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway

Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus

Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual

problems between you, your dealer, or Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales,

U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov ; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC

20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

597

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For owners

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

●Tirez sur la ceinture épaulière

jusqu’à ce qu’elle recouvre entière-

ment l’épaule; elle ne doit cependant

pas toucher le cou ni glisser de

l’épaule.

●Placez la ceinture abdominale le

plus bas possible sur les hanches.

●Réglez la position du dossier. Tenez-

vous assis bien au fond du siège, le

dos droit.

●Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de sécurité.

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from

the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

Utilisation adéquate des ceintures de sécurité

598

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

■Ceintures de sécurité

Avec un chiffon ou une éponge, nettoyez à l’aide d’un savon doux et de l’eau

tiède. Vérifiez aussi les ceintures régulièrement pour vous assurer qu’elles ne

présentent pas d’usure excessive, d’effilochage ou de coupures.

Entretien et soin

AVERTISSEMENT

■Lorsque vous utilisez la ceinture du siège central de la troisième rangée de sièges

■Dommages et usure de la ceinture de sécurité

Vérifiez périodiquement le système de ceintures de sécurité. Vérifiez qu’il n’y a pas de

coupures, d’effilochures ni de pièces desserrées. N’utilisez pas une ceinture de sécu-

rité endommagée avant qu’elle ne soit remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité endom-

magée ne peut pas protéger les occupants contre des blessures graves, voire

mortelles.

N’utilisez pas la ceinture du siège central de la

troisième rangée de sièges si l’une des boucles

est détachée. Attacher une seule boucle pour-

rait occasionner des blessures graves, voire

mortelles, en cas de freinage ou de dérapage

brusques, ou d’accident.

599

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

For owners

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

(in French)

◆Coussins gonflables SRS avant

Coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur/coussin gonflable SRS du passager

avant

Peuvent aider à protéger la tête et la poitrine du conducteur et du passager

avant contre les impacts avec des composants intérieurs

Coussins gonflables SRS de protection des genoux

Peuvent aider à protéger le conducteur et le passager avant

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted

from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in

English.

600

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

◆Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux et en rideau

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux avant

Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges avant

Coussins gonflables SRS latéraux arrière

Peuvent aider à protéger le torse des occupants des sièges latéraux de la

deuxième rangée de sièges

Coussins gonflables SRS en rideau

●Peuvent aider à protéger principalement la tête des occupants des

sièges latéraux

●Peuvent aider à empêcher les occupants d’tre éjectés du véhicule en

cas de tonneaux

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

601

For owners

Composants du système de coussins gonflables SRS

Coussins gonflables de protection

des genoux

Coussins gonflables en rideau

Coussin gonflable du passager

avant

Capteurs d’impact latéral (portière

avant)

Coussins gonflables latéraux avant

Lampe témoin SRS

Capteurs d’impact latéral (arrière)

Coussins gonflables latéraux arrière

(sièges latéraux de la deuxième

rangée de sièges)

Coussin gonflable du conducteur

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture

de sécurité du conducteur

Capteur de sûreté (arrière)

Module de capteur de coussin

gonflable

Capteurs d’impact avant

Limiteurs de force et dispositifs de

tension des ceintures de sécurité

(sièges avant)

Capteur de position du siège du

conducteur

Voyants “AIR BAG ON” et “AIR

BAG OFF”

Contacteur de boucle de ceinture

de sécurité du passager avant

Système de classification de

l’occupant du siège du passager

avant (ECU et capteurs)

Dispositifs de tension des ceintures

de sécurité (sièges latéraux de la

deuxième rangée de sièges)

602

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Votre véhicule est doté de COUSSINS GONFLABLES ÉVOLUÉS dont la

conception s’appuie sur les normes de sécurité des véhicules à moteur améri-

cains (FMVSS208). Le module de capteur de coussin gonflable (ECU) contrôle

le déploiement des coussins gonflables en fonction des informations obtenues

des capteurs et d’autres éléments affichés dans le diagramme des composants

du système ci-dessus. Ces informations comprennent des données relatives à la

gravité de l’accident et aux occupants. Au moment du déploiement des coussins

gonflables, une réaction chimique se produit dans les gonfleurs de coussin gon-

flable et les coussins gonflables se remplissent rapidement d’un gaz non toxique

pour aider à limiter le mouvement des occupants.

AVERTISSEMENT

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Observez les précautions suivantes en ce qui concerne les coussins gonflables SRS.

Les négliger pourrait occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

●Le conducteur et tous les passagers du véhicule doivent porter leur ceinture de sécu-

rité de la manière appropriée.

Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplémentaires qui doivent être uti-

lisés avec les ceintures de sécurité.

●Le coussin gonflable SRS du conducteur se déploie avec une force considérable et

peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment lorsque le

conducteur se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. La National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), aux États-Unis, fait les recommandations suivantes :

La zone à risque du coussin gonflable du conducteur couvre 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm)

de la zone de déploiement du coussin gonflable. Pour assurer une marge de sécurité

suffisante, restez à 10 in. (250 mm) du coussin gonflable. Cette distance est mesu-

rée depuis le centre du volant jusqu’à votre sternum. Si maintenant vous vous tenez

assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite

de plusieurs manières :

• Reculez votre siège à la position maximale vous permettant d’atteindre encore

aisément les pédales.

• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège. Même si les véhicules sont conçus diffé-

remment, la plupart des conducteurs peuvent maintenir une distance de 10 in.

(250 mm), même si leur siège se trouve complètement vers l’avant, simplement

en inclinant un peu le dossier du siège vers l’arrière. Si la visibilité avant est

moindre après avoir incliné le dossier de votre siège, utilisez un coussin ferme et

non glissant pour être assis plus haut ou relevez le siège si cette option est dispo-

nible sur votre véhicule.

• Si votre volant est réglable en hauteur, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela vous permet

d’orienter le coussin gonflable vers votre buste plutôt que vers votre tête et vers

votre cou.

Le siège doit être réglé de la manière recommandée ci-dessus par la NHTSA, tout

en gardant le contrôle des pédales et du volant, ainsi que la vue sur les commandes

du tableau de bord.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

603

For owners

AVERTISSEMENT

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

●Le coussin gonflable SRS du passager avant se déploie également avec une force

considérable et peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, notamment

lorsque le passager avant se trouve très près du coussin gonflable. Le siège du pas-

sager avant doit se trouver le plus loin possible du coussin gonflable et le dossier doit

être réglé de manière à ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit.

●Le déploiement d’un coussin gonflable risque d’infliger des blessures graves, voire

mortelles, aux bébés et aux enfants mal assis et/ou mal attachés. Un bébé ou un

enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de sécurité doit être correctement retenu à

l’aide d’un dispositif de retenue pour enfants. Lexus recommande vivement de placer

et d’attacher correctement tous les bébés et tous les enfants sur les sièges arrière du

véhicule à l’aide de dispositifs de retenue adaptés. Les sièges arrière sont plus sécu-

ritaires pour les bébés et les enfants que le siège du passager avant.

●N’installez jamais un dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route sur le

siège du passager avant, même si le voyant “AIR BAG OFF” est allumé.

En cas d’accident, la force et la vitesse de déploiement du coussin gonflable du pas-

sager avant pourraient infliger à l’enfant des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le

dispositif de retenue pour enfants de type dos à la route était installé sur le siège du

passager avant.

●Si la rallonge de ceinture de sécurité a été

reliée aux boucles des ceintures de sécurité

des sièges avant sans avoir aussi été attachée

à la plaque de blocage des ceintures de sécu-

rité, les coussins gonflables SRS avant con-

sidéreront que le conducteur et le passager

avant portent tout de même leur ceinture de

sécurité même si les ceintures de sécurité ne

sont pas attachées. Les coussins gonflables

SRS avant peuvent alors ne pas s’activer cor-

rectement lors d’une collision, ce qui pourrait

occasionner des blessures graves, voire mor-

telles, en cas de collision. Assurez-vous de

toujours porter la ceinture de sécurité avec la

rallonge de ceinture de sécurité.

604

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

AVERTISSEMENT

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

●Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du siège et

ne vous appuyez pas sur la planche de bord.

●Ne laissez pas un enfant se tenir face au cous-

sin gonflable SRS du passager avant ni s’asse-

oir sur les genoux d’un passager avant.

●Ne laissez pas les occupants des sièges avant

tenir des objets sur leurs genoux.

●Ne vous appuyez pas sur la portière ou sur le

brancard de pavillon, ni sur les montants

avant, latéraux ou arrière.

●Ne laissez personne s’agenouiller face à la

portière sur les sièges des passagers ni sortir

la tête ou les mains à l’extérieur du véhicule.

●Ne fixez et n’appuyez rien sur des zones

telles que la planche de bord, le tampon de

volant ou encore la partie inférieure du tab-

leau de bord.

Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projec-

tiles lorsque les coussins gonflables SRS du

conducteur, du passager avant et de protec-

tion des genoux se déploient.

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

605

For owners

AVERTISSEMENT

■Précautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

●N’accrochez pas de cintres ni d’autres objets rigides sur les crochets porte-vête-

ments. Tous ces objets pourraient se transformer en projectiles et vous occasionner

des blessures graves, voire mortelles, en cas de déploiement des coussins gonflables

SRS en rideau.

●Si le recouvrement de vinyle est placé sur la zone de déploiement du coussin gon-

flable SRS de protection des genoux, veillez à le retirer.

●N’utilisez pas d’accessoires recouvrant les parties du siège où les coussins gonflables

SRS latéraux se déploient, car ces accessoires pourraient entraver le déploiement

des coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empêcher les coussins gonfla-

bles latéraux de se déployer correctement, rendre le système inopérant ou provo-

quer accidentellement le déploiement des coussins gonflables latéraux,

occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

●Ne frappez pas et n’appliquez pas une pression importante à l’emplacement des

composants des coussins gonflables SRS.

Cela peut provoquer un mauvais fonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

●Ne touchez à aucun composant des coussins gonflables SRS immédiatement après

leur déploiement (gonflage), car ils pourraient être chauds.

●Si vous avez de la difficulté à respirer après le déploiement des coussins gonflables

SRS, ouvrez une portière ou une glace pour laisser entrer l’air, ou quittez le véhicule

si vous pouvez le faire en toute sécurité. Dès que possible, nettoyez tous les résidus

afin d’éviter les irritations cutanées.

●Si les emplacements de stockage des coussins gonflables SRS, tels que le tampon de

volant et les garnitures des montants avant, latéraux et arrière, sont endommagés ou

fissurés, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Lexus.

●Ne placez aucun objet, par exemple un coussin, sur le siège du passager avant. Cela

disperserait le poids du passager, ce qui empêcherait le capteur de le détecter cor-

rectement. Cela pourrait empêcher le déploiement des coussins gonflables SRS du

passager avant en cas de collision.

●Ne fixez rien sur des zones telles que les

portières, le pare-brise, les glaces de

portières, les montants avant, latéraux ou

arrière, le brancard de pavillon et la poignée

de maintien.

606

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

AVERTISSEMENT

■Modification et mise au rebut des composants du système de coussins gonflables

SRS

Ne mettez pas votre véhicule au rebut et n’effectuez aucune des modifications suiva-

ntes sans d’abord consulter votre concessionnaire Lexus. Les coussins gonflables SRS

pourraient fonctionner de manière incorrecte ou se déployer (gonfler) accidentelle-

ment, ce qui serait susceptible d’occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

●Installation, retrait, démontage et réparation des coussins gonflables SRS

●Réparations, modifications, retrait ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord,

de la planche de bord, des sièges, du capitonnage des sièges, des montants avant,

latéraux et arrière ou des brancards de pavillon

●Réparations ou modifications de l’aile avant, du pare-chocs avant ou du côté de

l’habitacle

●Installation d’une protection de calandre (barre safari, barre kangourou, etc.), de

lames de déneigement, de treuils ou d’un porte-bagages de toit

●Modifications du système de suspension du véhicule

●Installation d’appareils électroniques tels qu’un émetteur-récepteur radio ou un lec-

teur de CD

●Modifications à votre véhicule pour une personne aux capacités physiques réduites

607

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Index

What to do if...

(Troubleshooting).............................. 608

Alphabetical index...................................612

For vehicles with a navigation system or a multimedia system, refer

to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL” for infor-

mation regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Audio/video system

• Rear seat entertainment system

• Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

608 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

●If you lose your mechanical keys, new genuine mechanical keys can be made

by your Lexus dealer. (→P. 112)

●If you lose your electronic keys, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly.

Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. (→P. 114)

●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted? (→P. 503)

●Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

When locking the doors, turn the engine switch off. (→P. 206)

●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle?

When locking the doors, make sure that you have the electronic key on your

person.

●The function may not operate properly due to the condition of the radio wave.

(→P. 134)

●Is the child-protector lock set?

The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the lock is set.

Open the rear door from outside and then unlock the child-protector lock.

(→P. 118)

If you have a problem, check the following before contacting your Lexus

dealer.

The doors cannot be locked, unlocked, opened or closed

You lose your keys

The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

The rear door cannot be opened

609

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

●Did you press the engine switch while firmly depressing the brake pedal?

(→P. 205)

●Is the shift lever in P? (→P. 205)

●Is the electronic key anywhere detectable inside the vehicle? (→P. 133)

●Is the steering wheel unlocked? (→P. 208)

●Is the electronic key battery weak or depleted?

In this case, the engine can be started in a temporary way. (→P. 547)

●Is the battery discharged? (→P. 549)

●Is the engine switch in IGNITION ON mode?

If you cannot release the shift lever by depressing the brake pedal with the

engine switch in IGNITION ON mode (→P. 215)

If you think something is wrong

The engine does not start

The shift lever cannot be shifted from P even if you depress the brake

pedal

610 What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

●It is locked automatically to prevent theft of the vehicle. (→P. 207)

●Is the window lock switch pressed?

The power window except for the one at the driver’s seat cannot be operated

if the window lock switch is pressed. (→P. 165)

●The auto power off function will be operated if the vehicle is left in ACCES-

SORY or IGNITION ON mode (the engine is not running) for a period of

time. (→P. 207)

●The seat belt reminder light is flashing

Are the driver and the front passenger wearing the seat belts?

(→P. 522)

●The parking brake indicator is on

Is the parking brake released? (→P. 218)

Depending on the situation, other types of warning buzzer may also sound.

(→P. 520, 528)

●Did anyone inside the vehicle open a door during setting the alarm?

The sensor detects it and the alarm sounds. (→P. 77)

To stop the alarm, turn the engine switch to IGNITION ON mode or start the

engine.

The steering wheel cannot be turned after the engine is stopped

The windows do not open or close by operating the power window

switches

The engine switch is turned off automatically

A warning buzzer sounds during driving

An alarm is activated and the horn sounds

611

What to do if... (Troubleshooting)

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

●Is the electronic key left inside the vehicle or the moon roof opened?

Check the message on the multi-information display. (→P. 528)

●When a warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed, refer to

P. 520, 528.

●Stop the vehicle in a safe place and replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

(→P. 532)

●Try the procedure for when the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

(→P. 555)

A warning buzzer sounds when leaving the vehicle

A warning light turns on or a warning message is displayed

When a problem has occurred

If you have a flat tire

The vehicle becomes stuck

612 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Alphabetical index

A/C..................................................399, 410

Air conditioning filter.........................501

Changing the rear seat

settings................................................ 404

Front automatic air

conditioning system..................... 399

Micro dust and pollen filter.......... 405

Rear air conditioning system.........410

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)........377

Function .................................................. 377

Warning light ...................................... 520

Active head restraint............................ 140

Active Height Control

Suspension...........................................295

Active TRAC...........................................377

Air cleaner.................................................471

Air conditioning filter........................... 501

Air conditioning system...........399, 410

Air conditioning filter.........................501

Changing the rear seat

settings................................................ 404

Front automatic air

conditioning system..................... 399

Micro dust and pollen filter.......... 405

Rear air conditioning system.........410

Airbags........................................................ 38

Airbag operating conditions .......... 46

Airbag precautions for your

child............................................................41

Airbag warning light ........................520

Correct driving posture.................... 28

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions....................... 46

Curtain shield airbag

precautions .......................................... 44

Front passenger occupant

classification system.........................50

General airbag precautions ............. 41

Locations of airbags............................38

Modification and disposal

of airbags...............................................45

Side airbag operating

conditions ............................................. 46

Side airbag precautions.................... 44

Side and curtain shield

airbags operating conditions...... 46

Side and curtain shield

airbags precautions......................... 44

SRS airbag instructions for

Canadian owners..........................599

SRS airbags.............................................38

Alarm ............................................................77

Alarm...........................................................77

Warning buzzer.................................520

Anchor brackets.......................................62

Antenna

Smart access system with

push-button start..............................132

613

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Anti-lock brake system

(ABS).......................................................377

Function .................................................. 377

Warning light ...................................... 520

Approach warning

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range....................276

Armrest .................................................... 442

Assist grips.............................................. 444

Audio input*

Audio system*

Automatic air conditioning

system..........................................399, 410

Air conditioning filter.........................501

Front automatic air

conditioning system..................... 399

Rear air conditioning system.........410

Automatic door locking and

unlocking systems................................119

Automatic headlight leveling

system.................................................... 223

Automatic High Beam ....................... 224

Automatic light control system....... 222

Automatic transmission...................... 210

2nd start mode....................................... 211

Downshift restriction warning

buzzer................................................... 215

Driving mode select switch ..........284

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P .................................... 215

S mode......................................................213

AUX port*

Auxiliary boxes......................................425

Back door..................................................122

Back door handle................................124

Jam protection function....................126

Power back door ................................124

Wireless remote control................... 110

Battery ...................................................... 482

Battery checking................................482

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.........................................549

Preparing and checking

before winter....................................382

Warning light.......................................520

Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)............... 363

Bluetooth®*

Bluetooth® audio*

Bluetooth® phone*

Bottle holders .........................................424

Brake

Fluid..........................................................564

Parking brake........................................218

Warning light.......................................520

Brake assist..............................................377

Break-in tips .............................................175

Brightness control

Instrument panel light control ........89

BSM (Blind Spot Monitor)............... 363

Blind Spot Monitor function.........367

Rear Cross Traffic Alert

function................................................ 373

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

614 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Care.................................................458, 461

Aluminum wheels ............................. 458

Exterior................................................... 458

Interior ...................................................... 461

Radar sensor....................................... 366

Seat belts................................................462

Cargo capacity....................................... 186

Cargo hooks ...........................................427

Cargo net hooks....................................427

CD player*

Chains.......................................................383

Child restraint system............................ 57

Booster seat definition....................... 58

Booster seat installation.....................69

Convertible seat definition.............. 58

Convertible seat installation............67

Front passenger occupant

classification system........................ 50

Infant seat/convertible seat

definition................................................ 58

Infant seat/convertible seat

installation..............................................65

Installing CRS with

LATCH system..................................63

Installing CRS with seat belt............65

Installing CRS with top tether

strap..........................................................70

LATCH system......................................63

Child safety.................................................56

Airbag precautions................................ 41

Back door precautions..................... 127

Battery precautions...............483, 551

Child-protectors................................... 118

Child restraint system......................... 57

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................................... 34

Installing child restraints .................... 62

Moon roof precautions ......................171

Power window lock switch.............165

Power window precautions...........167

Rear door child-protectors............. 118

Removed key battery

precautions .......................................504

Safety information.................................56

Seat belt extender precautions ......37

Seat belt precautions..........................36

Seat heater precautions...................413

Child-protectors ..................................... 118

Cleaning ........................................ 458, 461

Aluminum wheels..............................458

Exterior ...................................................458

Interior.......................................................461

Radar sensor........................................366

Seat belts................................................ 462

Climate concierge switch.................398

Clock..........................................................432

Coat hooks..............................................443

Compass ......................................................91

Condenser...............................................479

Cool box.................................................. 430

615

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Coolant.....................................................562

Capacity.................................................562

Checking................................................478

Preparing and checking

before winter ................................... 382

Cooling system

Engine overheating.......................... 552

Crawl Control .......................................307

Cruise control

Cruise control....................................... 281

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range....................269

Cup holders............................................ 423

Curtain shield airbags ...........................38

Customizable features.......................580

Daytime running light system.......... 222

Defogger

Outside rear view mirrors............ 405

Rear window ....................................... 405

Windshield........................................... 405

Differential...............................................563

Dimension ...............................................558

Dinghy towing........................................204

Display

Crawl Control.....................................307

Drive information.................................. 94

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range ...................269

Fuel consumption information..... 106

Head-up display .................................100

Intuitive parking assist......................288

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......264

Multi-information display....................91

Multi-terrain Monitor.........................316

Multi-terrain Select .............................312

Warning messages ..........................528

Do-it-yourself maintenance..............470

Door courtesy lights

Location ...................................................417

Doors

Automatic door locking and

unlocking system............................... 119

Back door................................................ 122

Door glasses..........................................165

Door lock.................................................. 115

Open door warning buzzer........ 522

Open door warning light .............. 522

Outside rear view mirrors ..............162

Rear door child-protectors............. 118

Side doors................................................ 115

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

616 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Drive information .................................... 94

Driver’s seat belt reminder light.....522

Driver’s seat position memory...........151

Driving.........................................................174

Break-in tips .......................................... 175

Correct posture.....................................28

Driving in the rain................................ 175

Driving mode select switch ..........284

Off-road precautions...................... 386

Procedures .............................................174

Winter drive tips................................ 382

Driving position memory......................151

Driving position memory..................151

Memory recall function.................... 152

Power easy access system ..............151

DVD player*

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range

Function ..................................................269

Eco Driving Indicator Light................. 87

EDR (Event data recorder)...................10

Electronic key...........................................110

Battery-saving function.................... 134

If the electronic key does not

operate properly............................ 546

Replacing the battery......................503

Emergency, in case of

If a warning buzzer sounds..........520

If a warning light turns on ..............520

If a warning message is

displayed ............................................528

If the electronic key does not

operate properly............................546

If the engine will not start ...............544

If the vehicle battery is

discharged.........................................549

If you have a flat tire..........................532

If you lose your keys....................112, 114

If you think something is

wrong.................................................... 518

If your vehicle becomes stuck.....555

If your vehicle has to be stopped

in an emergency................................ 511

If your vehicle needs to be

towed .....................................................512

If your vehicle overheats................552

Emergency flashers ..............................510

617

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Engine

Accessory mode............................... 206

Air cleaner...............................................471

Compartment......................................473

Engine switch...................................... 205

Exhaust gas precautions................... 74

Hood........................................................472

How to start the engine................. 205

Identification number......................559

If the engine will not start................544

If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency.............511

Ignition switch (engine

switch)................................................. 205

Overheating........................................ 552

Engine compartment cover............. 474

Engine coolant....................................... 478

Capacity.................................................562

Checking................................................478

Preparing and checking

before winter ................................... 382

Engine coolant temperature

gauge ........................................................88

Engine immobilizer system ................. 75

Engine oil ................................................. 475

Capacity................................................560

Checking................................................475

Preparing and checking

before winter ................................... 382

Engine switch (ignition switch).......205

Engine switch light

(ignition switch light)......................... 417

Event data recorder (EDR)...................10

Exhaust gas precautions.......................74

First-aid kit holder................................ 428

Flat tire...................................................... 532

Floor mats....................................................26

Fluid

Automatic transmission..................563

Brake........................................................564

Steering ..................................................564

Washer...................................................485

Fog lights...................................................229

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508

Switch ...................................................... 229

Footwell lights..........................................417

Four-wheel AHC (Active Height

Control Suspension) ....................... 295

Easy access mode ............................ 297

Disabling the height control.........298

Selecting vehicle height..................295

Four-wheel drive system

Center differential

lock/unlock.......................................304

Four-wheel drive control

switch ...................................................303

Warning light....................................... 522

Front automatic air conditioning

system.................................................... 399

Front doors................................................ 115

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

618 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Front passenger occupant

classification system............................50

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light .....................................522

Front seats................................................ 140

Adjustment............................................. 140

Cleaning.................................................. 461

Correct driving posture ....................28

Driving position memory..................151

Head restraints.....................................155

Power easy access system ..............151

Seat heaters ........................................... 415

Seat ventilators..................................... 415

Front side marker lights.......................221

Light switch.............................................221

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Front turn signal lights ..........................217

Turn signal lever ...................................217

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Fuel.............................................................566

Capacity................................................560

Fuel gauge............................................... 88

Fuel pump shut off system.............. 519

Gas station information................. 628

Information........................................... 566

Refueling.................................................239

Type.........................................................560

Warning light .......................................522

Fuel consumption information..........105

Fuel filler door........................................ 239

Opener...................................................240

Refueling ................................................ 239

Fuel pump shut off system ..................519

Fuses..........................................................505

Gas station information..................... 628

Garage door opener.......................... 445

Gauges........................................................88

Glove box .................................................421

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)*

Head restraints........................................155

Headlight cleaner ................................ 238

Headlights.................................................221

Automatic headlight leveling....... 223

Automatic High Beam system ... 224

Light switch............................................. 221

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508

Head-up display .................................... 100

Heated steering wheel ........................414

Heaters

Front automatic air conditioning

system..................................................399

Outside rear view mirrors ............405

Seat heaters............................................415

High mounted stoplight

Replacing.............................................. 508

619

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Hill-start assist control.........................377

Hood...........................................................472

Hooks

Cargo hooks........................................ 427

Cargo net hooks................................ 427

Coat hooks ...........................................443

Retaining hooks (floor mat).............26

Horn............................................................158

I/M test .....................................................469

Identification

Engine.....................................................559

Vehicle ...................................................559

Ignition switch (engine switch)........205

Ignition switch light

(engine switch light)...........................417

Illuminated entry system......................419

Immobilizer system................................. 75

Indicators....................................................82

Initialization

Engine oil maintenance data....... 465

Items to initialize................................. 593

Power window.....................................166

Tire pressure warning system ....488

Inside rear view mirror........................ 160

Instrument panel light control............89

Interior lights.............................................417

Switch........................................................ 418

Intuitive parking assist.........................287

Jack

Vehicle-equipped jack...................532

Jack handle............................................. 532

Jam protection function

Moon roof...............................................165

Power back door opener

and closer ............................................126

Power windows....................................169

Keyless entry

Smart access system with

push-button start..............................132

Wireless remote control................... 110

Keys .............................................................. 110

Battery-saving function ....................134

Electronic key.........................................110

Engine switch ......................................205

If the electronic key does not

operate properly............................546

If you lose your keys....................112, 114

Key number plate................................. 110

Keyless entry........................................... 110

Keys.............................................................110

Mechanical key...................................... 110

Replacing the battery ......................503

Warning buzzer...................................133

Knee airbags............................................. 38

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

620 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Language (multi-information

display)...................................................590

LATCH system ........................................ 63

LDA (Lane Departure Alert) ............261

Lever

Auxiliary catch lever .........................472

Hood lock release lever.................472

Shift lever................................................. 210

Turn signal lever ...................................217

Wiper lever................................ 231, 235

Lexus climate concierge ...................398

Climate concierge switch............. 398

Lexus parking assist monitor*

Lexus Safety System+......................... 242

License plate lights.................................221

Light switch.............................................221

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Light

Automatic High Beam system....224

Engine switch light...............................417

Fog light switch ...................................229

Headlight switch...................................221

Illuminated entry system.................. 419

Interior lights.......................................... 418

Luggage compartment light..........417

Personal lights ...................................... 419

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Turn signal lever ...................................217

Vanity lights ........................................... 431

Light bulbs

Replacing ..............................................508

Lock steering column.........................207

Luggage cover ......................................428

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance.........470

General maintenance.....................466

Maintenance data............................. 558

Maintenance requirements..........464

Scheduled maintenance ................464

Malfunction indicator lamp..............520

Meter............................................................88

Indicators.................................................. 82

Instrument panel light control ........89

Meters........................................................88

Multi-information display....................91

Warning lights.....................................520

Warning messages ..........................528

Micro dust and pollen filter.............. 405

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror..................... 160

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers...........................................405

Outside rear view mirrors ..............162

Vanity mirrors .......................................431

Moon roof.................................................168

Jam protection function....................169

Operation............................................... 168

MP3 disc*

621

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Multi-information display.......................91

Crawl Control.....................................307

Display contents......................................91

Drive information..................................94

Dynamic radar cruise control

with full-speed range....................269

Fuel consumption information .....106

Intuitive parking assist..................... 288

Language..............................................590

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......264

Multi-information display ....................91

Switching the display...........................93

Multi terrain ABS...................................377

Multi-terrain Monitor ...........................316

Multi-terrain Select................................312

Navigation system*

Noise from under vehicle .......................8

Odometer ..................................................89

Off road precautions ..........................386

Oil

Engine oil...............................................560

Front differential oil........................... 563

Rear differential oil............................ 563

Transfer oil............................................ 564

Opener

Back door................................................123

Fuel filler door......................................240

Hood........................................................472

Outside rear view mirrors..................162

Adjusting and folding ........................162

Blind Spot Monitor...........................363

Driving position memory.................. 151

Linked mirror function when

reversing...............................................163

Mirror position memory ................... 151

Outside rear view mirror

defoggers...........................................405

Outside temperature

display............................................. 95, 102

Overheating, Engine.......................... 552

Paddle shift switches.............................212

Panic mode..................................................111

Parking assist sensors

(Intuitive parking assist)...................287

Parking brake ..........................................218

Operation................................................218

Parking brake engaged

warning buzzer...............................523

Parking lights ...........................................221

Light switch............................................. 221

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508

PCS (Pre-Collision system) .............249

Enabling/disabling the system....253

Function.................................................. 249

Warning light.........................................521

Personal lights......................................... 417

Switch........................................................419

Power back door ...................................124

Power easy access system.................. 151

Power outlet........................................... 433

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

622 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Power steering

Fluid.......................................................... 564

Power windows.......................................165

Jam protection function...................165

Operation...............................................165

Window lock switch..........................165

Radar cruise control (dynamic

radar cruise control with

full-speed range)............................... 269

Radiator.................................................... 479

Radio*

Rear air conditioning system............ 410

Rear seat....................................................142

Adjustment..............................................142

Folding the third seats ...................... 145

Tumbling the second seats............ 143

Rear side marker lights........................221

Light switch.............................................221

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Rear turn signal lights ...........................217

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Turn signal lever ...................................217

Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror.....................160

Outside rear view mirrors.............. 162

Rear view monitor system*

Rear window defogger......................405

Rear window wiper..............................235

Refueling..................................................239

Capacity................................................560

Fuel types..............................................560

Opening the fuel tank cap.............239

Remote touch/12.3-inch

display.................................................... 392

Replacing

Electronic key battery .....................503

Fuses....................................................... 505

Light bulbs............................................ 508

Tires..........................................................532

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners......................................... 596

Resetting the message indicating

maintenance is required................ 465

Safety Connect......................................452

Scheduled maintenance ....................464

Seat belts .................................................... 30

Adjusting the seat belt........................ 33

Automatic Locking Retractor ........ 34

Child restraint system

installation ............................................. 62

Cleaning and maintaining the

seat belt...............................................462

Emergency locking retractor......... 34

How to wear your seat belt............. 28

How your child should wear

the seat belt.......................................... 34

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use................................................... 35

Reminder light and buzzer........... 522

Seat belt extender................................ 34

Seat belt pretensioners...................... 33

SRS warning light ..............................520

623

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Seat heaters..............................................415

Seat position memory............................151

Seat ventilators........................................415

Seating capacity..................................... 186

Seats...................................................140, 142

Adjustment...................................140, 142

Adjustment precautions ......... 141, 150

Armrest...................................................442

Child seats/child restraint

system installation..............................62

Cleaning.................................................. 461

Driving position memory..................151

Folding up the third seats................ 145

Front seats ..............................................140

Head restraint.......................................155

Heaters..................................................... 415

Power easy access system ..............151

Properly sitting in the seat ................28

Rear seats ................................................142

Seat heaters ........................................... 415

Seat position memory.........................151

Seat ventilators..................................... 415

Second seats..........................................142

Third seats ...............................................142

Tumbling the second seats............ 143

Ventilators .............................................. 415

Sensor

Automatic headlight system .........222

Automatic High Beam

system.................................................. 224

Inside rear view mirror..................... 160

Intuitive parking assist...................... 287

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).........261

Radar sensor........................................ 244

Rain-sensing windshield

wipers................................................... 233

Service reminder indicators............... 82

Shift lever

Automatic transmission....................210

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P.....................................215

Shift lock system.........................................214

Side airbags............................................... 38

Side doors.................................................. 115

Side marker lights..................................221

Light switch............................................. 221

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508

Side mirrors..............................................162

Adjusting and folding ........................162

Blind Spot Monitor...........................363

Heaters ...................................................405

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs ...................... 508

Turn signal lever................................... 217

Smart access system with

push-button start.................................132

Antenna location..................................132

Entry functions ............................. 115, 122

Starting the engine............................205

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

624 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Snow tires ................................................382

“SOS” button..........................................452

Spare tire

Inflation pressure............................... 565

Storage location .................................532

Spark plug ...............................................562

Specifications.........................................558

Speedometer............................................88

SRS airbags................................................38

Steering

Column lock release........................207

Fluid.......................................................... 564

Steering wheel........................................158

Adjustment.............................................158

Audio switches*

Meter control switches ......................93

Power easy access system ..............151

Telephone switches*

Stop/tail lights

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Storage feature .....................................420

Stuck

If the vehicle becomes stuck.......555

Sun visors...................................................431

Sunshade

Roof............................................................169

Rear door...............................................443

Switch

Audio remote control switches*

Automatic High Beam switch.....225

Center differential lock/unlock

switch ...................................................304

Climate concierge switch.............398

Cruise control switch ........... 269, 281

Door lock switch....................................117

Driving mode select switch..........284

Driving position memory

switches ................................................152

Emergency flashers switch............ 510

Engine switch ......................................205

Fog light switch................................... 229

Four-wheel drive control

switch ...................................................303

Garage door opener

switches ..............................................445

Headlight cleaner switch...............238

Interior light switch..............................418

Intuitive parking assist...................... 287

Ignition switch......................................205

LDA (Lane Departure Alert).......263

Light switches........................................ 221

Meter control switches...................... 93

Moon roof switches .......................... 168

Outside rear view mirror

switches ................................................162

Paddle shift switches.......................... 212

Personal light switch ..........................419

Power back door switch..................124

Power door lock switch.....................117

Power window switch.......................165

625

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Rear window wiper and

washer switch...................................235

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror defoggers

switch................................................... 405

Seat heater switches.......................... 415

Seat ventilator switches ................... 415

“SOS” button........................................452

Talk switch*

Telephone switches*

Tilt and telescopic steering

control switch....................................158

Tire pressure warning reset

switch...................................................488

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

button ...................................................275

VSC OFF switch ...............................378

Window lock switch..........................165

Windshield wipers and

washer switch.....................................231

Wireless charger power

supply switch ....................................435

Tachometer ...............................................88

Tail lights.....................................................221

Light switch.............................................221

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Talk switch*

Telephone switch*

Theft deterrent system

Alarm........................................................... 77

Immobilizer system..............................75

Tire inflation pressure......................... 565

Maintenance data..............................565

Warning light....................................... 522

Tire information .................................... 569

Glossary.................................................575

Size .............................................................571

Tire identification number .............570

Uniform Tire Quality Grading....573

Tire pressure warning system..........487

Function..................................................487

Initializing ...............................................487

Installing tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters................487

Registering ID codes...................... 488

Tire pressure warning reset

switch .................................................. 488

Warning light....................................... 522

Tires ........................................................... 486

Chains.....................................................383

Checking...............................................486

If you have a flat tire..........................532

Inflation pressure................................495

Replacing...............................................532

Rotating tires........................................486

Size ...........................................................565

Snow tires..............................................382

Spare tire................................... 532, 565

Tire pressure warning system.....487

Warning light....................................... 522

Tools .......................................................... 532

Total load capacity...............................558

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

626 Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Towing

Dinghy towing .....................................204

Emergency towing............................. 512

Towing eyelet........................................ 514

Trailer Sway Control........................377

Trailer towing........................................ 187

TRAC (Traction Control)..................377

Trailer Sway Control............................377

Trailer towing...........................................187

Transmission

Automatic transmission................... 210

Downshift restriction warning

buzzer................................................... 215

Driving mode select switch ..........284

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P .................................... 215

Paddle shift switches ..........................212

Trip meters.................................................89

Troubleshooting....................................608

Turn signal lights .....................................217

Replacing light bulbs.......................508

Turn signal lever ...................................217

USB port*

Utility vehicle precautions ................386

Vanity lights..............................................431

Vanity lights............................................431

Vanity mirrors..........................................431

Vehicle data recordings...........................9

Vehicle identification number ........ 559

Vehicle Stability Control (VSC).....377

Ventilators (seat ventilators).............415

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control).....377

Warning buzzers ................................. 520

Approach warning ........................... 276

Brake system .......................................520

Downshifting..........................................215

Driver’s seat belt reminder ........... 522

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder............................................. 522

Intuitive parking assist......................290

Lane departure...................................265

Master warning system .................. 522

Open back door................................ 522

Open door ........................................... 522

Open moon roof.................................170

Parking brake......................................523

PCS............................................................521

Power steering system ................... 522

Radar cruise control ........................ 276

Seat belt reminder............................. 522

627

Alphabetical index

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

Warning lights .......................................520

ABS.......................................................... 520

Automatic headlight leveling

system ................................................... 521

Brake system........................... 520, 523

Center differential lock....................522

Charging system............................... 520

Low fuel level .......................................522

Low speed four-wheel

drive ......................................................522

Malfunction indicator lamp.......... 520

Master warning light.........................522

Open door............................................522

Parking brake.......................................522

PCS............................................................ 521

Power steering system....................522

Seat belt reminder light...................522

Slip indicator.......................................... 521

SRS........................................................... 520

Tire pressure ........................................522

Warning messages..............................528

Warning reflector holder.................. 428

Washer........................................... 231, 235

Checking...............................................485

Preparing and checking

before winter....................................382

Switch............................................231, 235

Washing and waxing ..........................458

Weights....................................................558

Wheels ..................................................... 499

Replacing wheels .............................. 532

Size ...........................................................565

Window glasses......................................165

Window lock switch..............................165

Windows

Power windows....................................165

Rear window defogger ..................405

Washer.........................................231, 235

Windshield wiper de-icer.................405

Windshield wipers.................................231

Winter driving tips............................... 382

Wireless charger.................................. 435

Wireless remote control key..............110

Locking/Unlocking.............................110

Panic mode ............................................... 111

Replacing the battery ......................503

WMA disc*

*: Refer to the “NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL”.

628

LX570_OM_OM60Q78U_(U)

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Fuel filler door Auxiliary catch lever

P. 240 P. 472

Tire inflation pressure Fuel filler door opener Hood lock release lever

P. 565 P. 240 P. 472

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference) 24.5 gal. (93 L, 20.4 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 560

Cold tire inflation

pressure P. 565

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill —

reference) With filter

Without filter 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp.qt.)

7.5 qt. (7.1 L, 6.2 Imp.qt.)

Engine oil type “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent P. 560

OM60Q78U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation